| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Revised User manual part 1 | Users Manual | 1.27 MiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
Revised User manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.14 MiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
Users manual part 1 | Users Manual | 1.32 MiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
Users manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.14 MiB | ||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
| 1 | Operational Description | |||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | October 04 2012 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements |
| 1 | Revised User manual part 1 | Users Manual | 1.27 MiB |
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Broadband Wireless Transmission System User Manual Version 2.6.50p1 UM 5000-2650/10.11 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User Manual Notice This manual contains information that is proprietary to RADWIN Ltd. (RADWIN hereafter). No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RADWIN. Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the RADWIN products and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RADWIN protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RADWIN. The RADWIN name is a registered trademark of RADWIN Ltd. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark. You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the User Manual or any other RADWIN documentation or products. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality based or derived in any way from RADWIN products.Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement. This Agreement is effective upon your opening of a RADWIN product package and shall continue until terminated. RADWIN may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term thereof. Upon such termination by RADWIN, you agree to return to RADWIN any RADWIN products and documentation and all copies and portions thereof. For further information contact RADWIN at the address below or contact your local distributor. Disclaimer The parameters quoted in this document must be specifically confirmed in writing before they become applicable to any particular order or contract. RADWIN reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detail specification at its discretion. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of RADWIN, or others. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 i RADWIN Worldwide Offices Corporate Headquarters 27 Habarzel Street Tel Aviv, 69710 Israel Tel: +972 3 766 2917 Support Headquarter 27 Habarzel Street Tel Aviv, 69710 Israel Tel: +972 3 766 2900 Mobile: +972 54 766 0044 RADWIN North America 900 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA Tel (1): 1 800 444 7234 / 341 Tel (2): +1 201 529 1100 / 341 Latin America Headquarters Rua Grao Mogol 828 Belo Horizonte, MG 30310-010 Brazil Tel (1): +55 31 919 76 402 Tel (2): +972 54 758 6808 India Headquarters Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate E-13, B-1 Extn New Delhi, 110044 India Tel: +91 11 4053 9180 APAC Headquarters 1 Jalan Kuala #13-01 The Morningside, 239639 Singapore Tel: +65 9878 3004 Indonesia Sales Office Jl. Jenderal Sudirman Kav. 86 Jakarta, 10220 Indonesia Tel: +62 8138 570 0657 Philippines Sales Office 37A. A luna St. West Rembo Makati City, 1200 Philippines Tel: +63 2882 6886 Mobile: +63 91 789 23427 China Sales Office Asian Games Village Huiyuan Gongyu J1312 Beijing 100101 China Tel: +86 010 8498 0629 For technical support contact: support@radwin.com For technical support in India only, contact: support-india@radwnin.com For sales support contact: sales@radwin.com Website: www.radwin.com RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 ii Regulatory Compliance General Note This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and in these bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause interference. FCC/IC - Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES-003 of IC. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance (RADWIN Ltd.) could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when using the outdoor antenna kits in the United States (or where FCC rules apply), only those antennas certified with the product are used. The use of any antenna other than those certified with the product is expressly forbidden in accordance to FCC rules CFR47 part 15.204. Warning In accordance to IC standard RSS-Gen - To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p) is not more than that permitted for successful communication Caution Caution Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may void the product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Resellers or distributors of this equipment are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas. The installer should configure the output power level of antennas according to country regulations and antenna type. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 iii The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 225cm from all persons and must not be co-
located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This product was tested with special accessories - indoor unit (IDU or PoE), FTP Cat 5e shielded cable with sealing gasket, 12 AWG grounding cable - which must be used with the unit to insure compliance. Warning Warning Indoor Units comply with part 15 of the FCC rules and ICES-003 standard. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause harmful interference.
(2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canadian Emission Requirements for Indoor Units This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Safety Practices Applicable requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70; and the National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI/IEEE C2, must be considered during installation. NOTES:
1. A Primary Protector is not required to protect the exposed wiring as long as the exposed wiring length is limited to less than or equal to 140 feet, and instructions are provided to avoid exposure of wiring to accidental contact with lightning and power conductors in accordance with NEC Sections 725-54 (c) and 800-30. In all other cases, an appropriate Listed Primary Protector must be provided. Refer to Articles 800 and 810 of the NEC for details. 2. For protection of ODU against direct lightning strikes, appropriate requirements of NFPA 780 should be considered in addition to NEC. 3. For Canada, appropriate requirements of Section 60 of the CEC 22.1should be considered as applicable. 4. E1/T1 ports are intended for connection to indoor lines only and are not exposed to outdoor plants. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 iv Table of Contents Notice....................................................................................................................... i RADWIN Worldwide Offices.................................................................................... ii Regulatory Compliance.............................................................................................. iii Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome! .............................................................................................................. 1-1 Key Applications ..................................................................................................... 1-2 WiMAX and IP Backhaul......................................................................................1-2 Broadband Access..............................................................................................1-2 Private Networks................................................................................................1-3 Key Features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ............................................................... 1-3 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Link................................................................................ 1-5 The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU)............................................................................1-6 The Indoor Units (IDU).......................................................................................1-8 IDU-C......................................................................................................................... 1-8 IDU-E......................................................................................................................... 1-9 Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices.....................................................................1-9 Antennas.........................................................................................................1-10 Flat Panel Antennas................................................................................................... 1-11 Parabolic Dish Antennas ............................................................................................ 1-12 RADWIN Manager.............................................................................................1-12 Accessories......................................................................................................1-13 Documentation set supplied with RADWIN 1000/2000/5000................................1-13 How to Use this Manual ........................................................................................ 1-14 A Little Terminology ............................................................................................. 1-14 Conventions Used in this Manual ........................................................................... 1-16 Notifications.....................................................................................................1-16 Typographical conventions................................................................................1-16 General .................................................................................................................... 1-16 Software................................................................................................................... 1-16 Windows Terminology.......................................................................................1-17 Chapter 2 Site Preparation Planning the Link Site ............................................................................................. 2-1 Overview...........................................................................................................2-1 The Site Survey...................................................................................................... 2-1 Introduction.......................................................................................................2-1 Recommended Equipment...................................................................................2-1 Stage 1: Preliminary Survey .................................................................................... 2-2 Stage 2: Physical Survey......................................................................................... 2-3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements..................................................................2-4 Additional Indoor Site Requirements....................................................................2-4 Stage 3: RF Survey................................................................................................. 2-4 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Safety Practices...................................................................................................... 3-1 Preventing overexposure to RF energy.................................................................3-1 Grounding..........................................................................................................3-1 Protection against Lightning................................................................................3-2 General..............................................................................................................3-2 Package Contents................................................................................................... 3-2 ODU Package Contents.......................................................................................3-2 IDU Package Contents........................................................................................3-4 External Antenna Package Contents.....................................................................3-5 Additional Tools and Materials Required ................................................................... 3-5 Tools and Materials.............................................................................................3-5 Cables and connectors........................................................................................3-5 Hardware Installation Sequence .............................................................................. 3-5 Outdoor installation ................................................................................................ 3-6 Mounting the ODU..............................................................................................3-6 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 v Mounting external antennas................................................................................3-7 Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices...........................................................3-7 Outdoor Connections..........................................................................................3-8 Indoor Installation.................................................................................................. 3-8 IDU-E Installation........................................................................................................ 3-8 Mounting the IDU-C............................................................................................3-8 Connecting power to the IDU............................................................................3-11 Connecting the ODU to the IDU.........................................................................3-12 Installing a Link using PoE Devices.....................................................................3-12 Connecting User Equipment...............................................................................3-12 Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas ............................................................. 3-13 Chapter 4 Link Installation: The RADWIN Manager Installing theRADWIN Manager Application .............................................................. 4-1 Minimum System Requirements...........................................................................4-1 Installing the Software........................................................................................4-1 Starting the RADWIN Manager ................................................................................ 4-2 Login Errors ........................................................................................................... 4-5 Unsupported Device............................................................................................4-5 Incorrect IP Address...........................................................................................4-6 Incorrect Password.............................................................................................4-6 Continuing without an IP Address............................................................................ 4-6 Changing the Log On Password...........................................................................4-7 Installing the Link: First steps.................................................................................. 4-7 Default Settings..................................................................................................4-9 Front Panel LEDs on the IDU-C............................................................................4-9 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality........................................................4-10 Installing the Link: Overview ................................................................................. 4-13 Installing the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard ........................................................... 4-14 Installing the Link: Step 2, System Parameters ....................................................... 4-14 Changing the Link Password..............................................................................4-16 Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings........................................................... 4-17 Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings ..................................... 4-19 General............................................................................................................4-20 Dual Antennas at Both Sites..............................................................................4-20 Single Antennas at Both Sites............................................................................4-21 Single and Dual Antennas..................................................................................4-21 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters...............................................4-22 Installing the Link: Step 5, Services ....................................................................... 4-25 Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit ....................................... 4-26 Chapter 5 Configuring the Link Link Configuration: Getting Started.......................................................................... 5-1 The Main Window of the RADWIN Manager..........................................................5-1 The RADWIN Manager Toolbar............................................................................5-2 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu.......................................................................5-3 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window..................................................5-6 Configuring the Link: Overview.............................................................................. 5-10 Configuring the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard ........................................................ 5-11 Configuring the Link: Step 2, System Parameters.................................................... 5-11 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings ....................................................... 5-12 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings.................................. 5-18 Configuring the Link: Step 5, Services.................................................................... 5-20 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit................................. 5-21 Chapter 6 Site Configuration Configuring the Site................................................................................................ 6-1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site........................................................6-1 Functions on the left of the dialog box:......................................................................... 6-2 Functions at the top of the dialog box:.......................................................................... 6-2 Viewing Air Interface Details ................................................................................... 6-3 Changing the Transmit Power ................................................................................. 6-4 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 vi Site Management: IP Address and VLAN .................................................................. 6-4 Configuring the ODU Address..............................................................................6-4 Configuring VLAN Settings...................................................................................6-5 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID............................................................................................ 6-7 Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................................... 6-7 Ethernet Properties................................................................................................. 6-9 Configuring the Bridge........................................................................................6-9 ODU Mode................................................................................................................ 6-10 IDU Aging time ......................................................................................................... 6-10 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode.......................................................................6-11 Setting the Maximum Information Rate..............................................................6-12 Displaying the Inventory ....................................................................................... 6-12 Security Features ................................................................................................. 6-13 Changing the Link Password..............................................................................6-14 RADWIN Manager Community Strings................................................................6-14 Editing Community Strings ......................................................................................... 6-15 Forgotten Community string....................................................................................... 6-16 Muting the alignment tone .................................................................................... 6-17 Setting External Alarm Inputs................................................................................ 6-17 Managing Configuration Files................................................................................. 6-18 Backup Configuration to a File...........................................................................6-18 Restoring a Configuration File............................................................................6-19 Resetting.........................................................................................................6-19 Configuration with Telnet...................................................................................... 6-20 Chapter 7 Monitoring and Diagnostics Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics)........................................................... 7-1 Link Compatibility................................................................................................... 7-3 Reinstalling and Realigning a Link............................................................................ 7-3 The Link Budget Calculator ..................................................................................... 7-4 Performance Monitoring.......................................................................................... 7-4 The Monitor Log.................................................................................................7-4 Saving the Monitor Log................................................................................................ 7-4 Viewing Performance Reports....................................................................................... 7-5 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar........................................................................ 7-9 Setting Air Interface Thresholds ................................................................................... 7-9 The Events Log................................................................................................7-10 RADWIN Manager Traps...................................................................................7-11 Setting the Events Preferences................................................................................... 7-12 Saving the Events Log ............................................................................................... 7-13 Reverting Alarm Messages ......................................................................................... 7-13 Active Alarms............................................................................................................ 7-14 Remote Power Fail Indication..................................................................................... 7-15 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-16 Replacing an ODU ................................................................................................ 7-16 Restoring Factory Setup........................................................................................ 7-17 Online Help.......................................................................................................... 7-17 Customer Support ................................................................................................ 7-17 Appendix A Technical Specifications Configuration ........................................................................................................ A-1 Radio ................................................................................................................... A-1 Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................. A-5 Management......................................................................................................... A-5 Mechanical............................................................................................................ A-5 Power................................................................................................................... A-5 Environmental....................................................................................................... A-5 Safety................................................................................................................... A-6 EMC ..................................................................................................................... A-6 Air Interface.......................................................................................................... A-6 Appendix B Wiring Specifications ODU-IDU Cable ..................................................................................................... B-1 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 vii User Port Connectors............................................................................................ B-1 LAN Port...........................................................................................................B-1 IDU-C Alarm Connector......................................................................................B-3 Appendix C Pole and Wall Installation ODU Mounting Kit Contents.................................................................................... C-1 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a pole......................................................... C-2 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a Wall ........................................................ C-3 Mounting an External Antenna ............................................................................... C-3 Appendix D Link Budget Calculator Overview .............................................................................................................. D-1 User Input........................................................................................................D-1 Link Budget Calculator Internal Data...................................................................D-1 Calculations .......................................................................................................... D-2 EIRP.................................................................................................................D-2 Expected RSS and Fade Margin...........................................................................D-2 Min and Max Range...........................................................................................D-2 Service..............................................................................................................D-2 Availability........................................................................................................D-2 Antenna Height.................................................................................................D-3 Running the Link Budget Calculator ........................................................................ D-3 About the Fresnel Zone........................................................................................ D-13 Appendix E Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Grounding for Antenna Cable .................................................................................. E-1 Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units ........................................................................ E-2 ODU Grounding..................................................................................................E-2 IDU Grounding...................................................................................................E-2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding................................................ E-3 Internal ESD Protection circuits ............................................................................... E-7 Appendix F FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Links: Background .................................................................... F-1 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation.......................................................................... F-2 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration..................................................................... F-5 FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration ............................................................................. F-7 Registering the Device........................................................................................F-8 TDWR Table ........................................................................................................ F-11 Appendix G MIB Reference Introduction.......................................................................................................... G-1 About the MIB...................................................................................................G-1 Terminology......................................................................................................G-1 Interface API ........................................................................................................ G-1 Control Method..................................................................................................G-1 Community String..............................................................................................G-2 Private MIB Structure ............................................................................................ G-2 MIB Parameters .................................................................................................... G-4 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB.......................................................G-4 MIB Parameters.................................................................................................G-5 MIB Traps........................................................................................................... G-18 General...........................................................................................................G-18 Trap parameters..............................................................................................G-18 RADWIN Manager Traps..................................................................................G-21 Appendix H External Alarms Specification External Alarms Specification.................................................................................. H-1 Appendix I Combo Configuration Tool What is the Combo Configuration Tool? ................................................................... I-1 Who may use the Combo Configuration Tool ............................................................ I-1 Caveat to the use of the Combo Configuration Tool .................................................. I-1 Prerequisites to using the Combo Configuration Tool................................................. I-2 Operating the Combo Configuration Tool.................................................................. I-2 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 viii Before using the Combo Configuration Tool.............................................................. I-2 Using the Combo Configuration Tool........................................................................ I-2 If you receive an error message .............................................................................. I-6 Appendix J Regional Notice: French Canadian Procdures de scurit............................................................................................ J-1 Gnralits.........................................................................................................J-1 Mise la terre....................................................................................................J-1 Protection contre la foudre..................................................................................J-2 Prcautions de scurit pendant le montage de ODU............................................J-2 Connecter la terre IDU-C..................................................................................J-3 Installation sur pylne et mur.................................................................................. J-4 Contenu du kit de montage ODU.........................................................................J-4 Montage sur un pylne.......................................................................................J-5 Montage sur un mur...........................................................................................J-6 Montage d'une antenne externe...........................................................................J-7 Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe...............................................J-7 Index RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 ix List of Figures FIGURE 1-1 TYPICAL WIMAX AND IP BACKHAUL APPLICATION ....................................................1-2 FIGURE 1-2 TYPICAL BROADBAND ACCESS APPLICATION ...........................................................1-3 FIGURE 1-3 PRIVATE NETWORK..........................................................................................1-3 FIGURE 1-4 EXAMPLE OF LINK ARCHITECTURE - SYSTEM COMPONENTS ........................................1-6 FIGURE 1-5 ODU FORM FACTORS.......................................................................................1-7 FIGURE 1-6 IDU-C FRONT PANEL.......................................................................................1-9 FIGURE 1-7 IDU-E - FRONT VIEW.......................................................................................1-9 FIGURE 1-8 IDU-E: REAR PANEL........................................................................................1-9 FIGURE 1-9 POE DEVICE - SHOWING THE RADIO ETHERNET PORT .............................................1-10 FIGURE 1-10 ODU WITH INTEGRATED FLAT PANEL ANTENNA...................................................1-10 FIGURE 1-11 FLAT PANEL ANTENNA ..................................................................................1-11 FIGURE 1-12 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS - PARABOLIC DISH...........................................................1-12 FIGURE 1-13 RADWIN MANAGER SCREEN..........................................................................1-13 FIGURE 1-14 SITE CONFIGURATION WINDOW WITH OPEN MANAGEMENT PANEL............................1-18 FIGURE 3-1 ODU MOUNTING KIT .......................................................................................3-3 FIGURE 3-2 CONNECTORIZED ODU - FRONT AND REAR VIEWS...................................................3-3 FIGURE 3-3 INTEGRATED ODU - FRONT AND REAR VIEWS ........................................................3-4 FIGURE 3-4 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE IDU-C .............................................................3-4 FIGURE 3-5 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE MOUNTING KIT AND DC POWER PLUGS .....................3-4 FIGURE 3-6 TYPICAL INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (WITH EXTERNAL ANTENNA)....................................3-6 FIGURE 3-7 NEW STYLE IDU-E: REAR PANEL ........................................................................3-8 FIGURE 3-8 IDU-C FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................3-9 FIGURE 3-9 IDU-C - A PERSPECTIVE VIEW ...........................................................................3-9 FIGURE 3-10 IDU-C LEDS .............................................................................................3-10 FIGURE 3-11 DU-C OWER CONNECTORS.............................................................................3-12 FIGURE 3-12 BEEP SEQUENCE FOR ANTENNA ALIGNMENT ........................................................3-14 FIGURE 4-1 LAN PORTS ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE IDU-C ...................................................4-2 FIGURE 4-2 PINGING AN UNINSTALLED AND UNCONFIGURED LINK................................................4-3 FIGURE 4-3 LOGIN SCREEN ...............................................................................................4-3 FIGURE 4-4 LOGIN SCREEN WITH COMMUNITY OPTIONS VISIBLE.................................................4-5 FIGURE 4-5 UNSUPPORTED DEVICE MESSAGE .........................................................................4-5 FIGURE 4-6 UNREACHABLE DEVICE MESSAGE..........................................................................4-6 FIGURE 4-7 OPENING RADWIN MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ...............................4-8 FIGURE 4-8 IDU-C FRONT PANEL LEDS ............................................................................4-10 FIGURE 4-9 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD............................................................................4-14 FIGURE 4-10 : INSTALLATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX ..................................................4-15 FIGURE 4-11 CHANGE LINK PASSWORD DIALOG BOX..............................................................4-16 FIGURE 4-12 LOST OR FORGOTTEN LINK PASSWORD RECOVERY................................................4-17 FIGURE 4-13 CHANNEL SETTINGS - AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION........................................4-18 FIGURE 4-14 CHANNEL SETTINGS - SHOWING AVAILABLE INSTALLATION RATES ............................4-19 FIGURE 4-15 TRANSMISSION POWER AND ANTENNA PARAMETERS.............................................4-20 FIGURE 4-16 ANTENNA CONFIGURATION DIALOG WITH OPENED TYPE SELECTION .........................4-23 FIGURE 4-17 ANTENNA PARAMETERS CHANGE WARNING..........................................................4-24 FIGURE 4-18 TX POWER LIMITS .......................................................................................4-24 FIGURE 4-19 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG.........................................................................4-25 FIGURE 4-20 INSTALLATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY ............................................................4-26 FIGURE 4-21 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER INSTALLATION.........................................4-27 FIGURE 5-1 MAIN WINDOW, WIRELESS LINK IS ACTIVE ..........................................................5-2 FIGURE 5-2 ETHERNET BANDWIDTH INDICATION ....................................................................5-8 FIGURE 5-3 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD.........................................................................5-11 FIGURE 5-4 CONFIGURATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX....................................................5-12 FIGURE 5-5 CHANNEL SETTINGS DIALOG BOX - AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION .........................5-13 FIGURE 5-6 SEARCHING FOR THE BEST OPERATING CHANNEL ...................................................5-14 FIGURE 5-7 CHANNEL SETTINGS WITHOUT AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION................................5-15 FIGURE 5-8 CHANNEL FREQUENCY OPTIONS .........................................................................5-16 FIGURE 5-9 CHOOSING AN OTHER OPERATING CHANNEL FREQUENCY ......................................5-17 FIGURE 5-10 TRANSMISSION POWER AND ANTENNA PARAMETERS.............................................5-18 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 x FIGURE 5-11 ANTENNA CONFIGURATION DIALOG WITH OPENED TYPE SELECTION .........................5-19 FIGURE 5-12 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG.........................................................................5-20 FIGURE 5-13 CONFIGURATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY..........................................................5-21 FIGURE 5-14 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER CONFIGURATION ......................................5-22 FIGURE 6-1 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ............................................................................6-2 FIGURE 6-2 AIR INTERFACE DETAILS....................................................................................6-3 FIGURE 6-3 CHANGING THE TRANSMIT POWER.......................................................................6-4 FIGURE 6-4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX..................................6-5 FIGURE 6-5 CONFIGURING MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC VLAN SETTINGS .............................................6-6 FIGURE 6-6 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION........................................................................6-8 FIGURE 6-7 CHANGE DATE AND TIME ..................................................................................6-8 FIGURE 6-8 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURED FROM AN NTP SERVER...............................................6-9 FIGURE 6-9 BRIDGE CONFIGURATION - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX .................................6-10 FIGURE 6-10 INVENTORY SCREEN .....................................................................................6-13 FIGURE 6-11 AVAILABLE SECURITY FEATURES.......................................................................6-14 FIGURE 6-12 CHANGING THE COMMUNITY STRING ................................................................6-16 FIGURE 6-13 ALTERNATIVE COMMUNITY DIALOG BOX ............................................................6-17 FIGURE 6-14 EXTERNAL ALARM CONFIGURATION ..................................................................6-18 FIGURE 6-15 TELNET MANAGEMENT SCREEN .......................................................................6-22 FIGURE 7-1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DIALOG BOX .........................................................................7-2 FIGURE 7-2 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX.................................................................................7-5 FIGURE 7-3 BASIC PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT ..........................................................7-6 FIGURE 7-4 A TYPICAL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT .....................................................7-6 FIGURE 7-5 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX .............................................................7-9 FIGURE 7-6 EVENTS LOG DISPLAY.....................................................................................7-10 FIGURE 7-7 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX...............................................................................7-12 FIGURE 7-8 ACTIVE ALARMS SUMMARY ..............................................................................7-15 FIGURE 7-9 ONLINE HELP FOR RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ..................................................7-17 FIGURE B-1 EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING THE ALARM CONNECTOR................................................ B-4 FIGURE C-4 MOUNTING ON A POLE..................................................................................... C-2 FIGURE C-5 MOUNTING ON A WALL ................................................................................... C-3 FIGURE D-1 ACCESSING THE LINK BUDGET CALCULATOR ......................................................... D-4 FIGURE D-2 LINK BUDGET SCREEN..................................................................................... D-5 FIGURE D-3 PRODUCT SELECTOR ....................................................................................... D-7 FIGURE D-4 RATE SELECTOR............................................................................................. D-8 FIGURE D-5 CALCULATION OF DISTANCE FROM SITE COORDINATES............................................ D-9 FIGURE D-6 CLIMACTIC C FACTORS.................................................................................. D-10 FIGURE D-7 CLIMACTIC C FACTOR DESCRIPTION ................................................................. D-11 FIGURE D-8 WORLD MAP SHOWING C FACTOR CONTOURS ..................................................... D-12 FIGURE D-9 FRESNEL ZONE ............................................................................................ D-13 FIGURE E-1 GROUNDING ANTENNA CABLES ............................................................................E-2 FIGURE E-2 GROUNDING A TYPICAL POLE INSTALLATION ...........................................................E-3 FIGURE E-3 GROUNDING A TYPICAL WALL INSTALLATION...........................................................E-4 FIGURE E-4 ODU SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING ..........................................................E-4 FIGURE E-5 TRANSTECTORS SURGE SUPPRESSOR ...................................................................E-5 FIGURE E-6 SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING AT BUILDING ENTRY POINT................................E-7 FIGURE F-1 ACTIVATING AN ODU - INACTIVE LINK .................................................................F-2 FIGURE F-2 AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX...............................................................................F-3 FIGURE F-3 THE LOCAL ODU AFTER ACTIVATION - PROBING .....................................................F-4 FIGURE F-4 BOTH SITES ACTIVATED AND AWAITING CONFIGURATION ...........................................F-5 FIGURE F-5 CHANNEL SELECT DIALOG BOX - ACS PERMANENTLY ENABLED ....................................F-6 FIGURE F-6 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHZ OPERATIONAL ...................................................................F-7 FIGURE G-1 TOP LEVEL SECTIONS OF THE PRIVATE MIB ......................................................... G-3 FIGURE J-4 MONTAGE SUR UN PYLNE ................................................................................. J-5 FIGURE J-5 MONTAGE SUR UN MUR ..................................................................................... J-6 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 xi List of Tables TABLE 1-1 AVAILABLE ODU PRODUCTS - RELEASE 2.6.50P ......................................................1-8 TABLE 1-2 RELEASE 2.1 IDU-C PRODUCTS...........................................................................1-8 TABLE 3-1 COMPONENTS OF AN IDU-C FRONT PANEL ............................................................3-10 TABLE 3-2 IDU-C FRONT PANEL LEDS ..............................................................................3-11 TABLE 4-1 PC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE RADWIN MANAGER APPLICATION...................................4-1 TABLE 4-2 RADWIN MANAGER: OFFLINE FUNCTIONALITY........................................................4-7 TABLE 4-3 DEFAULT SETTINGS...........................................................................................4-9 TABLE 4-4 FRONT PANEL LEDS........................................................................................4-10 TABLE 4-5 RADWIN MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY ...................................................4-11 TABLE 4-6 RADWIN MANAGER TOOLBAR..........................................................................4-12 TABLE 4-7 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD .............................................................................4-13 TABLE 4-8 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 TRANSMISSION RATES ...............................................4-22 TABLE 5-1 RADWIN MANAGER TOOLBAR............................................................................5-3 TABLE 5-2 RADWIN MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY .....................................................5-4 TABLE 5-3 LINK DETAILS ..................................................................................................5-6 TABLE 5-4 LINK SITE DETAILS, SITE A AND SITE B .................................................................5-7 TABLE 5-5 STATUS BAR INDICATORS....................................................................................5-9 TABLE 5-6 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD ..........................................................................5-10 TABLE 6-1 ODU MODE CONFIGURATION FOR COMMON ...........................................................6-11 TABLE 6-2 TELNET COMMANDS ........................................................................................6-20 TABLE 7-1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DATA AND DESCRIPTION............................................................7-2 TABLE 7-2 LINK COMPATIBILITY TRAP MESSAGES ...................................................................7-3 TABLE 7-3 EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE DATA....................................................................7-8 TABLE 7-4 ACTION OF THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS.......................................................................7-9 TABLE 7-5 RADWIN MANAGER TRAP MESSAGES..................................................................7-11 TABLE 7-6 ACTIVE ALARMS COMMAND BUTTONS ...................................................................7-15 TABLE 7-7 LED FAULT INDICATORS ...................................................................................7-16 TABLE 7-8 TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................................7-16 TABLE B-1 ODU-IDU CONNECTOR PINOUT.......................................................................... B-1 TABLE B-2 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT................................................................... B-2 TABLE B-3 IDU-C ALARM CONNECTOR (DRY-CONTACT) ......................................................... B-3 TABLE B-4 TERMINAL BLOCK 3-PIN -48VDC ........................................................................ B-4 TABLE C-1 BILL OF MATERIALS: ODU MOUNTING KIT............................................................. C-1 TABLE F-1 LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE LOCATIONS OF TDWRS ................................................. F-11 TABLE G-1 SUPPORTED RFC 1213 VARIABLES...................................................................... G-4 TABLE G-2 PRIVATE MIB PARAMETERS ............................................................................... G-5 TABLE G-3 MIB TRAPS ................................................................................................. G-18 TABLE H-1 OUTPUT ALARMS PINOUT .................................................................................. H-1 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 xii Welcome!
Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radio series, designed for the IP and WiMAX Backhaul, Private Networks and Broadband Access global mar-
kets. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 series is an innovation in high-capacity carrier-grade sub-6GHz radios, and designed to meet the requirements of current and next-generation markets and applications. RADWIN 1000/2000/
5000 also features software configurable antenna port activation enabling single (RADWIN 1000) or dual (RADWIN 2000) antenna port operation. The RADWIN 5000 series is identifier for software configured Point to Multipoint devices. The device configured as RADWIN 2000 has an advanced air-inter-
face based on MIMO, antenna diversity. The RADWIN 1000/2000 radio series offers unmatched performance and carrier-class quality with the following features:
Superior spectral efficiency at 5, 10, 20MHz and 40MHz channels in the 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands. High Ethernet capacity (up to 270Mbps at 40MHz channel band-
width.) Combo frequency products for maximum flexibility Advanced air-interface based on MIMO, built-in diversity and OFDM technologies Superior range performance Simple installation and management High Tx power The RADWIN 1000/2000 radio series supports the 2.4, 4.9, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands, and complies with international standards and regula-
tions (FCC, IC Canada). The 5.8 GHz spectrum band complies with FCC rule 47 CFR Part 15 subparts C and E. The RADWIN 5000 radio series supports 4.9, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands, and complies with international standards and regulations (FCC, IC Canada). The 5.8 GHz spectrum band complies with FCC rule 47 CFR Part 15 subparts C and E. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-1 Key Applications Chapter 1 The model RADWIN 1000 RW-1020-0150 / RADWIN 2000 RW-2020-0150 supports the 2.4GHz band and complies with FCC and IC standards. The RADWIN 1000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 2000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 5000 3GHz Band support the 3.5 and 3.65 GHz spectrum bands and comply with FCC and IC standards. Key Applications WiMAX and IP Backhaul The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radio series offers WiMAX operators and ISPs a unique, highly scalable and cost-effective backhaul solution. Designed to suit a wide range of topologies, RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is easy to install and maintain, enabling operators to quickly and efficiently expand their net-
works and introduce new services to a growing subscriber base. Figure 1-1: Typical Wimax and IP Backhaul application Broadband Access With RADWIN 1000/2000/5000, service providers can quickly and efficiently expand their networks, and provide high-capacity services that meet the increasing demand for high-quality, high-speed broadband. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-2 Private Networks Chapter 1 Figure 1-2: Typical Broadband Access application Private Networks RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is the ultimate solution for private networks such as enterprises, education, government and utility organizations that wish to own and manage their own networks and eliminate the costly recurring charges from service providers. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000's cost-effective solution enables a variety of orga-
nizations to connect geographically dispersed sites at ranges of up to 80km
(50 miles). Figure 1-3: Private Network Key Features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Some of the outstanding features of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radio series are as follows:
High Capacity The RADWIN 1000/2000 system provides a high-capacity link of up to 270Mbps at 40MHz channel bandwidth. Superior Spectral Efficiency RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-3 Key Features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Chapter 1 Built on advanced MIMO and OFDM technologies, the RADWIN 1000/2000 system provides a high-capacity link at channel band-
width of 40MHz. This channel bandwidth supports high robustness of the air interface under interference and harsh conditions. In coun-
tries where applicable, narrow channel bandwidth reduces the cost of the spectrum license. Advanced Air Interface The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system provides an advanced air-
interface based on MIMO, built-in diversity and OFDM technologies, resulting in an exceptionally robust air interface. Using the following technologies, the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 air interface is designed to ensure nonstop, high quality transmission, even under interference and harsh conditions:
Automatic Adaptive Rate (AAR) is a mechanism that dynami-
cally adapts the air interface rate by changing both the signal modulation and coding. Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) chooses the best channel by monitoring the available radio channels and dynamically select-
ing a channel which is best suited for transmission at any given time. Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) is a mechanism for error con-
trol during data transmission. When the receiver detects an error in the received information, it automatically requests the transmitter to resend the information. This process is repeated until the transmission is error free or the error continues beyond a predetermined number of maximum transmissions. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000's ARQ mechanism is optimized for time-critical traffic. Forward Error Correction (FEC) with very low overhead and algorithms specifically designed for the varying conditions of license-exempt frequency bands, ensuring fast, robust and error-free communications. High transmission (Tx) power The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system supports high Tx power, com-
pliant with radio regulations. High Tx power increases the system's availability and range, and enables the high performance with smaller antennas, thus reducing the total cost of the solution (lower CAPEX), installation and tower rent costs (lower OPEX). Superior range performance The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system supports high capacity at superior ranges. The Link Budget Calculator (appendix D) is used to determine the capacity and range according to the choice of prod-
uct, antenna, type of service and environmental conditions. Simple installation and management RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 systems are extremely simple to install and maintain. They are typically up and running in less than an hour. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-4 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Link Chapter 1 The RADWIN Manager application has full local and remote manage-
ment capabilities. The user-friendly SNMP based management tool provides full end-to-end configuration, event logging, and perfor-
mance monitoring capabilities. Enhanced Security The security features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 include:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000's AES 128-bit integrated advanced encryption support provides enhanced air interface security for carriers and private networks. It ensures user data protection with one of the most sophisticated commercially available com-
bined encryption and authentication techniques, CCM/AES. This technique combines message authentication (preventing anti-
spoofing and replay protection) with commercial encryption, and complies with the IEEE 802.11i (phase iii) security recom-
mendations. CCM/AES uses a symmetric 128-bit encryption key (EK), and a nonce, and provides both message encryption and authenticat-
ing signature. The nonce mechanism enables the receiver to remember already received genuine messages and reject all replayed messages. Initial encryption and authentication is based on a user-defined master key (Link Password). While standard Wireless LAN encrypts only the Ethernet Payload, the AES encrypts both the source and destination MAC addresses. In addition to normal login access, Read or Write Community access is available at login RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Link The RADWIN 1000/2000 point-to-point solution is a wireless communication link. RADWIN 5000 is a point-to-multipoint topology solution. Typically each side of the link is comprised of an Outdoor Unit (ODU) and antenna and an Indoor Unit (IDU) or PoE device as shown in figure 1-4 below. The link is managed by the SNMP-based RADWIN Manager application. The IDU and the ODU are connected by a CAT5e cable that carries the ser-
vice traffic and power. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-5 The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU) Chapter 1 Figure 1-4: Example of Link Architecture - System Components The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU is the radio transceiver of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system. It supports two radios for MIMO operation. It is available with an integrated antenna (Integrated Antenna ODU) or with connectors for an external antenna (Connectorized ODU). The ODU may be mounted on a pole or a wall, and connects to the IDU or PoE device using a CAT5e cable. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-6 The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU) Chapter 1 The ODU comes in two form factors as shown in figure 1-5 below:
a. Connectorized ODU - Front b. Connectorized ODU - Rear c. Integrated Antenna ODU -
Front d. Integrated Antenna ODU -
Rear Figure 1-5: ODU Form Factors Integrated Antenna ODU This ODU has an integrated 370mm (1.2ft) flat panel antenna, with a gain of 23dBi. The ODU contains both the radio and the antenna as a single unit housed in a weatherproof case. Connectorized ODU This ODU has 2x N-type connectors for connecting an external antenna. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-7 The Indoor Units (IDU) Chapter 1 The ODU products available in release 2.6.50p1 are shown below:
Table 1-1: Available ODU Products - Release 2.6.50p1 Description Form Factor Frequency Bands and Regulations Part Number RW-2050-0150 RW-5550-0150 RW-2050-0250 RW-2020-0150 RW-1020-0150 RW-1030 3 GHz BAND RW-2030 3 GHz BAND RW-2030 3 GHz BAND Integrated antenna Connectorized for exter-
nal antenna (2x N-type) Integrated and connector-
ized antenna (2x N-Type) RW-5200-0250 RW-5550-0250 Connectorized for exter-
nal antenna (2 x N-type) The only available external antenna is, single bipolar. FCC/IC5.725 5.850 GHz FCC/IC5.250 5.350 GHz FCC/IC5.470 5.725 GHz FCC/IC4.940 4.990 GHz FCC/IC2.400 2.4835 GHz FCC/IC2.400 2.4835GHz FCC/IC3.650 3.700GHz IC3.475 3.650GHz FCC/IC5.725 5.850 GHz FCC/IC5.250 5.350 GHz FCC/IC5.470 5.725 GHz FCC/IC 5.725 5.825 GHz FCC/IC4.940 4.990 GHz For further information, see page 4-20, Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings. The Indoor Units (IDU) IDU-C The IDU-C has the service ports and provides aggregation of these services towards the ODU that transports them over the air. The IDU-C also provides power to the ODU. The IDU-C is a carrier-class 19 inch, 1U unit, providing two Ethernet ports, dry contact alarms and indication LEDs. It has two DC power feed connec-
tors. An AC to DC converter is available for powering the IDU-C from an AC source. The IDU-C is designed to be rack mounted. One IDU-C product is available in release 2.6.50p1:
Table 1-2: Release 2.1 IDU-C Products Part Number Ethernet ports Power 7200-2000 2 Dual DC feed
-20 to -60VDC Form factor 19" 1U RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-8 Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices Chapter 1 Figure 1-6: IDU-C Front Panel IDU-E The IDU-E is a carrier grade, compact, half 19 inch wide, 1U plastic unit, providing up to two Ethernet ports and up to two E1/T1 interfaces. It offers Layer 2 support for Ethernet service and HSS support for collocated links. It is a low cost unit intended for both Access applications and Enterprise use. Figure 1-7: IDU-E - front view The IDU-E rear panel (right to left) has a 25 pin Dry Contact Alarms port. the two (or no) trunk ports, two LAN ports, an ODU port and finally a 3 pin DC power plug identical to that used on the IDU-C. Figure 1-8: IDU-E: Rear panel Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices The PoE device provides Ethernet service only, with power for the ODU. The PoE device is extremely compact, having only two Ethernet ports and a standard 3 pin male AC power socket. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-9 Antennas Chapter 1 Figure 1-9: PoE device - showing the radio Ethernet port Antennas An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig-
nal, in the form of RF power, is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa. The antenna gain and transmitting power may be limited by country regula-
tions. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 may be operated with an integrated antenna that is part of the ODU unit, or with external antennas connected to the ODU via N-type connectors. All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce RF losses. The required antenna impedance is 50. The Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 370 mm (1.2ft) flat panel antenna. The radio and the antenna are housed in a weatherproof case as a single unit. Figure 1-10: ODU with integrated Flat Panel antenna External antennas are available for the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radios, varying in operating frequencies, form factor, size and gain, dual or single polarization. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-10 Antennas Chapter 1 The RADWIN 1000/2000 operating in frequency bands 5.3, 5.4, 5.8 GHz can utilize external antennas with RF feeder cables that produce 6 dBi mi-nimal assembly gain. The RADWIN 1000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 2000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 5000 3GHz Band operating in the 3.5 and 3.65 GHz can utilize external antennas with RF feeder cables that produce 13 dBi minimal assembly gain. Flat Panel Antennas The Flat Panel antenna shown in figure 1-11 below has an integrated or external configuration:
Integrated or External 1.2ft Flat Panel Dual Polarization Frequency Gain 4.9 6.0 GHz 2.4 2.7 GHz (Ext) 2.3 2.7 GHz (Int) 3.3 3.8 GHz (Int/Ext) External 21 dBi at 4.9 5.0 GHz 22 dBi at 5.0 5.15 GHz 23 dBi at 5.15 6.0 GHz 20 dBi at 2.4 2.7 GHz 22 dBi at 3.3 3.8 GHz 14 dBi at 4.9 5.95 GHz 14.5 dBi at 4.9 4.95 GHz 15 dBi at 4.95 5.15 GHz 15.5 dBi at 5.15 5.47 GHz 16.5 dBi at 5.47 6.0 GHz 13.5 dBi at 6.0 6.06 GHz 14 dBi at 3.3 3.8 GHz Integrated 21 dBi at 4.9 5.0 GHz 22 dBi at 5.0 5.15 GHz 23.5 dBi at 5.15 5.725 GHz 24 dBi at 5.725 6.0 GHz 16.2 dBi at 2.3 2.4 GHz 17.5 dBi at 2.4 2.7 GHz 21 dBi at 3.3 3.8 GHz Size 1.2 x 1.2 ft / 371x371 mm Figure 1-11: Flat Panel Antenna RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-11 RADWIN Manager Chapter 1 Parabolic Dish Antennas External 2ft Dish Dual Polarization Frequency Gain Diameter Beam Width 5.150 - 5.875 GHz 4.900 5.850 GHz 3.300 3.800 GHz 28 dBi 25 dBi (3.5/3.65GHz) 2 ft / 620 mm H,V: 5.6 Figure 1-12: External Antennas - Parabolic Dish See the RADWIN products catalog for RADWIN offering of external anten-
nas. External antennas are also available from authorized antenna vendors. RADWIN Manager The RADWIN Manager is an SNMP-based management application which manages a complete link over a single IP address. It can also manage each side of the link separately. The RADWIN Manager application facilitates installation and configuration of the link between the ODU units. The intuitive, easy-to-use RADWIN Man-
ager has a graphical Microsoft Windows interface, and can be run locally and remotely. The RADWIN Manager provides:
Installation Wizard On-line monitoring of air interface quality allowing the administrator to monitor the service and status of each link Local and remote loopback testing On-line monitoring of equipment alarms and QoS Configuration settings On-line user manual and help files Link Budget Calculator for calculating the expected performance of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless link and the possible service configurations for a specific link range. The RADWIN Manager can easily be integrated with any NMS system. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-12 Accessories Chapter 1 Figure 1-13: RADWIN Manager screen Accessories RADWIN provides a variety of accessories to support the RADWIN 1000/
2000/5000 system:
PoE devices AC Power Adaptor Cables to connect the various system elements External Lightning Protection Unit Documentation set supplied with RADWIN 1000/2000/
5000 The technical documentation supplied with a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 includes the following items:
A Quick Start Guide for experienced installers A full User Manual - the document which you are reading RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-13 How to Use this Manual Chapter 1 How to Use this Manual This User Manual is divided into functionally distinct chapters reflecting the activities required to set up a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000. The division is shown in the following table:
Chapter/
Appendix Subject Audience 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D E G H I Site Preparation Site survey team Hardware Instal-
lation Link Installation:
The RADWIN Man-
ager Configuring the Link Field technician Installation technician Installation technician, System manager Site Configuration Installation technician, System manager Monitoring and Diagnostics Technical Specifi-
cations Wiring Specifica-
tions Pole and Wall Installation Link Budget Cal-
culator Lightning Protec-
tion and Ground-
ing Guidelines Installation technician, System manager Installation technician, System manager Installation technician Installation technician Installation technician Field technician MIB Reference System manager External Alarms Specification Combo Configura-
tion Tool Installation technician, System manager, Field technician Installation technician A Little Terminology In the field, a link typically has a local or headquarters site as for example in figure 1-2 above. Here the service provider is the local or headquarters site. The service recipient is the remote site. Where the link is completely internal to a corporation, the choice of the local and remote is just a matter of convenience. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-14 A Little Terminology Chapter 1 A link then, consists of two sites. In Broadband Wireless terminology, the local and remote sites are some-
times referred to as near and far, HQ and remote and so on. The site which is closer to the network core (often the local site) will be referred to as site A, and the opposite side of the link, usually closer to the end user, as site B. This choice is application-neutral and will be used throughout the manual both to describe the sites and their names as in the examples. The link is configured and managed using a PC, the managing computer connected to site A. (The precise requirements for the managing computer are set out in chapter 3, Hardware Installation). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 supports three connection methods for the man-
aging computer:
Local - a direct peer to peer connection between the Ethernet ports on the managing computer and the IDU or PoE device. Local con-
nection is always read-write. Network - the managing computer and the site A IDU or PoE device belong to a LAN and communicate through a router or hub Over-the-air - the managing computer connects to site B via the air interface The managing computer may be connected to the link through an IDU or a PoE device. In what follows, where ever we refer to an IDU it includes PoE devices unless stated otherwise. Typically, if we need to refer to an IDU as such, we will use a model name such as IDU-C. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-15 Conventions Used in this Manual Chapter 1 Conventions Used in this Manual Notifications Notifications consist of Notes, Cautions and Warnings. The purpose of a Note is to Note Draw your attention to something that may not be obvious or coun-
ter-intuitive Emphasize a special feature or peculiarity of the RADWIN 1000/2000/
5000 Offer an external reference for additional information Add a caveat that would not qualify as a full Caution or Warning (see below) Provide additional background to what follows Offer a recommendation Highlight an indication of something to watch out for Advise you if an action has side effects i.e. it may disturb something else that would be best left undisturbed Caution Warning Remind you of something that should be kept in mind A Caution is a notification of risk of damage to equipment or of service degradation A Warning is a notification of risk of danger to persons operating near the equipment Typographical conventions General Where a term is defined or introduced for the first time, it is shown in Bold-
face. You will have noticed this usage in the Terminology section above. Software The RADWIN Manager is a Microsoft Windows application following the user interface conventions of familiar Microsoft Windows programs. We would describe the chain of menu commands indicated in the following screen shot, like this:
Tools|Active Alarms|1 A RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-16 Windows Terminology Chapter 1 using Boldface for the menu labels and vertical bars to separate them. Similarly, mouse click items will be referred to like this:
Click Next to continue.
(A mouse click always uses the left mouse button unless stated otherwise.) Windows Terminology Look at figure 1-13 above. The main application display which you see consists of a frame-window with a menu bar, system icons and content. It will be referred to as a window, the main window or the Manager win-
dow depending on context. The top line of icons is the tool bar, and provides part of the menu bar functionality with a mouse click. At the bottom of the window is the status bar, a line of icons and text boxes. The central part of the main window consists of several panes: On the right, there are Radio Interference, Ethernet Service and the Frequency panes. The left hand pane (with the blue background) is split into three sub-panes. If you click Site A or Site B in the tool bar, you will be offered another win-
dow, which in turn displays on of several panels depending on which func-
tion you choose. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-17 Windows Terminology Chapter 1 Figure 1-14: Site Configuration window with open Management panel RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 1-18 Site Preparation Chapter 2 Planning the Link Site Overview Link site planning consists of a set of surveys, which must be carried out before any equipment is brought to the site. If for some reason, the out-
come of any of these surveys is negative, site re-location will need to be considered. A Site Survey consists of three stages:
1. Preliminary survey - The proposed link is analyzed in the office using a topographic map. 2. Physical survey - The locations of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 indoor and outdoor equipment are determined on-site. 3. Radio Frequency (RF) survey - It is recommended that the installation area be scanned with a spectrum analyzer, to identify RF interference so as to determine a clear channel for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 installation
(on-site). The Site Survey Introduction RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless links must be planned before installa-
tion. The designated installation site must be appraised to determine that the wireless system is able to operate efficiently and provide connectivity without signal degradation. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 offers a wide operating frequency range. A free frequency channel must be determined within the operating range, for opti-
mum performance. Recommended Equipment Stage 1: Preliminary Survey Topological map of the area RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 2-1 Stage 1: Preliminary Survey Chapter 2 Urban map of the area Compass Stage 2: Physical Survey Binoculars 100 meter tape measure Ohmmeter, to check ground connection Map Digital camera GPS device (optional) Compass (optional) Paper, pencil, and a clipboard Stage 3: RF Survey Spectrum Analyzer with Max Hold function and screen capture facil-
ity that can store multiple images, for documentation purposes RF accessories (connectors and cables) Communication devices (for example, cellular phones, or a set of walkie-talkies) Stage 1: Preliminary Survey A preliminary survey is necessary before visiting potential installation sites. As much detail as possible should be obtained about the two designated ODU installation sites and the area between them. To perform a preliminary survey:
1. Mark the two designated installation sites on a topographic map of the area. 2. Measure the distance between the sites; check that it is within the speci-
fied range of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000. 3. On the urban map, check for developed areas situated between the two installation sites. Pay attention to these areas when performing the phys-
ical site survey; there may be tall buildings, RF towers, or transmitters, which could cause interference to the link. 4. Check the area between the two sites for obstructions such as:
High ground - hills or mountains Lakes or large bodies of water. Water has a reflection effect on RF signals like a building. This type of reflection causes the received amplitude to be reduced. As a rule of thumb, the presence of a large body of water between the link sites may double the required antenna height. 5. Determine and record the compass bearings between both ODUs, rela-
tive to north. 6. If there are obstructions between the two sites, calculate the Fresnel Zone (see appendix D for details). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 2-2 Stage 2: Physical Survey Chapter 2 7. If the site chosen does not meet requirements, consider alternative sites. 8. Use the Link Budget Calculator (on the CD supplied with the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 or using the RADWIN Manager) to determine the expected performance. Stage 2: Physical Survey The physical site survey reviews the environment of the proposed RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 installation location, to ensure that the link sites are suit-
able for the wireless network. The results of the physical site survey should be recorded. It is advisable to go on a clear day, so you can more easily see any obstructions between the two sites. Note To perform a physical survey:
1. From the compass readings taken in the preliminary survey, find the azi-
muth (horizontal position) that the ODU should face towards the second ODU. 2. Using binoculars, locate any obstructions such as tall trees, high build-
ings, hills or mountains. Look for other RF towers between the two sites. Mark the locations of the obstructions on the map. 3. Determine the location for the ODU (having regard for existing rooftop installations and tower space). It should be above any obstructions, con-
sidering the Fresnel zone (see appendix D). 4. If you need to install the ODU on a tower, make sure that the tower is far away from overhead electric power lines. 5. Determine a location for the indoor equipment; it should be as close as possible to the ODU. At an existing site, there is probably an equipment room with cable-routing channels. The IDU - ODU cable length limit is 100m, in accordance with IEEE 10/
100BaseT standards. Note 6. Measure and record the path length of the cable from the ODU position to the indoor equipment room. 7. Determine the ground and lightning connection points of the installation. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU and IDU must both be grounded. 8. Using the Ohmmeter, measure and record the resistance of the required installation to the grounding point. The resistance must be less than 1O ohm. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 2-3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements Chapter 2 9. Review the results of the physical site survey. Decide if the site is suitable for the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless network installation. If the site is suitable, continue with stage 3, the RF survey If the site is not suitable, survey another site Additional Outdoor Site Requirements The ambient outdoor operating temperature should be -35 to 60C (-31 to 140F). Additional Indoor Site Requirements The following requirements guarantee proper operation of the system:
For IDU-C units, allow at least 90 cm (36 ) of front clearance for operating and maintenance accessibility. Allow at least 10 cm (4 ) clearance at the rear of the unit for signal lines and interface cables The ambient operating temperature should be 0 to 50C (32 to 122 F) at a humidity of up to 90%, non condensing Stage 3: RF Survey The RF survey examines the wireless environment of the RADWIN 1000/
2000/5000 installation site, to determine whether there are available chan-
nels within the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 operating frequency band. An RF survey is performed using a spectrum analyzer. It is advisable to familiarize yourself with the spectrum analyzer before going out on site, specifically the Max Hold and Marker functions. You should perform the RF survey at both proposed link sites. The survey should be carried out during a busy time of day, to best judge the worst-case radio interference. Allow 2-4 hours duration for a good RF survey. It is possible to install the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link and use the RADWIN Manager to find a clear channel. Each frequency channel can be evaluated in turn. Achievement of a clear channel is indicated by the Quality bar on the Channel Setting window (see figure 4-13) becoming green. Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 2-4 Hardware Installation Chapter 3 This chapter sets out the requirements and procedures for the hardware installation and alignment of a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link in accordance with the prior planning as set out in chapter 2. It is intended to guide quali-
fied field technicians. Warning Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. RADWIN and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas. Safety Practices Preventing overexposure to RF energy To protect against overexposure to RF energy, install the ODUs so as to pro-
vide and maintain minimal separation distances from all persons. When the system is operational, avoid standing directly in front of the antenna. Strong RF fields are present when the transmitter is on. The ODU must not be deployed in a location where it is possible for people to stand or walk inadvertently in front of the antenna. Grounding All RADWIN products should be grounded during operation. In addition:
The ODU should be earthed by a wire with diameter of at least 12AWG. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user's responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 or Section 54 of the Canadian Electri-
cal Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge unit. It RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-1 Protection against Lightning Chapter 3 also lays down the size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU must be grounded to a Protec-
tive Earth as described in appendix E and in accordance with the Local Electrical Regulations. The earth lug on the IDU-C and IDU-E should be connected to the protective earth at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets. Further, you should -
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last Never connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment Ensure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground More detailed guidelines are supplied in appendix E. Protection against Lightning The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. All of RADWIN outdoor units are designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes. See appendix E for detailed installation instructions of lightning protection devices. General It is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer. Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecom-
munication lines, you should remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts. Use extreme care when installing antennas near power lines. Use extreme care when working at heights. When using an AC power source for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 always use the AC power adapter supplied by RADWIN. Use the right tools. In addition to standard tools required for any kind of ODU or antenna installation, RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 requires additional specific tools detailed on page 3-5 below. Package Contents The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 packages include the following items:
ODU Package Contents The ODU package contains:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-2 ODU Package Contents Chapter 3 One ODU - see figure 3-2 below for front and rear view An ODU mounting kit - see figure 3-1 below A CD containing -
the RADWIN Manager Quick Start Guide User Manual Label showing the MAC address and the alternative Community string. The label is self-adhesive. You should keep this label safe Link Budget Calculator Cable glands (to be used with the ODU-IDU cable) Figure 3-1: ODU Mounting kit ODU - Front View ODU - Rear View Figure 3-2: Connectorized ODU - Front and rear views RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-3 IDU Package Contents Chapter 3 ODU - Front View ODU - Rear View Figure 3-3: Integrated ODU - Front and rear views IDU Package Contents The IDU package contains:
IDU-C - see figure 3-4 below. 19 rack mounting kit - see figure 3-5 below Two DC power plugs for power cables - see figure 3-5 below Figure 3-4: IDU-C Package contents - the IDU-C Figure 3-5: IDU-C Package contents - the mounting kit and DC power plugs RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-4 External Antenna Package Contents Chapter 3 External Antenna Package Contents Antenna RF cable 1m (3) long; two cables supplied with bipolar antennas, single cable supplied with monopolar antennas Mounting kit Additional Tools and Materials Required The following is a list of the equipment and materials required to install RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 hardware. Tools and Materials Spanner/wrench 13 mm () Crimping tool for RJ-45 (if the ODU-IDU cable is without connectors) Drill (for wall mounting only) Cable ties Sealing material Cables and connectors ODU grounding cable 12AWG IDU grounding cable 18AWG ODU-IDU cable (outdoor class, CAT-5e, 4 twisted pairs, 24AWG) Hardware Installation Sequence The following steps are required to install the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system:
1. Mounting the ODUs, page page 3-6. 2. Mounting the external antennas (if used), page page 3-7. 3. Mounting the Lightning Protection devices (if used), page page 3-7. 4. Outdoor connections, page page 3-8. 5. Mounting the IDUs, page page 3-8. 6. Indoor connections, page page 3-12. 7. Aligning the ODUs/antennas, page page 3-13. See figure 3-6 below, which illustrates a typical installation of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 with an external antenna. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-5 Outdoor installation Chapter 3 Figure 3-6: Typical Installation Diagram (with external antenna) The installation steps are detailed in the following sections. Outdoor installation Mounting the ODU The ODU can be mounted on a pole or a wall. In both installations, the sup-
plied mounting kit is used to secure the ODU. A mast-sited ODU typically uses a pole attached to the mast. Note A RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link operates in pairs of two ODUs with the same configuration. Both ODUs must be installed, and the antennas aligned for maximum throughput. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-6 Mounting external antennas Chapter 3 Warning Prior to connecting cables to the ODU, the protective earth terminal (screw) of the ODU must be connected to an external protective ground conductor or to a grounded pole. Only a qualified person using the proper safety equipment should climb the antenna mast Only qualified professional personnel should install or dismantle ODUs and masts To mount the ODU on a pole or a wall:
1. Ensure that the ODU is properly grounded. 2. Mount the ODU onto the pole or wall. Ensure that the unit is oriented so that the cable connectors are at the bottom. (If they are on top, water may penetrate into the unit causing damage.) 3. Refer to Appendix C, Pole and Wall Installation for detailed ODU mounting kit contents and schematics. Do not tighten the ODU to its mounting brackets until the alignment process of the antenna is complete. Note Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of the ODU or interference from man-made obstacles. Mounting external antennas If you are using ODU with an integrated antenna, skip to Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices below. The supplied mounting kit is used to mount the antenna onto a pole. The antennas must be aligned for maximum throughput. Do not stand in front of a live antenna. Warning To mount an external antenna:
1. To mount an external antenna ensure that the antenna is properly grounded and then mount the antenna onto the pole. Refer to Appen-
dix C, Pole and Wall Installation for detailed antenna mounting instructions. 2. Follow the mounting instructions supplied with the antenna. Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU is designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-7 Outdoor Connections Chapter 3 RADWIN recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to pro-
tect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes. Refer to appendix E for detailed installation instructions of lightning protec-
tion devices. Outdoor Connections To complete the outdoor connections:
1. Connect the ground cable to the ODU chassis as marked on the ODU. 2. Connect the antenna cable(s) to the ODU. 3. Connect the lightning protection device to the ODU (see appendix E). 4. Attach the ODU-IDU cable to the ODU RJ-45 connector (see appendix B for the connector pin-out) 5. Screw in the cable glands to ensure hermetic sealing of the ODU. 6. Secure the cables to the pole, mast or brackets using UV-rated cable ties. Indoor Installation IDU-E Installation The IDU-E can be wall mounted, placed on a desktop or take up one half of a 1U rack slot. The unit should be grounded, cabled to the ODU and con-
nected to power using the supplied AC/DC adapter. Figure 3-7: New style IDU-E: Rear panel Mounting the IDU-C The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 IDUs are all rack mounted, as shown in figure 1-6. A front panel keyed schematic of a rack mounted IDU-C is shown in figure 3-8 below. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-8 Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 3 Figure 3-8: IDU-C front panel In figure 3-9 we display a perspective view of the IDU-C:
Figure 3-9: IDU-C - A perspective view RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-9 Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 3 Further description of the keyed items in figure 3-8 is shown in table 3-1 below:
Table 3-1: Components of an IDU-C front panel Key Label Remarks A B C D E F G H I J K Indicator LEDs See figure 3-10. ODU Port 2 LAN Ports SFP Port Alarm Ports RJ-45 connector, see table B-1. Ethernet, RJ-45 connector, see table B-2 The IDU-C is SFP ready. Standard DB25 female connector, see table B-3. Label indent Place for adhesive identification labels Primary 3 pin Power Connector Standard 3 pins in line power connector, see table B-4. Secondary 3 pin Power Connector Standard 3 pins in line power connector, see table B-4. Grounding Lug Use the lug supplied Rack mounting holes Detachable Rack mounting brackets The Indicator LEDs (Item A in table 3-1 above) are shown in more detail in figure 3-10 below:
Figure 3-10: IDU-C LEDs RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-10 Connecting power to the IDU Chapter 3 The purpose of the LEDs is shown in table 3-2 below:
Table 3-2: IDU-C Front Panel LEDs Name IDU ODU AIR I/F SVC HSS Color Function Green Green Red Green Red IDU operational During power-up only Failure ODU-to-IDU communication link is operating ODU-to-IDU communication link is disrupted Green Orange Red Wireless link is synchronized During installation mode only Wireless link lost synchronization Off Off To mount an IDU (using figure 3-8 above):
1. If the rack already holds other equipment, ensure that it is properly grounded. Do not proceed with installation into a live rack unless it is properly grounded. 2. Attach the rack mounting brackets (K) to the IDU. 3. Bolt the IDU into an empty slot in the rack, ensuring that it sits securely. 4. Ground the IDU to the rack using grounding lug I. The IDU should be left permanently grounded. Instead of using the rack mounting brackets, the IDU may be rail mounted using the four screw holes on each of its sides. Warning Note Connecting power to the IDU The IDU-C has redundant power connection circuits (items G and H in figure 3-8 above). An enlarged schematic of the power connectors is shown in below:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-11 Connecting the ODU to the IDU Chapter 3 Figure 3-11: DU-C ower connectors The connectors are 3 pin in line female, with polarities (left to right) minus, ground, plus. To avoid damage to the IDU, always use an AC/DC adapter supplied by RADWIN. Ensure that the IDUs at both sites are powered up. Connecting the ODU to the IDU The ODU-IDU cable conducts all the user traffic between the IDU and the ODU, and also provides power to the ODU. The maximum length of the ODU-IDU cable is 100m (328 ') in accordance with 10/100BaseT standards. The ODU-IDU cable is supplied pre-assembled with RJ-45 connectors, at the length specified when ordering, or as a cable drum with spare connectors. If the ODU-IDU cable was not ordered, use an outdoor class, CAT-5e 24AWG shielded cable. See appendix B for Wiring Specifications. To connect the ODU to the IDU, route the cable from the ODU to the IDU, secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the ODU RJ-45 connector on the IDU (see item B in figure 3-8 above). Installing a Link using PoE Devices The PoE device is a very simple unit having a power input connector and two Ethernet ports. It is AC powered, and has a power LED. To prepare a link using PoE devices:
1. To connect the ODU to the PoE device, route the cable from the ODU to the PoE device, secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the P-LAN-OUT RJ-45 connector on the PoE device. 2. Connect it to AC power. 3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for the second link. Connecting User Equipment To connect user equipment to the IDU:
Connect user switch/router or any other compatible device to the IDU panel RJ-45 ports designated LAN (see item C in figure 3-8 above). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-12 Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas Chapter 3 Refer to appendix B, Wiring Specifications, for connector pinouts. Do not connect two LAN ports to the same network, or flooding may occur. Note To connect user equipment to the PoE device:
Connect a user switch, router or any other compatible device to the PoE device RJ-45 port designated LAN-IN. Refer to appendix B, Wiring Specifications, for connector pinouts. Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas You perform antenna alignment using the ODU's audible tone. To speed up the installation time, alignment of a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system should be performed by two teams simultaneously, at site A and at site B. To align ODUs with integrated antennas or external bipolar antennas:
1. For external bipolar antennas: Using a coax cable with N-Type connec-
tors, connect the vertical polarization connector of the antenna to the ANT 1 connector of the ODU. 2. For external bipolar antennas: Using a coax cable with N-Type connec-
tors, connect the horizontal polarization connector of the antenna to the ANT 2 connector of the ODU. 3. Ensure that power is connected to the IDUs at both sites. 4. Ensure normal operation of the IDUs by the LED indications on the front panel. Provided that site A detects the signal from site B, the ODU starts beep-
ing 20 seconds after power up, and continues beeping until the ODUs are aligned, and the installation is complete. In the following steps, antenna refers both to an external antenna and an integrated antenna. 5. Direct the antenna of site B in the direction of site A. This is simplified if a previous site survey has been completed and azimuths are known. When aligning the antennas, do not stand in front of a live antenna. Warning 6. Make a horizontal sweep of 180 degrees with the site A antenna so that the strongest signal from site B can be detected. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-13 Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas Chapter 3 7. Slowly turn the site A antenna back towards the position of site B, listen-
ing to the tone until the best signal is reached. See the following figure for audible signal variations. Figure 3-12: Beep Sequence for antenna alignment Note Three beeps and a pause is 'best signal so far'
Two beeps and a pause is 'signal quality increased'
One beep and pause is 'no change in signal'
One beep and a long pause is 'no air link'
Any other signal does not relate to antenna alignment Long beep and short pause is 'signal quality decreased'
8. Secure the site A antenna to the pole/wall. 9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 for site B. To align two external monopolar antennas:
The ODU buzzer only works on the radio connected to the ANT 1 connector marked
. You will therefore need to use ANT 1 to align both antennas in turn. Upon completion of the alignment procedure, you may connect the two antennas to ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors. Note 1. Using a coax cable with N-Type connectors, connect one antenna to the ANT 1 connector of the ODU. 2. Follow the steps 3 to 7 above to align the antenna connected to the ODU connector ANT 1 on both sides of the link. 3. On both sides of the link, disconnect the antenna connected to the ODU connector ANT 1. Connect the other antenna to connector ANT 1 and fol-
low the steps 3 to 7 above to align the second antenna. 4. Secure the antennas to the pole/wall. 5. Restore one of the antennas to ANT 2 on both sides of the link. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 3-14 Chapter 4 Link Installation: The RADWIN Manager This chapter explains how to use the RADWIN Manager to install a radio link. Installing theRADWIN Manager Application Minimum System Requirements The RADWIN Manager application is distributed on a CD. Operating system specific PC resources required by the application are set out in table 4-1 below:
Table 4-1: PC Requirements for the RADWIN Manager Application Windows 2000 Windows XP Pro Windows Vista Memory 128 MB Processor P III 512 MB P IV 1 GB P IV Dual Core Requirements common to all systems are:
Hard disk: 1 GB free space Network: 10/100BaseT NIC Graphics: 1024x768 screen resolution with 16 bit color Microsoft Explorer version 5.01 or later Installing the Software To install the RADWIN Manager application:
1. Insert the CD into the CD/DVD drive of your computer. The CD opening screen appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-1 Starting the RADWIN Manager Chapter 4 2. Choose Install RADWIN Manager and follow the on-screen instructions of the installation wizard to complete the setup of the RADWIN Manager application. If the installation program fails to start, browse to your CD/DVD drive, chose the setup.exe program and run it. Any PC running the RADWIN Manager application can be used to configure a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link. Starting the RADWIN Manager To start the RADWIN Manager:
1. Connect the managing computer to one of the two LAN ports as shown in figure 4-1 below:
Figure 4-1: LAN ports on the front panel of the IDU-C If you are not using a direct connection as above, ensure that you have IDU to managing computer connectivity (e.g. through a LAN). 2. Check that you have connectivity to the ODU. You can do this by opening up a command line session (Start|Run and then type, cmd). At the command prompt, type RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-2 Starting the RADWIN Manager Chapter 4 ping 10.0.0.120 You should see something like this:
Figure 4-2: Pinging an uninstalled and unconfigured link Any other response from ping means that the ODU is not responding. Check your Ethernet connection and that both the the IDU and ODU are switched on and then try again. If you do not succeed, seek assistance from RADWIN Customer Support. 3. Dismiss the command line session. 4. Double-click the RADWIN Manager icon on the desktop, or click Start|Programs|RADWIN Manager|RADWIN Manager. The Login dialog box appears. Figure 4-3: Login Screen 5. Type an IP address for the ODU (if you connect through a network), or click Local Connection (if you are connected directly to the IDU port). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-3 Starting the RADWIN Manager Chapter 4 1. If you log in on Local Connection, but your physical connection is not local (i.e. anything other than a direct connection between the managing computer and the IDU), then any configuration you carry out may affect other links in the network. Warning 2. If you log in via an over-the-air IP address, you will receive a warning. If you reset the site to which you are connected to factory settings, you can lock yourself out of the Link. 3. Network login (IP address to the ODU) is recommended. The default IP address for the ODU is 10.0.0.120. The subnet mask is 255.0.0.0. Note The actual IP address is defined during link configuration (see Site Management: IP Address and VLAN on page 6-4). 6. Enter the password The default password is admin (see Changing the Log On Password on page 4-7). 7. If you are a user with Read-Write permission, click Options to enter the Community options. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is protected with Community passwords. A user may be defined with read-only permission or with read-write permission
(see page 6-14 for more details). Note Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-4 Login Errors Chapter 4 Figure 4-4: Login Screen with Community options visible If you are using the system for the first time, leave the default Com-
munity passwords, netman for read-write, and public for read-
only. If Community values were previously defined, enter them under Community in the Read-Only or Read-Write boxes. If you are a user with read-only permission, click the Read Only Mode check box. The RADWIN Manager main window is displayed (see figure 4-7). Login Errors Unsupported Device Attempting to connect to an unsupported device will result in the following error message:
Figure 4-5: Unsupported device message RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-5 Incorrect IP Address Chapter 4 Incorrect IP Address If the IP address chosen is invalid or the link is unreachable, the following error message will be displayed:
Figure 4-6: Unreachable device message In both of the above situations, you will see a warning graphic side the IP Address field. along-
Incorrect Password If you type an incorrect password in the Login screen, you will see a warn-
ing graphic alongside the password field. Continuing without an IP Address The RADWIN Manager provides limited offline functionality when there is no accessible IDU/ODU. It is primarily for setting managing computer related parameters and running the Link Budget Calculator. The offline func-
tionality is shown in table 4-2 below. The table does not show menu items grayed out. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-6 Changing the Log On Password Chapter 4 Table 4-2: RADWIN Manager: Offline Functionality Menu level Top
+1
+2 Function Reference File Tools Help Log Off Exit Change Password Events Log RADWIN Manager Help Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Information About RADWIN Manager Return to Log On dialog. Same as Log Off button Exit the RADWIN Manager. Same as Exit button Change the Log On pass-
word dialog page 4-7 page 7-10 Clear Events Save to File Clear local events log Save events log data to a file View online help version of the User Manual Calculator opened in default browser Appendix D Obtain system information page 7-1 RADWIN Manager build information Changing the Log On Password To change the log on password:
1. From the Tools menu, select Change Password. The Change Password dialog box appears. 2. Enter the current password, and the new password. 3. Click OK to confirm. Installing the Link: First steps At this point the main window of the RADWIN Manager should be displayed:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-7 Installing the Link: First steps Chapter 4 Figure 4-7: Opening RADWIN Manager window prior to installation A detailed field by field description of the contents of the RADWIN Manager main window may be found in chapter 5. The procedure required to make the link functional has three phases:
1. Link Installation - which we will detail below. Installation actually gets the link operational by setting the link parame-
ters. It uses a fixed channel at the lowest possible modulation, BPSK at 6.5Mbps and will work under the harsh interference condition. During the installation procedure, the definition of all parameters is automatically applied to both sides of the link. Note 2. Link Configuration - described in chapter 5. Configuration provides much the same functionality as Installation, but for a running link. A fallback to Installation mode is provided for situa-
tions which cannot be handled without resetting the link, such as antenna realignment and IDU or ODU replacement. The Link Installation and Configuration phases are both carried out with Wizards, which walk you through the processes. The Wizards are visu-
ally quite similar and will be described in detail below. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-8 Default Settings Chapter 4 3. Site Configuration - described in chapter 6. Site specific configuration for each side of the link is available at any time
- under a running link or under the restricted Installation mode. Site Configuration consists of a set of panels, which may be invoked indi-
vidually in any order, as needed. An installed and configured link can be returned to installation mode for re-
installation and configuration from last settings or from factory settings. Note Reversion to installation mode requires a complete break in the link service Configuration mode may vary the service throughput and quality, but without a service break Default Settings The default settings of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 configuration parame-
ters are listed in table 4-3 below:
Table 4-3: Default Settings Parameter ODU IP Address Subnet Mask Trap destination Default Value 10.0.0.120 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Manager Login password admin Link ID Site 1 Site 2 Link Site Site Link Password wireless-bridge Rate Adaptive Ethernet Configuration Auto Detect Radio Link Failure Actions No action Bridge or Hub mode Hub Mode, Aging time = 300 sec Community values Read-write netman Read-only public Front Panel LEDs on the IDU-C The front panel LEDs on the IDU provide basic information about link sta-
tus. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-9 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Chapter 4 Figure 4-8: IDU-C Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the indicators:
Table 4-4: Front Panel LEDs Name Color Function IDU With Ethernet only ODU AIR I/F SVC HSS Green Green Red Green Red During power-up only IDU operational Failure ODU-to-IDU communication link is operating ODU-to-IDU communication link is disrupted Green Orange Red Wireless link is synchronized During installation mode only Wireless link lost synchronization Off Off Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality The RADWIN Manager menu functionality is displayed in table 4-5. The Toolbar buttons are detailed in table 4-6. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-10 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Chapter 4 Table 4-5: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality Menu level Top
+1
+2 File Function Reference Return to Log On dialog. Same as Log Off button Exit the RADWIN Manager. Same as Exit button Run the Configuration Wiz-
ard. Not available in installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Runs the Installation Wiz-
ard. Not available in configuration mode Configuration Tools Log Off Exit Link Configuration 1 Configure
<Site 1 name>
2 Configure
<Site 2 name>
Link Installation Performance Monitoring Report Active Alarms 1 <Site 1 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
2 <Site 2 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
Change Password Change the Log On pass-
word dialog page 4-7 page 7-10 Events Log Clear Events Clear local events log Save to File Save events log file Preferences Local preferences dialog RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-11 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Chapter 4 Table 4-5: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality (Continued) Menu level Top
+1
+2 Maintenance Function Reference Clear counters Loopbacks Disabled Disabled Reset 1 <Site 1 name> Reset <Site 1 name> ODU 2 <Site 2 name> Reset <Site 2 name> ODU Help RADWIN Manager Help Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Information About RADWIN Manager View online version of the User Manual Calculator opened in default browser Appendix D Obtain system information page 7-1 Manager build and system information Table 4-6: RADWIN Manager Toolbar Item Link Configuration Link Installation Site: <Site 1 name>
Site: <Site 2 name>
Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log off Exit Description Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link;
assigns text files for storing alarms, statistics and configuration data. This button is disabled until a link installation has been completed Performs preliminary configuration of the system. This button is disabled after the link is installed Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site A. Same as Configuration | 1 Configure <Site 1 name>
Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site B. Same as Configuration | 2 Configure <Site 2 name>
Obtain system information Disabled Closes the current session and logs off RADWIN Manager Exits RADWIN Manager RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-12 Installing the Link: Overview Chapter 4 Installing the Link: Overview The Installation wizard has seven steps as shown in table 4-7 below. Table 4-7: Link Installation Wizard 1 Wizard welcome 2 System parameters Link ID Site details 3 Channel settings - ACS Configuration 4 Tx power and antenna settings 5 Services - Adaptive or fixed 6 Wizard summary and completion RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-13 Installing the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard Chapter 4 Installing the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the RADWIN Manager main window, click the Link Installation button. The Link Installation button is only accessible if anten-
nas are properly aligned. If this box is grayed out, you should align the antennas as set out in Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas on page 3-13. The Installation Wizard opens:
Figure 4-9: Link Installation Wizard The bottom data area reproduces the corresponding data from the main window - which the above panel obscures. See page 5-7 for a field by field description of this data area. Click Next to proceed with the installation procedure. Installing the Link: Step 2, System Parameters The system dialog box opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-14 Installing the Link: Step 2, System Parameters Chapter 4 Figure 4-10: : Installation Wizard, System dialog box To complete Installation Step 2:
1. Enter a Link ID. (Link ID - must be unique for each link in the area). The Link ID must include at least eight alphanumeric characters. Up to 24 characters are allowed.You should use a Link ID composed of both alphabetic and numeric characters. Both sides of a link must have the same Link ID. Note 2. Enter a Link Name for the link identification. The default name is Link. You should change it. 3. Enter names for Site 1 and Site 2. The default names are both Loca-
tion. You should change them. Throughout this manual, we use A for Site 1 and B for Site 2. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-15 Changing the Link Password Chapter 4 4. Optionally enter a new Link Password. If the Link Password is incorrect a link is established but configuration cannot be performed and no services are available. A new link password may be obtained from RADWIN Customer Support or use the alternative password supplied with the product. (see for more details). Note The link password is peculiar to the link itself and should not be confused with the RADWIN Managerlog on password. 5. Click Next. The default link with a rate of 6.5 Mbps is evaluated. The Channel Setting dialog box appears. Proceed to Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings, below. Changing the Link Password The default password is wireless-bridge. Optionally, you can change the link password as explained here. To change the link password:
1. Click the Change button in the System dialog box. The Change Link Password dialog box opens. Use the Hide characters check box for maximum security Note Figure 4-11: Change Link Password dialog box 2. Enter the current link password (The default link password for a new ODU is wireless-bridge). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-16 Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 4 If you have forgotten the Link Password, click the Forgotten Link Pass-
word button. The following window is displayed:
Figure 4-12: Lost or forgotten Link Password recovery Follow the instructions to use the Alternative Link Password, and click OK to finish. You are returned to the window in figure 4-11 above. Con-
tinue with the next step. 3. Enter a new password. 4. Retype the new password in the Confirm field. 5. Click OK. 6. Click Yes when asked if you want to change the link password. 7. Click OK at the Password changed success message. Restoring Factory Defaults returns the Link Password to wireless-
bridge. If the link is inactive, then the link password may also be changed from the Site Configuration dialogs. See page 6-14. Note Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 systems have a feature called Automatic Channel Selection (ACS). In the event of sync loss, ACS chooses the first available channel in a list of monitored channels nominated in the Channel settings window of figure 4-13 below. A channel switch takes place sufficiently fast as to ensure no loss of service. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-17 Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 4 Figure 4-13: Channel Settings - Automatic Channel Selection The default frequency for the product is shown. To select channels to be used by the link:
1. Select the main frequency from the Installation Channel box. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-18 Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings Chapter 4 Figure 4-14: Channel Settings - Showing available installation rates For version 2.1, channel bandwidth is set to 20 MHz and cannot be changed. Note 2. Click the check box if Automatic Channel Selection is required. 3. The Available Channels List contains all of the allowable channels for the link. Check the channels that can be automatically selected. Selecting a new channel causes the system quality to change. The Qual-
ity bar provides an indication of the link quality from poor (red) to good
(green) as shown in the bottom of figure 4-13 above. 4. Click Next. Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings The Tx Power and Antenna Parameters dialog appears. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-19 General
. Chapter 4 Figure 4-15: Transmission Power and Antenna Parameters The choice of Tx power, antenna gain and cable loss determines the EIRP and is affected by such considerations as radio limitations and regulatory restrictions. Before proceeding to antenna installation details, the following background information should be considered:
General Each RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU is made of two radio transceivers
(radios). The radios make use of algorithms that utilize both polarization and space diversity resulting in enhanced capacity, range and link availabil-
ity. The number of antennas (i.e. radios) used is determined by user config-
uration and by automatic system decisions, explained below. Dual Antennas at Both Sites Using dual antennas at both sites (single bipolar antenna or two monopolar antennas) enables the use of MIMO technology. With MIMO the system doubles the link capacity. At the same time, it keeps the same rate and modulation per radio as was used with single antenna, thus increasing capacity, range and availability. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-20 Single Antennas at Both Sites Chapter 4 For example with a dual antenna RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 can transmit at modulation of 64QAM and FEC of 0.83 and get an air rate of 130 Mbps, compared to 65 Mbps with single antenna. To work in this mode, each antenna port must be connected to an antenna, the RSS level in both receivers should be balanced and a minimal separation between the antennas must be maintained. (For example, by using dual polarization antennas a cross polarization separation is attained). Upon selecting Antenna Type as Dual, RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 automati-
cally doubles the air rates. RADWIN Manager indicates a case of unbalanced RSS between the two antennas. Single Antennas at Both Sites By selecting a single antenna at both sites the ODUs operate with a single radio that is connected to the ANT 1 connector. The second radio is auto-
matically shut down. Single and Dual Antennas In this mode one of the sites uses the ODU with a single antenna while the other site uses the ODU with a dual antenna. The advantages in this mode in comparison to using a single antenna in both sites are doubled total Tx power and additional polarization and/or space diversity. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 automatically switches to this mode if one of the ODUs is connected to a dual antenna or if the RSS at one of the ODU receiv-
ers is below minimal level. The air rates used in this mode are same as when using single antennas in both sites. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-21 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Chapter 4 The rates used by RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 are shown in Table 4-5 below:
Table 4-8: RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Transmission rates Radio Modulation FEC Air-Rate
[Mbps]
Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual BPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM BPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Let:
maxAllowedTx Power denote the maximum Tx Power practically avail-
able from an ODU. It appears as Tx Power per Radio in figure 4-16 below. maxRegEIRP denote the maximum EIRP available by regulation. It will be determined by three factors:
per band/regulation per channel bandwidth antenna gain It appears in figure 4-16 as Max EIRP. maxRegTxPower denote the maximum regulatory Tx Power for the equipment, also having regard the above three points RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-22 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Chapter 4 maxODUTxPower denote the maximum Tx Power of the ODU, itself depending on the air rate used. Then, the following relationship must be satisfied:
maxAllowedTxPower min maxRegEIRP These parameters are controlled as follows:
AntennaGain CableLoss maxRegTxPower
... (*) To set Tx power and configure antennas:
1. Click the Configure buttons in turn to configure the antennas on both sides of the link. Each one offers a dialog like this:
Figure 4-16: Antenna configuration dialog with opened type selection 2. Choose the antenna type and required transmission (Tx) power for the first site and click OK. Repeat the process for the second site. The Tx power (per radio) indicates the power of each radio inside the ODU and is used for Link Budget Calculations. The Tx power (System) shows the total transmission power of the ODU and is used to calculate the EIRP according to regulations. To see the relationship between Tx Power (radio) and TX Power (system), note that so that if you double the power in milliWatts (for two radios) then dBm will increase by milliWatt log dBm log 3 10 10
10 2
. 10 Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-23 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Chapter 4 3. Set the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss. If do this you will receive a warn-
ing message:
Figure 4-17: Antenna parameters change warning The Max EIRP level will be automatically set according to the selected band and regulation. The EIRP level is the sum of the System Tx power and the Antenna Gain minus the Cable Loss. Note If inequality (*) above is violated, then the following warning window is displayed:
Figure 4-18: Tx Power Limits The precise relationship between the items in inequality (*) and the win-
dow of figure 4-16 is follows:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-24 Installing the Link: Step 5, Services Chapter 4 Required Tx Power (per radio) will be adjusted down to the lesser of the value entered and maxAllowedTxPower TxPower (system)is maxAllowedTxPower + 3 (for 2 radios) Max EIRP is maxRegEIRP. EIRP is maxAllowedTx Power + Antenna Gain - Cable Loss The table in figure 4-18 only shows rates where the maximum Tx Power is the limitation, rather than regulations. Recall that maxAllowedPower and maxEIRP are regulatory. In an unregulated environment, the only limit is maxODUTxPower. Note When you close the window of figure 4-18, the change you requested will not be honored, and you will need to try again. 4. When you are finished with Tx Power configuration, Click Next. Installing the Link: Step 5, Services The Services dialog appears:
Figure 4-19: Services and Rates dialog RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-25 Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit Chapter 4 For version 2.1, Ethernet Only is the only available service. You may choose a specific modulation rate or use Adaptive. To choose a modulation rate:
1.Choose Adaptive or one of the available rate (see page 1-4 for informa-
tion about Automatic Adaptive Rate). 2. Click Next to continue. The service is activated as show below:
Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit Figure 4-20: Installation Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-26 Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit Chapter 4 The main window now reflects the installation:
Figure 4-21: Main window of the manager after installation To verify the installation:
Verify that the Radio Signal Strength (RSS) is according to expected results as determined by the Link Budget Calculator. Installation mode, as described above, may be re-entered using Configuration | 1 Configure Site A and Installation Mode the Site Configuration dialog. Some Installation mode functionality may cause a break in link service. Caution If you can accomplish link changes without breaking the service, always prefer to use Configuration mode, described in chapter 5. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 4-27 Configuring the Link Chapter 5 This chapter describes the link configuration procedure, which is performed after the installation of both sides of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link, as set out in chapters 3 and 4. Link configuration uses a Link Configuration Wizard to redefine the configu-
ration parameters and fine-tune an operational link. Both sides of the link are configured simultaneously. The following parameters are configured using the Link Configuration Wiz-
ard:
Channel settings Transmission power and antenna settings Service parameters System parameters Link Configuration: Getting Started The Main Window of the RADWIN Manager Ensure that the RADWIN Manager is running. The main window should look similar to that in figure 5-1:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-1 The RADWIN Manager Toolbar Chapter 5
. Figure 5-1: Main window, Wireless Link is Active Before starting a configuration session, make sure that a communication link exists between the two sides of the link. The Link Status indication bar must be green. In the Link Status panel, the Status field should show Link Active in green. The main window of the RADWIN Manager contains a large amount of information about the link. Before proceeding to details of link configuration we set out the meaning of each item in the main window. The RADWIN Manager Toolbar In configuration mode, the RADWIN Manager toolbar contains the following buttons:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-2 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu Chapter 5 Table 5-1: RADWIN Manager Toolbar Item Description Link Configuration Link Installation Site: <Site 1 name>
Site: <Site 2 name>
Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log off Exit Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link;
assigns text files for storing alarms, statistics and configuration data. This button is disabled until a link installation has been completed Performs preliminary configuration of the system. This button is disabled after the link is installed Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site A. Same as Configuration | 1 Configure <Site 1 name>
Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site B. Same as Configuration | 2 Configure <Site 2 name>
Obtain system information Disabled Closes the current session and logs off RADWIN Manager Exits RADWIN Manager The RADWIN Manager Main Menu The RADWIN Manager menu, is shown in table 5-2 below:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-3 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu Chapter 5 Table 5-2: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality Menu level Top
+1
+2 File Function Reference Configuration Tools Log Off Exit Link Configuration 1 Configure
<Site 1 name>
2 Configure
<Site 2 name>
Installation Performance Monitoring Report Active Alarms Return to Log On dialog. Same as Log Off button Exit the manager. Same as Exit button Run the Configuration Wiz-
ard. Not available in installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Runs the Installation Wiz-
ard. Not available in configuration mode 1 <Site 1 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
2 <Site 2 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
Change Password Events Log Change the Log On pass-
word dialog page 4-7 page 7-10 Clear Events Clear local events log Save to File Save events log file Preferences Local preferences dialog RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-4 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu Chapter 5 Table 5-2: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality (Continued) Menu level Top
+1
+2 Maintenance Function Reference Help Clear counters Loopbacks Reset RADWIN Manager Help Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Information About RADWIN Manager Disabled Disabled 1 <Site 1 name> Reset <Site 1 name> ODU 2 <Site 2 name> Reset <Site 2 name> ODU View online version of the User Manual Calculator opened in default browser Appendix D Obtain system information page 7-1 Manager build and system information RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-5 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Link details pane The Link details pane on the left is split into three sections. The top section summarizes information about the link:
Table 5-3: Link Details Item Link ID Services selected Frequency Channel bandwidth Rate Link status The two lower panels show basic link site details:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-6 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Table 5-4: Link site details, Site A and Site B Item IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Desalination Monitor pane he monitor pane, is the main source of real time information about link per-
formance at both link sites. It includes the following panes (top to bottom):
Radio Interface, Received Signal Strength (RSS) in dBm Ethernet Service:
Ethernet Throughput: The numbers are the current calculated throughputs at each site. The colored bars (with numbers) indi-
cate the maximum possible throughput having regard for air conditions. Rx and Tx Rates: Actual Ethernet traffic received and transmit-
ted rates per site, in Mbps of Fbps. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-7 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Figure 5-2: Ethernet Bandwidth Indication Frequency box: It shows the link frequency. The color of the box indicates the status Green is an active link Red is an inactive link Magenta shows an authentication or compatibility problem Brown shows severe compatibility problem Events Log The Events Log, stores alarms generated from both sides of the link and is detailed in chapter 7, The Events Log. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-8 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Status Bar The Status bar, displays the following icons:
Table 5-5: Status bar indicators Icon or Label Connectivity Purpose Shows if RADWIN Manager is communicating with the ODU. Connection mode to the ODU Connection available Over-the-Air connection - using the IP address of the remote unit. Local connection - direct connection to the IDU without using an IP address. Network connection - through a LAN IP Address Login IP address Normally encrypted link Encryption indicator Link password validation failed. The link is encrypted with default keys. Service and configuration are unavailable. Change the link password. There are several floating icons, which appear under specific conditions Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-9 Configuring the Link: Overview Chapter 5 Configuring the Link: Overview The Configuration Wizard has seven steps as shown in table 5-6 below. Table 5-6: Link Configuration Wizard 1 Wizard welcome 2 System parameters Link ID Site details 3 Channel settings 4 Tx power settings 5 Services 6 Wizard summary and completion RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-10 Configuring the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard Chapter 5 Since configuration functionality is included in the installation, we will briefly review the main steps and for most part offer references to the correspond-
ing installation step. Configuring the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the RADWIN Manager main window, click the Link Con-
figuration button. The Link Configuration button is only accessible on a fully installed link as set out in chapter 4. The Configuration Wizard opens:
Figure 5-3: Link Configuration Wizard Click Next to proceed with the configuration procedure. Configuring the Link: Step 2, System Parameters The System dialog box opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-11 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-4: Configuration Wizard, System dialog box The System attributes may be edited and the Link Password may be changed exactly as in the corresponding Link Installation step on page 4-
14. Click Next to continue. Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Configuring the Channel Settings follows the same pattern as the Installa-
tion procedure:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-12 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-5: Channel Settings dialog box - Automatic Channel Selection Notice that the operating channel is grayed out. If you use the Reselect Channel button, to change it, you will be asked for confirmation:
If you accept, then the system will search for the best operating channel:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-13 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-6: Searching for the best operating channel The link will return to the status of figure 5-5 above with a possible change to the operating channel. If you work without automatic channel selection, the Channel Settings win-
dow looks like this:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-14 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-7: Channel Settings without automatic channel selection If you click the Operating Channel drop-down list, the following window appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-15 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-8: Channel frequency options Selecting one of the frequencies presented returns you to the status of figure 5-7 with the appropriate change. If you choose Other..., the follow-
ing window opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-16 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-9: Choosing an Other Operating Channel frequency The right hand drop-down list (showing 5.800) allows you to fine-tune the frequency in increments of 5MHz within a range of 5.740 - 5.835 GHz. When you have completed making your choice, click Next to continue. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-17 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings Chapter 5 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings
. Figure 5-10: Transmission Power and Antenna Parameters If you chose to configure either antenna, you are presented with the follow-
ing window:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-18 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-11: Antenna configuration dialog with opened type selection So far, the procedure duplicates the corresponding Installation process on. If you choose a different antenna type and click OK, you will receive the fol-
lowing cautionary message:
In this context, entering Installation mode causes a service break until it is restored by running the Installation wizard. Caution If you are uncertain, do not do this without expert technical assistance. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-19 Configuring the Link: Step 5, Services Chapter 5 You may also change the Required Tx Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss. The procedure is the same as that set out in the Installation procedure on page 4-23. When you have completed making your choice, proceed to the Services window. Configuring the Link: Step 5, Services Here is the services dialog:
. Figure 5-12: Services and Rates dialog To choose Services, see the corresponding Installation procedure on page 5-20. Click Next to continue. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-20 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit Chapter 5 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit Figure 5-13: Configuration Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window. The main window now reflects the configuration:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-21 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit Chapter 5 Figure 5-14: Main window of the manager after configuration RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 5-22
| 1 | Revised User manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.14 MiB |
Site Configuration Chapter 6 The Site Configuration dialog panels are used to configure parameters, which may differ between both sides of the link. The parameters configured using the Site Configuration dialog panels include (among others):
System settings Air interface - Transmit (Tx) power and antenna Network management including VLAN Date and time Hub or Bridge mode Security settings In addition, the Link Site Configuration panels include several information windows:
Inventory - link hardware and software model details External alarms indicators The Operations dialog offers a doorway to jump into installation mode reverting to factory settings. The Site Configuration dialog has its own main menu with the following extra functionality:
Backup configuration parameters to a text file Restore configuration from a previously backed up configuration file Enable/disable the site ODU buzzer Jump back into installation mode keeping current configuration set-
tings Configuring the Site Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site You can edit the configuration parameters for each site individually. The fol-
lowing functions are available from the left side of the dialog box. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site Chapter 6 Figure 6-1: Configuration Dialog Box Functions on the left of the dialog box:
System Air Interface Inventory Management Security Date and Time Advanced Edit the contact person and location details. View the system details Change the transmit power, cable loss, antenna type and settings View the hardware and software inventory
(release numbers, model identification, MAC address) Configure the IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, the Trap Destination and VLAN Change the Community Values and the Link Password Set the date and time of the link from an NTP servers otherwise Choose Hub or Bridge ODU mode, set the Ethernet ports configuration, set the external alarm inputs, restore factory settings Functions at the top of the dialog box:
Backup Restore Save the current configuration to an .ini file Restore the link configuration from the .ini file created by the backup RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-2 Viewing Air Interface Details Chapter 6 Installation Mode Mute Return to Installation Mode for the entire link. Selecting the Mute check box before clicking the Install Mode button mutes the Beeper. Mutes the alignment tone in installation mode. Reactivate the beeper during alignment. To edit the Configuration Parameters:
1. Click the required site button on the main tool bar of the RADWIN Man-
ager OR Click Configuration from the main menu and choose a site to config-
ure. The Configuration dialog box opens (see figure 6-1 above). 2. Choose the appropriate item in the left hand list to open a dialog box. 3. Click Apply to save changes. In subsequent instructions, we will simply say Choose a site to configure on the understanding that the foregoing procedure is implied. Viewing Air Interface Details Click the Air Interface item in the left hand list. A window similar to the fol-
lowing appears:
Figure 6-2: Air interface details RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-3 Changing the Transmit Power Chapter 6 Changing the Transmit Power Each site can have a different transmit power level. To change the Transmit Power:
1. Choose a site to configure. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Choose Air Interface (see figure 6-3). 3. Choose the required Transmit (Tx) Power Level. 4. Click Apply to save the changes. Figure 6-3: Changing the Transmit Power The same considerations apply here as were noted in the Installation procedure on page 4-23. Note Site Management: IP Address and VLAN Configuring the ODU Address Each site must be configured separately, first site A then site B. To define the Management Addresses:
1. Choose a site to configure. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-4 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 6 The Configuration dialog box opens:
Figure 6-4: Management Addresses - Site Configuration dialog box 5. Choose Management. 6. Enter the IP address of the ODU in the IP Address field. If performing configuration from the RADWIN Manager, the IP address is that entered from the login screen. Note 7. Enter the Subnet Mask. 8. Enter the Default Gateway. 9. Enter the Trap Destination. This could be the IP address of the managing computer. The events log will be stored at this address. 10.Click Apply to save the changes. Configuring VLAN Settings VLAN Management enables separation of user traffic from management traffic whenever such separation is required. It is recommended that both sides of the link be configured with different VLAN IDs for management traf-
fic. To enable VLAN management:
1. Click Configuration from the main menu. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-5 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 6 2. Choose a site to configure. If you are configuring both sites, choose site B first. 3. Choose Management. 4. Open the VLAN tab. 5. Check the Enabled box. 6. Enter a VLAN ID. Its value should be between 1 and 4094. After entering the VLAN ID, only packets with the specified VLAN ID are processed for management purposes by the ODU. This includes all the protocols supported by the ODU (ICMP, SNMP, TELNET and NTP). The VLAN priority is used for the traffic sent from the ODU to the managing computer. Using VLAN for management traffic affects all types of man-
agement connections (local, network and over the air). 7. Enter a Priority number between 0 and 7. 8. Change the VLAN ID and Priority of the managing computer NIC to be the same as those of steps 6 and 7 respectively. 9. Click Apply or OK. Figure 6-5: Configuring management traffic VLAN Settings Changing this parameter causes the RADWIN Manager to immediately disconnect.To avoid inconvenience, you should verify the change by setting the VLAN only to one ODU, and only after verifying proper management operation, change the other ODU VLAN setting. Caution RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-6 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 6 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID If the VLAN ID is forgotten or there is no VLAN traffic connected to the ODU, then reset the relevant ODU. During the first two minutes of connection to the ODU uses management packets both with and without VLAN. You may use this period to reconfigure the VLAN ID and priority. Setting the Date and Time The ODU maintains a date and time. The date and time should be synchro-
nized with any Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 3 compatible server. During power-up the ODU attempts to configure the initial date and time using an NTP Server. If the server IP address is not configured or is not reachable, a default time is set. When configuring the NTP Server IP address, you should also configure the offset from the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). If there is no server available, you can either set the date and time, or you can set it to use the date and time from the managing computer. Note that manual setting is not recommended since it will be overridden by a reset, power up, or synchroni-
zation with an NTP Server. The NTP uses UDP port 123. If a firewall is configured between the ODU and the NTP Server this port must be opened. Note It can take up to 8 minutes for the NTP to synchronize the ODU date and time. To set the date and time 1. Determine the IP address of the NTP server to be used. 2. Test it for connectivity using the command (Windows XP), for example:
w32tm /stripchart /computer:216.218.192.202 You should get a continuous response of times, each a few seconds apart. 3. Choose a site to configure. The Configuration dialog box opens. 4. Choose Date & Time:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-7 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 6 Figure 6-6: Date and Time Configuration 5. If entering an IP address for the NTP Server, click Clear, and then enter the new address. 6. Set your site Offset value in minutes ahead or behind GMT1. 7. To manually set the date and time, click Change and edit the new values. Figure 6-7: Change Date and Time If you used an NTP Server, you will see a window like this:
1. Greenwich Mean Time RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-8 Ethernet Properties Chapter 6 Figure 6-8: Date and Time configured from an NTP Server 8. Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog. Ethernet Properties Configuring the Bridge Bridge configuration is required in various network topologies, such as pro-
tection (1+1) and ring applications. The bridge configuration parameters are located under the Advanced tab of the Site Configuration dialog box:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-9 Configuring the Bridge Chapter 6 Figure 6-9: Bridge Configuration - Site Configuration dialog box ODU Mode This parameter controls the ODU mode with two optional values, Hub Mode - in Hub mode the ODU transparently forwards all packets over the wireless link. Bridge Mode - In Bridge mode the ODU performs both learning and aging, forwarding only relevant packets over the wireless link. The aging time of the ODU is fixed at 300 seconds. Changing these modes requires system reset. IDU Aging time This parameter controls the IDU aging time. The aging time parameter controls the time after which each MAC address is dropped from the MAC address learning table. The default value is 300 seconds. Any change to these parameters is effective immediately. Each side of the link can be configured separately. Note Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-10 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode Chapter 6 The following table shows the appropriate configuration for several common scenarios. Both link sites must be configured with the same parameter:
Table 6-1: ODU mode configuration for common Scenario Standard (Default) Configuration for Ethernet Applications ODU Mode IDU Aging Time Bridge 300 sec Rapid network topology changes where fast aging is required Hub 1 sec Ethernet Hub Ethernet Bridge Hub Bridge N/A N/A Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode The ODU Ethernet port is configured to auto-detect by default and may not be changed. The ODU Ethernet port mode is configurable for line speed (10/100BaseT) and duplex mode (half or full duplex). An Auto Detect feature is provided, whereby the line speed and duplex mode are detected automatically using auto-negotiation. Use manual con-
figuration when attached external equipment does not support auto-negoti-
ation. The default setting is Auto Detect. You should not reconfigure the port that is used for the managing computer connection, since a wrong configuration can cause a management disconnection or Ethernet services interruption. Caution To configure the Ethernet Mode:
1. From the Configuration menu, choose the site to reconfigure. The Site Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Click Advanced | Ethernet. 3. In the Ethernet Ports Configuration pane, use the drop-down menu to choose the configuration. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-11 Setting the Maximum Information Rate Chapter 6 4. Click Apply to save the changes. It is possible to close the Ethernet service by disconnecting the Ethernet port. Note If you close the port, you may subsequently be unable to access the device. If this should occur, a workaround is as follows:
Connect the system from the remote site Connect via other Ethernet port (of the IDU) Power down the equipment and connect immediately after power up (the fastest way is to enter install mode) Setting the Maximum Information Rate The maximum Ethernet throughput of the link can be limited. The default setting is Not Limited (see figure 6-9 above), where the highest informa-
tion rate available for the link conditions and settings is used. To limit the Ethernet information rate:
1. From the Configuration menu, choose the site to reconfigure. 2. Click Advanced | Ethernet The Configuration dialog box opens. 3. In the Information Rate pane, use the drop-down menu to choose the maximum Information Rate. 4. Choose Other to define the throughput with 1 Kbps resolution 5. Choose Not Limited for the highest information rate possible for the link conditions and settings 6. Click Apply to save the changes. Displaying the Inventory To view the inventory data 1. Choose a site from the main menu. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Choose Inventory (figure 6-10). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-12 Security Features Chapter 6 Figure 6-10: Inventory Screen Security Features The Security dialog enables you to change the Link Password and the SNMP Communities details:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-13 Changing the Link Password Chapter 6 Figure 6-11: Available security features Changing the Link Password This item is only available when the link is down. Otherwise, it works the same way as the corresponding item on page 4-16. RADWIN Manager Community Strings The ODU communicates with the application using SNMPv1 protocol. The protocol defines three types of communities:
Read-Only for retrieving information from the ODU Read-Write to configure and control the ODU Trap used by the ODU to issue traps. The Community string must be entered at login. The user must know the password and the correct Community string to gain access to the system. A user may have read-only privileges. It is not possible to manage the ODU if the read-write or the read Commu-
nity values are forgotten. A new Community value may be obtained from RADWIN Customer Support for the purpose of setting new Community; the serial number or the MAC address of the ODU must be supplied. The RADWIN Manager uses the Read Community strings public for the site Al ODU and public-remote for the site B ODU. It uses Write Community strings netman for the site A ODU and netman-remote for the site B ODU. These are the factory defaults. Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-14 RADWIN Manager Community Strings Chapter 6 The read-write Community strings and read-only Community strings have a minimum of five alphanumeric characters. (bru1 and bru4097 are not per-
mitted). Changing the trap Community is optional and is done by clicking the check box. Editing Community Strings The Community change dialog box is available from the Configuration |
Security tab. Both read-write and read-only communities must be defined. On logging on for the first time, use the following as the current Commu-
nity:
For Read-Write Community, use netman. For Read-Only Community, use public. For Trap Community, use public To change a Community string:
1. From the Configuration dialog box, choose the Security tab. 2. Type the current read-write Community (default is netman). 3. Choose the communities to be changed by clicking the check box. 4. Type the new Community string and re-type to confirm. 5. Click OK to save. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-15 RADWIN Manager Community Strings Chapter 6 Figure 6-12: Changing the Community String Forgotten Community string If the read-write Community string is unknown, an alternative Community key can be used. The alternative Community key is unique per ODU and can be used only to change the Community strings. The alternative Community key is supplied with the product, and should be kept in a safe place. If both the read-write Community and the alternative Community key are unavailable, then an alternative Community key can be obtained from RAD-
WIN Customer Support using the ODU serial number or MAC address. The serial number is located on the product label. The serial number and the MAC address are displayed in the Site Configuration inventory tab. When you have the alternative Community key, click the Forgot Commu-
nity button and enter the Alternative Community key (figure 6-13). Then change the read-write Community string. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-16 Muting the alignment tone Chapter 6 Figure 6-13: Alternative Community Dialog box Muting the alignment tone The ODU alignment tone becomes audible as soon as power is supplied, and continues until the ODUs are aligned and the link established. It is possible to mute the tone during regular operation of the link. It must be enabled when performing the alignment procedure. To mute the alignment tone:
1. Choose a site. 2. The Configuration dialog box opens. 3. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Buzzer button. The button tog-
gles between on and off. The tone is disabled. To restore the alignment tone:
1. Choose a site. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Buzzer button. The button tog-
gles from on to off. The tone is enabled. Setting External Alarm Inputs The IDU-C has two external alarm inputs and two external alarm outputs in the form of dry-contact relays. The Alarm interface is located on the front panel of the IDU-C and is a 25-pin D-type female connector. see IDU-C Alarm Connector on page B-3, for wiring specifications and pinout. The user enables or disables each of the alarms and can configure the alarm RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-17 Managing Configuration Files Chapter 6 description text that appears in the alarm trap. The ODU sends the alarm within less than a second from actual alarm trigger. To set the external alarm inputs:
1. Open the Site Configuration Alarms configuration by clicking Configura-
tion | Advanced. Figure 6-14: External Alarm Configuration 2. Choose an alarm and set its mode to Enabled or Disabled 3. Enter a description of the alarms in the text field. 4. Click Apply to save. 5. Click OK to exit from the dialog. Managing Configuration Files Backup Configuration to a File RADWIN Manager allows you to backup configuration parameters of the local and remote units to the managing computer as .ini files. Each site is backed up in a separate .ini file. To save the configuration in a file:
1. Choose a site to back up. The Configuration dialog box opens. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-18 Restoring a Configuration File Chapter 6 2. Click Backup. 3. In the Save As dialog box, indicate in which folder and under what name configuration file is to be saved, and click Save. Restoring a Configuration File Configuration files (*.ini) can be uploaded from the managing computer. Such configuration files can be distributed to other units that use the same configuration. To restore a configuration file:
1. Choose a site to restore (from a previous backup). The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Click Restore. 3. From the Open dialog box choose *.ini file to upload and click OK. Backup files are specific to a site (IDU / ODU pair and Link ID). Caution Do not restore a backup configuration file to a site other than that from which it was originally taken. Resetting You may reset the link, preserving the current configuration, or reset to fac-
tory defaults. Resetting the link causes service disconnection. Caution To maintain the connection between the managing computer and the link, first reset Site B. To reset the link preserving current configuration:
1. From Maintenance on the main window, reset the remote unit. 2. From Maintenance on the main window, reset the local unit. To reset to Factory Defaults 1. Choose either of the sites. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Choose Operations in the Configuration dialog box. 3. Click the Restore Defaults button. A message box asking if you want to restore factory default appears. 4. Click the check box if you want to keep the current IP address settings. 5. Click Yes to continue. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-19 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 6 Configuration with Telnet A Telnet terminal can be used to configure and monitor the RADWIN 1000/
2000/5000. To start a Telnet session, use telnet <manager IP>. For example, if you run Telnet as follows, telnet 10.0.0.120 you will be asked for a user name and password. The login user name/password is identical to the Community strings; Read allows display only, Read/Write allows display and set commands. Supported Telnet commands are shown in table 6-2. Note that some of the commands are model-specific. For example, TDM commands will not apply to Ethernet only and PoE based links. Table 6-2: Telnet Commands Command display inventory Explanation Displays ODU product name, Name, Location, hardware and software revisions, uptime, MAC address, IDU product name, IDU software and hardware revisions display management Displays IP, Subnet, Gateway, Traps table display link display Ethernet display tdm display ntp set ip <ipaddr> <subnetMask>
<gateway>
display PM
<interface:AIR,LAN1,LAN2,TDM1, TDM2,TDM3,TDM4>
<interval:current,day,month>
Displays State, Link ID, Channel BW, RSS, TSL, Frequency/ACS, DFS, Rate/ARA, Distance Displays Bridge Mode, Aging time, Port table (State, Status and action) Displays Clock Mode, Master Clock Mode, Current Clock, Quality[1], TDM table (Line status, Error Blocks) Displays Time, Server and Offset Set the ODU IP address, subnet mask and gateway The user must reset the ODU after the command completion Shows the performance monitor tables for each interface according to user defined monitoring intervals set trap <index:1-10> <ipaddr>
<port:0-65535>
Set a specific trap from the traps table (set trap 3 10.0.0.133 162) set readpw <oldpasswd> <passwd>
Set the read access password (Read Community) set writepw <oldpasswd> <passwd>
Set the read-write access password (Read-Write Community) set trappw <oldpasswd> <passwd>
Set the trap Community string set buzzer <mode:0=OFF,1 =ON>
Toggle the buzzer mode (0 off, 1 on) RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-20 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 6 Table 6-2: Telnet Commands (Continued) Command Explanation set tpc<power:Value between minimal TX power, and maximal TX power>
set bridge <mode:0=Bridging OFF,1=
Bridging ON >
Set the ODU transmit power. If a wrong value is entered, both min and max values shall be displayed in the error reply Set the ODU bridge mode (0 off, 1 on) set name <new name>
Set the name of the link set location <new location>
Set the name of the location Set contact <new contact>
Set the name of the site manager set Ethernet <>port:MNG,LAN1,LAN2>
<mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DIS ABLE>
Set the mode and speed of each ethernet port Reboot Help Reset both the IDU and the ODU. The user shall be prompt that the command will reset the card and that he has to reconnect the telnet session after TBD seconds. Displays the available commands RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-21 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 6 figure 6-15, below, shows the available Telnet commands via the Help command. Hello admin, welcome to ODU Management CLI!
Software Revision 2.1.00_b2070_Jun 5 2008
admin@10.0.0.120-> Type "help" for help. admin@10.0.0.120-> help display inventory display management display link display ethernet display tdm display ntp display PM <interface:AIR,LAN1,LAN2,TDM1,TDM2,TDM3,TDM4>
<interval:current,day,month>
set ip <ipaddr> <subnetMask> <gateway>
set trap <index:1-10> <ipaddr> <port:1-65535>
set readpw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set writepw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set trappw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set buzzer <mode:0=OFF,1=ON>
set tpc <power:Value between minimal TX power, and maximal TX power>
set bridge <mode:0=Bridging OFF,1=Bridging ON>
set name <new name>
set location <new location>
set contact <new contact>
set ethernet <port:MNG,LAN1,LAN2> <mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DISABLE>
reboot help Command "help" finished OK. Figure 6-15: Telnet Management Screen RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 6-22 Chapter 7 Monitoring and Diagnostics The RADWIN Manager application enables you to monitor the link, as well as perform diagnostic operations such as loopback tests. This chapter covers:
Link compatibility issues Retrieving link information Reinstalling and realigning a link Replacing an ODU Restoring to factory setup Performance monitoring Troubleshooting Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) The Get Diagnostics feature collects and writes all link and Manager infor-
mation (from both sites) into a text file. The file information can be used for diagnostics and should be sent to RADWIN Customer Support to speed up assistance. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-1 Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) Chapter 7 The following table lists link and system information that can be monitored. Table 7-1: Get Diagnostics Data and Description Data Description System Data General information about the system Link Information Information about the link properties Events Log List of recent system events Site Configuration Data about the site parameters Active Alarms List of active alarms Performance Monitor Network performance data over defined time periods Monitor Detailed event data record To get diagnostics 1. On the Help menu, choose Get Diagnostic Information. Figure 7-1: Get Diagnostics Dialog Box 2. Select or deselect the data options. If the file is to be sent to RADWIN Customer Support leave all options checked. 3. Click File Path to specify the folder in which you want to save the file and then click Start to save the information. The file is saved in the specified folder as Diagnostics Informa-
tion.txt RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-2 Link Compatibility Link Compatibility Chapter 7 Link Compatibility indicates the version compatibility using software traps. As new hardware or software is added to existing networks compatibility issues may arise. An incompatibility issue is indicated to the user by a change of color of the Link Status box on the Main Menu screen. Trap mes-
sages in the events Log indicate the problems or limitations and suggest upgrades when appropriate. The following Link Status messages are given:
fullCompatibility - different software versions were detected that are fully compatible. The message indicates that an upgrade is available. restrictedCompatibility - different software versions were detected that operate correctly. However, new features are not supported softwareUpgradeRequired - different software versions were detected allow-
ing limited operation. The message is, that a software upgrade required. versionsIncompatibility - different software versions were detected that are incompatible. You need to perform local upgrades. Table 7-2: Link Compatibility Trap Messages Link State Link State text fullCompatibility Active restrictedCompatibility softwareUpgradeRequired versionsIncompatibility Active - SW Version mis-
match Active SW Upgrade Required Not Active -
SW Upgrade Required Link Status Color Green Magenta
(Same as authen-
tication error) Site Description SW Upgrade Available Site Desc. Color Link Status Color Yellow Green SW Upgrade Recommended Yellow Magenta
(Same as authentication error) Brown
(Major) SW Upgrade Required Yellow Brown (Major) Red Local SW Upgrade Required Yellow Red Reinstalling and Realigning a Link It may be necessary to reinstall the link if the ODUs need to be realigned. Activating Install Mode causes both sites to go into install mode, causing disruption in service for approximately fifteen seconds. Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-3 The Link Budget Calculator Chapter 7 To reinstall the link:
1. Choose a site. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Install Mode button. A message box asking if you want to enter install mode appears. 3. Click Yes to continue. The system enters Install mode and the alignment tone becomes audi-
ble. 4. Realign the ODUs and start the Installation wizard (see chapter 4). The Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is part of the RADWIN Manager software and is found in the Help menu. This useful utility enables you to calculate the expected performance of the wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range including antenna size, cable loss and climate condi-
tions. For full details, see appendix D. Performance Monitoring RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Performance Monitoring constantly monitors traf-
fic over the radio link and collects statistics data for the air interface and Ethernet ports. It does so continuously, even when the RADWIN Manager is not connected. Two types of logs are recorded:
Monitor Log that records statistics on traffic rate and radio signal strength. Events Log that records when the rates fall above or below a pre-
defined threshold. Both the statistics Monitor log and events log can be saved as TXT files. The Monitor Log The Monitor Log records performance statistics for predefined intervals. You can save the monitor log to a text file, as well as display the information in an on-screen report. Saving the Monitor Log You can save the recorded Monitor Log statistics to a text file. To save the monitor log:
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-4 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Figure 7-2: Preferences dialog box 2. Click the Monitor Tab. 3. Select the file to save. 4. Click the check box to open the file for saving. 5. Click the button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name the monitor log file is to be saved. 6. Set the time interval for adding data to the file. 7. Click OK to save the file. Viewing Performance Reports The Performance Monitor Report displays performance views of each of the interfaces1. To obtain performance monitoring reports:
1. From the main menu, choose Tools | Performance Monitoring Report ... You are presented with the following window:
1. Ethernet performance is not collected from PoE devices. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-5 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Figure 7-3: Basic Performance Monitoring Report 2. Choose a report type from the left panel and click the Get Data toolbar button. For example, if you choose Site A, Air and Current, you will be offered a report looking like this:
Figure 7-4: A typical Performance Monitoring Report You can click the Selection Pane icon to toggle the side panel on or off. The other reports look similar. Here is a detailed description of the reports and their fields:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-6 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Several performance data occurrences are collected for each of the inter-
faces (ES, SES, and UAS), as well as Specific data per Interface type (e.g., TX and RX bytes for Ethernet). For the Air Interface, user defined thresholds data are collected. Refer to table 7-3 and table 7-4, in Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar below. Data is collected and selectively displayed based on three time intervals as selected by the Interval radio buttons:
Current (t=0) Daily 15 minutes Intervals RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-7 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Table 7-3: Explanation of performance data Data type Reported Value Explanation Generic PM Data Air Interface PM Data UAS Unavailable Seconds ES Errored Sec-
onds SES Severe Errored Seconds BBE Background Block Error Integrity Max RSL Min RSL Max TSL Min TSL RSL Threshold 1 RSL Threshold 2 TSL Threshold BBER Threshold Seconds in which the interface was out of service. The number of seconds in which there was at least one error block. Note that the notation of an error block is different per interface. The number of seconds in which the service quality was low (the quality is different per type of inter-
face and determined by the BBER threshold per interface). The number of errored blocks in an interval. A flag indicating that the data was valid. Note that the Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values were stored (e.g., due to clock changes within the interval or power up reset). The maximum of the receive signal level (mea-
sured in dBm). The minimum of the receive signal level (measured in dBm). The maximum of the transmit signal level (mea-
sured in dBm). The minimum of the transmit signal level (mea-
sured in dBm). The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the specified threshold. The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the specified threshold. The number of seconds in which the RSL was above the specified threshold. The BBER Threshold value counts the number of seconds in which the Background Block Error Ratio
(BBER) exceeded the specified threshold. Ethernet Interface PM Data Received Bytes The number of Megabytes received at the specified port within the interval Transmitted Bytes The number of Megabytes transmitted at the spec-
ified port within the interval. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-8 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar You can use the toolbar to perform the actions described in the following table:
Table 7-4: Action of the toolbar buttons Command Button Action Get Data Gathers current performance monitoring data. Save Clear Save current performance monitoring data to a file Clear current performance monitoring data. Thresholds Set Air Interface Thresholds Close Closes the active alarm window. Setting Air Interface Thresholds Use the Thresholds button on the Monitoring Performance Report toolbar to set the Air Interface Thresholds:
Figure 7-5: Threshold configuration dialog box BBER Threshold This parameter counts the seconds during which the radio performance is below a user specified threshold. The threshold is measured as a percent-
age. The threshold can be set from 0.1% up to 50%. For links with Ethernet only service, 8% threshold is recommended. If there are no problems during the interval, then for that threshold, the recom-
mended BBER value should be 0. Since the system provides a lossless Ethernet service, there is throughput degradation in case of interference. The degradation is proportional to the BBER. RSL Threshold RSL Threshold can also be used as an indicator of problems in the radio channel. You can check the RSS by from the Link Budget Calculator results RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-9 The Events Log Chapter 7 during installation. A value of -5dB from the current RSS is recommended as a threshold. The Events Log The Events Log records system failures, loss of synchronization, loss of sig-
nal, compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events. Alarms (traps) are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the main window. The Events Log may be saved as a text file. The Events Log includes the following fields:
Sequential number (ID) Date and time stamp Message Trap source IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm. For complete information about traps and alarms see appendix G, MIB Reference, table G-3. The events are displayed in the Events Log in the lower part of the RADWIN Manager main window:
Figure 7-6: Events Log Display RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-10 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 RADWIN Manager Traps The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events, displayed in the Wvents Log. Table 7-5: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages Trap Message Severity Remarks Error loading trap catcher. Port 162 is already in use. Warning NMS will not catch any traps from target, some other application has grabbed this port Device unreachable!
Connected to <site_name>
<site_name> Site will be reset. Restore Factory Default Settings in process on Site
<site_name>
Error Check connectivity to target Information Information Information Factory Settings: The process was not finished due to connection issues. Warning Reset: The process was not finished due to connec-
tion issues. Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem to tar-
get Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem to tar-
get - Target will not be reset Cannot Write to Monitor file. There is not enough space on the disk. Warning Free some space on disk and retry Windows Error: <error_ID>. Cannot Write to Monitor file. Warning Operating System error TDM Counters were cleared for both sides Identical IP addresses at <local_site_name> and
<remote_site_name>
Information Warning The Product is not identified at the
<local_site_name> site. The Product is not identified at the
<remote_site_name> site. The Product is not identified at both sites. Product Not Identified!
The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the
<remote_site_name> site. Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Set up a different IP to each site NMS is incompatible with the target release ODU release is newer than NMS release. Wizards are not available. NMS will be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the NMS. (You will get this message as a pop up) The Manager identified a newer ODU release at both sites. Warning RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-11 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 Table 7-5: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages Trap Message Severity Remarks The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the
<local_site_name> site. Newer Version identified at the <local_site_name>
site. Warning Warning Newer Version identified at the <remote_site_name>
site. Warning Newer Version Identified!
Warning ODU release is newer than NMS release. Wizards are not available. NMS will be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the NMS Setting the Events Preferences You can define a color for the traps to be displayed in the Event Log win-
dow, according to the severity of the event. The severity is predefined. To set the trap color:
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears. 2. Click the Events Tab:
Figure 7-7: Preferences dialog box RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-12 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 3. Select the event type and click on the button. A color chart opens. 4. Select the desired color. 5. Repeat for all of the event types. To set the trap background color:
Click Background Color to change the text background. To reset the event colors:
Click Reset Settings to return to the default color settings. Saving the Events Log You can save recorded events in an Events Log text file. New alarms are automatically added to the text file, as they enter the Events Log. To save the Events Log:
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears 2. Click the Events Tab. 3. Select the file to save. 4. Click the check box to open the file for saving. Click the and under what name the Events Log file is to be saved, and click OK. button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder To store the Events Log, first define the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and trap address of the managing computer (see Configuring the ODU Address on page 6-4 for details). Note Reverting Alarm Messages Alarm messages can be reverted to their default values by choosing the Advanced tab from the Preferences dialog:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-13 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 Just click the Restore Defaults button, followed by OK. Active Alarms Upon setting a trap destination, applicable events are reported as active alarms to the user. The active alarms are saved and can be viewed in the Active Alarms window. To view summary of saved alarms:
From the Tools menu, choose Active Alarm Summary. The Active Alarms Summary window opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-14 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 Figure 7-8: Active Alarms Summary The following table provides an explanation of the command buttons Table 7-6: Active Alarms command buttons Command Action Save Saves the alarms in CSV or text format for further analysis. Refresh Reads the alarms from the ODU. Site Close Selects site for the active alarms. Closes the active alarm window. Remote Power Fail Indication Remote power fail indication indicates to one side that the other side has had a power failure. The failed site sends a final trap indication about the power loss just before powering off. A Dying-Gasp circuit identifies the power failure at a minimum interval of 20 milliseconds before the ODU or IDU powers off. During that interval a message notifying the power failure is sent to Site B. Alarm output number 4 indicates power failure at Site B. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-15 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Use the following table to troubleshoot LED fault indications:
Table 7-7: LED fault indicators LED PWR IDU ODU Status Remedy Off Check that AC adapter is connected to the IDU-E and the AC power outlet. Orange Check that the IDU/ODU cable is properly wired and connected. Red Check that the IDU/ODU cable is properly wired and connected. AIR I/F Orange Complete the installation procedure from the management soft-
ware. Red Check the ODU Antenna alignment. Check that the radio configu-
ration of both site A and site B units are the same (channel and Link ID). SVC Off Use the following table to troubleshoot faults in the system:. Table 7-8: Troubleshooting Symptom Remedy No power Ensure that power is connected to the IDU. Ensure that the ODU cable is properly wired and connected. No signal Complete the installation procedure from the RADWIN Manager Check the ODU alignment. Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B units are the same (channel and Link ID. Weak signal received Check the ODU alignment, reconfigure the link. Check the alignment tone sounds the Best Signal sequence. Replacing an ODU Prior to any action ensure that both ODUs have the same software version. You can see this on the inventory panels for each site. For Site A, click Site A | Inventory and note the ODU software version. Repeat this for Site B using Site B | Inventory. If either ODU has an old software version, perform a software upgrade. It is important to configure the new ODU exactly the same as the old ODU to avoid configuration mismatches, which will disrupt the link. An ODU may be reconfigured in several ways. Use the backup Configuration If a backup of the configuration is available, restore that configura-
tion using Site A| Restore. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-16 Restoring Factory Setup Chapter 7 Manual Configuration The new ODU can be configured manually according to the link con-
figuration. Remember to use the same settings for Link ID, chan-
nels, link password, IP addresses, and names. Restoring Factory Setup To restore factory setup:
1. Set the remaining ODUs back to the factory setup by using the Site A
|Advanced option. 2. Activate the second ODU and carry out a new Installation. Online Help Online help can be accessed from the Help menu on the main screen of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Manager. Figure 7-9: Online Help for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Customer Support Customer support for this product can be obtained from the local VAR, Inte-
grator or distributor from whom it was purchased. For further information, please contact the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 dis-
tributor nearest to you or one of RADWIN's offices worldwide (see RAD-
WIN Worldwide Offices at the beginning of this manual). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 7-17 Technical Specifications Appendix A Configuration Architecture IDU to ODU Interface Radio Capacity Range Channel Bandwidth ODU: Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna or Connector-
ized for External Antenna IDU: Indoor Unit for service interfaces or PoE device for Ethernet only Outdoor CAT-5e cable; Maximum cable length: 100 m Up to 270Mbps at 40MHz channel bandwidth in the 5.3/5.4 IC and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands Up to 130Mbps at 20MHz channel bandwidth in the 3.5/3.6 GHz spectrum bands Up to 120 km / 75 miles 5, 10, and 20 MHz 40 MHz in the 5.3/5.4 IC and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 A-1 Radio Appendix A Frequency Bands Band Regulations 5.725 5.850 GHz FCC / IC 5.725 5.825 GHz FCC(UNII)/IC 5.250 5.350 GHz (exclud-
ing 40 MHz channel band-
width and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) FCC 5.250 5.350 GHz (including 40 MHz channel bandwidth and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) IC 5.470 5.725 GHz (exclud-
ing 40 MHz channel band-
width and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) FCC 5.470 5.725 GHz (including 40 MHz channel bandwidth and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) IC 4.940 4.990 GHz 2.400 2.4835 GHz FCC 3.650 3.700 GHz 3.475 3.650 GHz IC Band Max Tx Power Antenna 5.725 5.850 GHz 29.95 dBm 29.95 dBm 29.95 dBm 23 dBm 20 dBm 28 dBm 28 dBi Dish 24 dBi Integral Flat 23 dBi External Flat 14 dBi External Flat 16.5 dBi External Flat 8 dBi assembly RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 A-2 Radio Appendix A Band Max Tx Power Antenna 1.9 dBm 6.5 dBm 7.5 dBm 28 dBi Dish 23.5 dBi Integral Flat 22.5 dBi External Flat 5.250 5.350 GHz 23.5dBm 6 dBi assembly 7.4 dBm 7.4 dBm 23.5 dBm 1.6 dBm 6.3 dBm 7.3 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 15.5 dBi External Flat 6 dBi assembly 28 dBi Dish 23.5 dBi Integral Flat 22.5 dBi External Flat 5.470 5.725 GHz 23.7 dBm 6 dBi assembly 7.2 dBm 7.2 dBm 23.7 dBm 23.8 dBm 26.4 dBm 26.4 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 16.5 dBi External Flat 6 dBi assembly 28 dBi Dish 22.5 dBi Integral Flat 23.5 dBi External Flat 5.725 5.825 GHz 29.4 dBm 6 dBi assembly 24.4 dBm 24 dBm 29.3 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 16.5 dBi External Flat 6 dBi assembly 21 dBi Integral Flat 21 dBi External Flat 4.940 4.990 GHz 31 dBm 28 dBi Dish 2.400 2.4835 GHz 25.5 dBm(*) 25.5 dBm(*) 23.7 dBm 23.7 dBm 3.475 3.650 GHz 26 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 15 dBi External Flat 20 dBi External Flat 17.5 dBi Integral Flat 20 dBi External Flat 17.5 dBi Integral Flat 21 dBi Integral Flat 22 dBi External Flat 24 dBi Dish 13 dBi External Flat RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 A-3 Radio Appendix A Band Max Tx Power Antenna 26 dBm 3.650 3.700 GHz 20 dBm 17 dBm 24 dBm 13.5 dBi assembly 13 dBi External Flat 21 dBi Integral Flat 22 dBi External Flat 24 dBi Dish 17 dBi assembly
(*) Relevant for RADWIN 1000 RW-1020-0150 / RADWIN 2000 RW-2020-
0150 models only Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, and 20 MHz, (10MHz not supported in the 5.8 GHz band) Radio Modulation 2x2 MIMO-OFDM (BPSK/QPSK/16QAM/64QAM) Adaptive Modulation &
Coding Supported Automatic Channel Selection Supported Radio Regulation FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart C, E, Part 90 Subpart Y, Z IC (Canada) RSS-210, RSS-111, RSS-192, RSS-197 Duplex Technology TDD Error Correction FEC k = 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 Encryption AES 128 Rate Single Antenna
[Mbps]
Rate Single Antenna in the 5.8 GHz spectrum band
[Mbps]
Rate Dual Antenna [Mbps]
Rate Dual Antenna in the 5.8 GHz spectrum band
[Mbps]
Modulation FEC [k=]
Max Tx Power [dBm]
Sensitivity (dBm) @BER
<10e-11 (20MHz) 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13.5 13 27 BPSK 1/2
-88 27 26 54 40.5 39 81 54 52 81 108 121.5 135 78 104 117 130 108 162 216 243 270 QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 1/2 25
-86 3/4 1/2 24 3/4 21 2/3 19 3/4 5/6 18
-83
-81
-80
-72
-70
-67 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 A-4 Ethernet Interface Ethernet Interface Throughput Number of Ethernet ports Type Framing/Coding Line Impedance VLAN Support Connector Maximum Frame Size Bridge Latency Appendix A Up to 270Mbps in the 5.3/5.4 IC and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands IDU-C and E: 2; PoE Device: 1 10/100BaseT with Auto-Negotiation (IEEE 802.3u) IEEE 802.3 100 Transparent RJ-45 2048 Bytes Layer 2, self-learning of up to 2047 MAC addresses (IEEE 802.1Q), hub/Bridge selectable mode 3 msec (typical) Management Management Application RADWIN Manager Protocol SNMP and Telnet Mechanical Dimensions Power ODU with Integrated Antenna: 37.1/14.84(W) x 37.1/
14.84(H) x 9.00/3.6(D) cm/in; 3.5 kg / 7 lbs ODU Connectorized: 18.0/7.2(W) x 27.0/10.8(H) x 5.5/
2.2(D) cm/in; 1.5 kg / 3.0 lbs IDU-C: 43.6/17.2(W) x 4.5/1.7(H) x 21/8.3(D) cm; 1.5 kg /
3.3 lbs IDU-E: 22/8.7(W) x 4.4/1.7(H) x 17/6.7(D) cm/in; 0.5 Kg /
1.1 lbs Power Feeding Dual feeding, -20 to -60 VDC (AC/DC converter is available) Power Consumption
< 35 W (IDU+ODU) Environmental Operating Temperatures Humidity ODU: -35C to +60C / -31F to +140F IDU-C: 0C to +50C / 32F to +122F IDU-E: -5C to 45C / 32F to 122F ODU: Up to 100% non-condensing, IP67 IDU: 90% non-condensing RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 A-5 Safety Safety FCC/IC (cTUVus) UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA 60950-1 C22.2 Appendix A ETSI EMC FCC ETSI CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC AS/NZS Air Interface EN/IEC 60950-1 CFR47 Class B, Part15, Subpart B EN 300 386 (2005), EN 301 489-1 (2001), EN 301 489-4
(2002) CISPR 22-02 CISPR 22:2002 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is available in several different frequency band ranges that comply with ETSI, FCC and IC regulations. The RADWIN 1000 RW-1020-0150 / RADWIN 2000 RW-2020-0150 is avail-
able only in the 2.4GHz frequency band range that complies with FCC and IC regulations. The RADWIN 1000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 2000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 5000 3GHz Band support the 3.5 / 3.6 GHz frequency bands and comply with FCC and IC regulations. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 A-6 Wiring Specifications Appendix B ODU-IDU Cable The ODU-IDU cable is shielded/outdoor class CAT-5e, 4 twisted-pair 24 AWG terminated with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. A cable gland on the ODU side provides hermetic sealing. The following table shows the connector pinout:
Table B-1: ODU-IDU Connector Pinout Function Color IDU RJ-45 ODU RJ-45 Ethernet (RxN) White/Green Ethernet (RxT) Green Ethernet (TxT) White/Orange Ethernet (TxN) Orange Power (+) Power (+) Power () Power () Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown 1 twisted 2 pair 3 twisted 6 pair 4 twisted 5 pair 7 twisted 8 pair 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 User Port Connectors LAN Port The LAN 10/100BaseT interface terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in accordance to table B-2. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 B-1 LAN Port Appendix B Table B-2: Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Pin Signal Function 1 2 3 6 TD (+) TD () RD (+) RD () Transmit Data
(positive) Transmit Data
(negative) Receive Data
(positive) Receive Data
(negative) RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 B-2 IDU-C Alarm Connector Appendix B IDU-C Alarm Connector The IDU-C Alarm interface is a 25 pin D type female connector. Its pinout is listed in table B-3. Table B-3: IDU-C Alarm Connector (Dry-Contact) I/O Description Pin Input 1 Positive Input 1 Negative Input 2 Positive Input 2 Negative Input 3 Positive Input 3 Negative Input 4 Positive Input 4 Negative Output 1 Normally Open Output 1 Common Output 1 Normally Closed Output 2 Normally Open Output 2 Common Output 2 Normally Closed Output 3 Normally Open Output 3 Common Output 3 Normally Closed Output 4 Normally Open Output 4 Common Output 4 Normally Closed 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 The following diagram describes how to connect external input and output alarms. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 B-3 IDU-C Alarm Connector Appendix B Note Use an external current limit resistor to limit the current at the output relays to 1 Ampere. Such resistor is not required if the equipment connected to the IDU supports current limiting to 1 Amp. The voltage of the input alarm must be within the range of -10 to -50 VDC. Figure B-1: Example for connecting the alarm connector DC Power Terminal Table B-4: Terminal Block 3-pin -48VDC Function Pin
Right Chassis Center Left RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 B-4 Pole and Wall Installation Appendix C ODU Mounting Kit Contents Table C-1: Bill of Materials: ODU mounting kit Item Qty Large Clamp (see figure C-1) Small Clamp (see figure C-2) Arm (see figure C-3) Screw hex head M8x40 Screw hex head M8x70 Washer flat M8 Washer spring M8 M8 Nuts 1 1 1 4 2 4 3 2 Figure C-1: Large Clamp Figure C-2: Small Clamp Figure C-3: Arm RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 C-1 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a pole Appendix C Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a pole Figure C-4: Mounting on a pole RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 C-2 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a Wall Appendix C Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a Wall Figure C-5: Mounting on a Wall Mounting an External Antenna Optional external antennas can be mounted on a pole. The external mount-
ing kit varies according to the specific antenna. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 C-3 Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Overview The Link Budget Calculator is a utility for calculating the expected perfor-
mance of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless link and the possible con-
figurations for a specific link range. The utility allows you to calculate the expected RSS of the link, and find the type of services and their effective throughput as a function of the link range and deployment conditions. User Input You are required to enter or choose the following parameters. Depending on the product, some of the parameters have a default value that cannot be changed. Product (or Regulation and Band) Tx Power (maximum Tx power per modulation is validated) Channel Bandwidth (fixed to 20 MHz for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000) Antenna Type (cannot be changed for ODU with integrated antenna) Antenna Gain per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna) Cable Loss per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna) Required Fade Margin Rate (and Adaptive check box) Service Type (Ethernet Only for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 version 2.1) Required Range Link Budget Calculator Internal Data For each product (or Regulation and Band) the calculator stores the follow-
ing data required for link budget calculations:
Maximum Transmit power (per modulation) Receiver Sensitivity (per modulation) for Ethernet service and for TDM services at various BER RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-1 Calculations Appendix D Maximum linear input power (used to calculate minimum distance) Antenna gain and cable loss for ODU with integrated antenna Available Channel Bandwidths Calculations EIRP EIRP
TxPower AntennaGainSiteA CableLossSiteA
Expected RSS and Fade Margin ExpectedRSS
EIRP PathLoss AntennaGainSiteB CableLossSiteB where:
Site A is the transmitting site Site B is the receiving site PathLoss is calculated according to the free space model, PathLoss frequencyMHz 32.45 log 20 20
10 log RequiredRangeKm 10 ExpectedFadeM in where Sensitivity is dependent on air-rate. arg
Sensitivity ExpectedRSS Min and Max Range MinRange is the shortest range for which ExpectedRSS MaxInputPower MaxRange (with Adaptive checked) is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS ship is true. In a link with adaptive rate this will be the actual behavior. MaxRange (for a given air-rate) is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS Sensitivity RequiredFadeM in Sensitivity per air-rate. arg
, at the highest air-rate for which this relation-
. Service The Ethernet throughput is calculated according to internal product algo-
rithms. Availability The Service Availability calculation is based on the Vigants Barnett method which predicts the downtime probability based on a climate factor (C fac-
tor). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-2 Antenna Height Appendix D Availability 10 7 ExpectedFadeM in arg
6 10 10 Cfactor frequencyGHz RequiredRangeKM 3 Antenna Height The recommended antenna height required for line of sight is calculated as the sum the Fresnel zone height and the boresight height. See About the Fresnel Zone below. The Fresnel zone height is calculated as:
0.6 300 ExpectedRange
frequencyGHz
ExpectedRange
----------------------------------------- ExpectedRange
2 2 2 2 The boresight clearance height is calculated as:
R2 Maean
ExpectedRange
2 2 RMaean where RMean
6367.4425Km
. Running the Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is supplied on the RADWIN Manager CD. It may be run stand-alone from the CD or from the RADWIN Manager application. To run the Link Budget Calculator from the CD:
1. Insert the RADWIN Manager CD into the drive on the managing com-
puter. In the window which opens, click the Link Budget Calculator option. 2. If the CD autorun application does not start by itself, then point your browser to Z:\RADWIN\Setup\DATA\Link Budget Calculator.htm where Z should be replaced with your own CD drive name. To run the Link Budget Calculator from the RADWIN Manager:
Choose Help | Link Budget Calculator from the main menu of the RADWIN Manager as in the following figure:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-3 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-1: Accessing the Link Budget Calculator However invoked, your browser displays the following page:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-4 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-2: Link Budget Screen RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-5 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Microsoft Internet Explorer users may see a warning message like this:
Click the yellow bar and follow the instructions to allow blocked content. Note Mozilla FireFox and Google Chrome users may see a warning mes-
sage like this:
You may ignore it and continue. To use the Link Budget Calculator for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000:
1. Choose a product from the drop-down list (or choose a Regulation and Band):
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-6 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-3: Product selector 2. Enter the radio details. Note that Rate is chosen from a drop-down list:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-7 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Note Figure D-4: Rate selector The Rate shown, defines the air-interface rate in Mbps. The system operates in TDD mode and has the overhead of the air-interface pro-
toco.l Thus, the Ethernet actual throughput is provided by the Ethernet Rate. For a given air-rate, Ethernet throughput will decrease with increasing range due to propagation delay. The Fade margin is the minimum required for LOS conditions. For degraded link conditions, a larger Fade margin should be used. The EIRP is given in dBm and Watts. 3. If the required range between the two link sites is known, you may enter it directly. Alternatively, you may enter the latitude and longitude of each site in the link, in which case the distance between them will be calcu-
lated and displayed. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-8 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-5: Calculation of distance from site coordinates RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-9 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D 4. Located to the right of the green Coordinates button is a dropdown list of Climactic C Factor values. Figure D-6: Climactic C Factors For help about what these mean, click the ? button to the right of the list in figure D-6. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-10 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-7: Climactic C Factor description In figure D-8 we display a map of the world showing C Factor contours:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-11 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-8: World map showing C Factor contours 5. Click Calculate to obtain the required performance estimate. Placing the cursor in any other calculated field will also update the calculated results. Note The Expected Performance parameters are calculated and displayed:
Expected RSS - the expected RSS that the RADWIN Manager shows when the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODUs are optimally aligned Ethernet Rate - maximum throughput available for the chosen parameter combination Antenna height for LOS the minimum antenna height required for line-of-sight operation. It is the sum of the height required for boresight clearance due to the earths curvature plus the height required to clear the Fresnel zone If the expected performance is not suitable for your application, try different parameters and repeat the calculation. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-12 About the Fresnel Zone Appendix D About the Fresnel Zone The Fresnel zone (pronounced "frA-nel", with a silent s) is an elliptically shaped conical zone of electromagnetic energy that propagates from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. It is always widest in the middle of the path between the two antennas. Figure D-9: Fresnel zone Fresnel loss is the path loss occurring from multi-path reflections from reflective surfaces such as water, and intervening obstacles such as build-
ings or mountain peaks within the Fresnel zone. Radio links should be designed to accommodate obstructions and atmo-
spheric conditions, weather conditions, large bodies of water, and other reflectors and absorbers of electromagnetic energy. The Fresnel zone provides us with a way to calculate the amount of clear-
ance that a wireless wave needs from an obstacle to ensure that the obsta-
cle does not attenuate the signal. There are infinitely many Fresnel zones located coaxially around the center of the direct wave. The outer boundary of the first Fresnel zone is defined as the combined path length of all paths, which are half wavelength (1/2 ) of the frequency transmitted longer than the direct path. If the total path distance is one wavelength (1 ) longer than the direct path, then the outer boundary is said to be two Fresnel zones. Odd number Fresnel zones rein-
force the direct wave path signal; even number Fresnel zones cancel the direct wave path signal. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-13 About the Fresnel Zone Appendix D The amount of the Fresnel zone clearance is determined by the wavelength of the signal, the path length, and the distance to the obstacle. For reliabil-
ity, point-to-point links are designed to have at least 60% of the first Fresnel zone clear to avoid significant attenuation. The concept of the Fresnel zone is shown in figure D-9 above. The top of the obstruction does not extend far into the Fresnel zone, leaving 60% of the Fresnel zone clear; therefore, the signal is not significantly attenuated. For more about Fresnel zone, see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
Fresnel_zone. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 D-14 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Appendix E Meticulous implementation of the guidelines in this appendix will provide best protection against electric shock and lightning. 100% protection is neither implied nor possible. Warning Note This appendix is at best a guide. The actual degree of lightning protection required depends on local conditions and regulations. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Lightning protection system consists of the following components:
Grounding for the antenna coax cable Grounding for each IDU and ODU External Primary Surge Suppressor units and grounding for the out-
door cable Internal ESD protection circuits over the Power/Telecom lines Grounding for Antenna Cable A Grounding Kit must be connected to the coax antenna cable and reliably grounded as shown in Figure X. The grounding kit is an Andrew Type 223158-2 (www.andrew.com). See figure E-1 below. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-1 Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units Appendix E Figure E-1: Grounding antenna cables Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units ODU Grounding RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 uses a Shielded CAT-5e cable to interconnect the Outdoor (ODU) and Indoor (IDU) units. However, this shielding does not provide a good Lightning Discharge path, since it can not tolerate the high Lightning Current surges. To provide an alternate Lightning Discharge path, the ODU and antenna grounding posts should be connected to ground point by a 10 AWG short copper wire. The device should be permanently connected to ground. IDU Grounding The IDUs grounding post should be connected to the internal ground point, using a grounding wire of at least 10 AWG. The grounding wire should be connected to a grounding rod or the building grounding system. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E The device should be permanently connected to ground. External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding A Grounding Kit and Surge Arrestor Unit must be located near the ODU and properly grounded as illustrated in figure E-2 and figure E-3 below:
Figure E-2: Grounding a typical pole installation RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-3 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E Figure E-3: Grounding a typical wall installation The next figure shows a close-up of the rear of grounded ODU:
Figure E-4: ODU Surge Suppressor and grounding RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-4 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E The Transtector protection circuits shown in figure E-5 below, utilize silicon avalanche diode technology. The unit consists of an outdoor rated NEMA 3R type enclosure with easy mounting flanges, ground stud attachment and easy wiring. The ALPU-POE features RJ-45 protection circuits for the ODU-IDU data pairs
(pins 1,2 & 3,6) and DC power (pins 4,5 & 6,7 with the pairs bonded). The unit is designed to be wall mounted. An optional set of bracket is avail-
able to allow a wide range of pole mount applications. A dedicated ground stud is provided inside the unit that must be bonded to the nearest ground-
ing system (or Master Ground bar) for proper surge protection. The system wiring is installed with RJ-45 type connectors that can feed directly into the chassis without having to cut, splice or route through awk-
ward strain relief holes. Figure E-5: Transtectors Surge Suppressor To mount the lightning protection devices:
1. Mount the device as close to the ODU as possible. Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom (to prevent water from penetrat-
ing), with the strain reliefs facing the ground. 2. Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit. 3. Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes. 4. Connect the ODU-IDU cable using the RJ-45 jack. 5. Connect one cable between the ODU and the suppressor using an RJ-45 jack. 6. Connect the suppressors ground stud to a grounding point. Use the appropriate wire gauge and type, keeping the wire as short as possible, less than 1m (3), between the stud and the site grounding point. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-5 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E 7. Replace the cover. There may also be regulatory requirements to cross bond the ODU-IDU CAT-
5e cable at regular intervals up the mast. This may be as frequent as every 10 meters (33 feet). Note A second Surge Arrestor Unit should be mounted at the building entry point and must be grounded, as shown in figure E-3 above. To mount the lightning protection at the building entry point:
1. Mount the device outside the building, located as near as possible to the entrance of the CAT-5e ODU-IDU cable. Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom (to prevent water from penetrating), with the strain reliefs facing the ground. 2. Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit. 3. Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes. 4. Connect the ODU-IDU cable using the RJ-45 jack. 5. Connect one cable between the IDU and the suppressor using an RJ-45 jack. 6. Connect the suppressors ground stud to a grounding point. Use the appropriate wire gauge and type, keeping the wire as short as possible, less than 1m (3), between the stud and the site grounding point. 7. Replace the cover RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-6 Internal ESD Protection circuits Appendix E Figure E-6: Surge Suppressor and grounding at building entry point Internal ESD Protection circuits RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is designed to meet the ETSI/FCC/Aus/NZ/CSA EMC and Safety requirements. To fulfill these requirements, the system's Telecom lines at the ODU/IDU are Transformer-isolated and include internal ESD (Electro-Static-Discharge) Protection circuits. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 E-7 Appendix F FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Links: Background The FCC/IC regulation for 5.4/5.3 GHz allows unlicensed wireless data equipment, provided that it does not interrupt radar services. If radar activ-
ity is detected, the equipment must automatically change frequency chan-
nel. This feature is termed Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). According to the standard, a channel with active radar is prohibited from use for 30 minutes. Before using a channel for transmission, the radio equipment must probe it for radar signals for a period of 60 seconds. The FCC/IC regulations for 5.4 GHz band requires the frequency range 5600 5650 MHz to be banned from use. The FCC regulation for 5.4 GHz band requires that within 35 km radius from any (Terminal Doppler Weather Radars) TDWR location the frequency range 5570 5680 MHz shall be banned from use. Note Follow the instructions in the last section of this chapter. RADWIN radio products support DFS as well as ACS. An immediate consequence of the FCC/IC regulation for 5.4/5.3 GHz is that the standard method of link installation using a single default fixed installa-
tion channel, cannot be used. Instead of the installation procedure of Chapter 4, a link activation method is used. The ODUs do not transmit until they are both configured and in place. An activation button may be found by navigating to Site:Location|Air Interface. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-1 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Appendix F The ODUs are either supplied from the factory ready for use at 5.4 GHz or 5.3 GHz FCC/IC or alternatively, they can be set up for these bands using the RADWIN Manager. The following procedure is generic to all relevant RADWIN radio products. What you see on your running RADWIN Manager may differ in some details from the screen captures used to illustrate this chapter. Note FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation To Activate a FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link:
1. Install RADWIN Manager software as usual. 2. Connect the PC to the IDU-ODU pair to be used as the local site. 3. Run the RADWIN Manager and log in as Installer. You will see the follow-
ing window:
Figure F-1: Activating an ODU - Inactive link When the Manager Main Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta-
tus label red and showing Inactive. 4. Click Site:Location | Air Interface for the logged in site. 5. The Air Interface dialog box opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-2 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Appendix F Figure F-2: Air Interface dialog box 6. Enter the Link ID and note it for use with the second site of the link. 7. Check the Master radio button. 8. Click OK. The following window appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-3 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Appendix F Figure F-3: The local ODU after activation - Probing Notice that the Link ID is shown in the Link details pane (circled). 9. Repeat the above procedure for the remote ODU, ensuring that in the Air Interface window, that you enter exactly the same Link ID, but this time that you check the Slave radio button. If both ODUs are powered up, after a minute or so a link will be estab-
lished. If you are still connected to the remote site (from the previous steps), the window of figure F-3 will look like this:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-4 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Appendix F Figure F-4: Both sites activated and awaiting configuration FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration The Configuration procedure may be carried out from either site using the Configuration wizard as shown in Chapter 5. Both sites in a FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link must be configured identically. Note The only difference is in the Channel Settings window:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-5 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Appendix F Figure F-5: Channel Select dialog box - ACS permanently enabled ACS cannot be disabled. Note Upon completion of the wizard, the Site configuration dialogs can be used in the usual way. Once operational, the RADWIN Manager window is the same as for other radio equipment models. Here is the RADWIN Manager main window upon completion of the wizard:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-6 FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration Appendix F Figure F-6: FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz operational FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration The FCC requires that devices installed within 35 km of any TDWR location should be registered in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database. The FCC has published a TDWR Location Information table that lists the exact location of all TDWR towers (see table F-1 at the end of the chap-
ter). 1. When installing a 5.4 GHz device define your exact location (latitude and longitude) 2. Use the TDWR Location Information table to determine if the distance between the device and any TDWR tower is less than 35 km. 3. If the distance is less than 35 km then register the device in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database (following section) 4. Disable the frequencies between 5570 5680 MHz from the available channels list. 5. The frequency range between 5.600 to 5.650 GHz is not included in the available channels list. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-7 Registering the Device Appendix F Registering the Device To register a device:
1. Enter the website http://www.spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx and follow the instructions. At your first entry into the site, you will be required to register as a user:
2. Click the User Registration button to enter the registration page. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-8 Registering the Device Appendix F 3. Fill in the registration page and click Register. 4. To complete device registration enter the Register Device tab as shown:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-9 Registering the Device Appendix F You are offered this:
5. Fill in the required information in the preceding web page and click the Register Device button. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-10 TDWR Table TDWR Table Appendix F The following table contains the latitude and longitude locations of Terminal Doppler Weather Radars (TDWR). Use this table to determine if the Master or Client device installed is within 35 km radius of a TDWR location. If one of the installed devices is within 35 km radius of any TDWR location then disable all frequencies between 5570 5680 MHz from the available chan-
nels list. Table F-1: Latitude and longitude locations of TDWRs STATE CITY LONGITUDE LATITUDE FREQUENCY TERRAIN ELEVATION
(MSL) [ft]
ANTENNA HEIGHT ABOVE TERRAIN
[ft]
AZ CO FL FL FL FL FL GA IL IL IN KS KY KY LA MA MD MD MD MI MN MO MO MS NC NC NJ NJ PHOENIX DENVER W 112 09 46 N 33 25 14 5610 MHz 1024 W 104 31 35 N 39 43 39 5615 MHz 5643 FT LAUDERDALE W 080 20 39 N 26 08 36 5645 MHz MIAMI ORLANDO TAMPA W 080 29 28 N 25 45 27 5605 MHz W 081 19 33 N 28 20 37 5640 MHz W 082 31 04 N 27 51 35 5620 MHz WEST PALM BEACH W 080 16 23 N 26 41 17 5615 MHz ATLANTA MCCOOK W 084 15 44 N 33 38 48 5615 MHz W 087 51 31 N 41 47 50 5615 MHz CRESTWOOD W 087 43 47 N 41 39 05 5645 MHz INDIANAPOLIS W 086 26 08 N 39 38 14 5605 MHz 7 10 72 14 20 962 646 663 751 WICHITA W 097 26 13 N 37 30 26 5603 MHz 1270 COVINGTON CINCINNATI W 084 34 48 N 38 53 53 5610 MHz LOUISVILLE W 085 36 38 N 38 02 45 5646 MHz 942 617 NEW ORLEANS W 090 24 11 N 30 01 18 5645 MHz 2 BOSTON W 070 56 01 N 42 09 30 5610 MHz BRANDYWINE W 076 50 42 N 38 41 43 5635 MHz BENFIELD CLINTON DETROIT W 076 37 48 N 39 05 23 5645 MHz W 076 57 43 N 38 45 32 5615 MHz W 083 30 54 N 42 06 40 5615 MHz 151 233 184 249 656 MINNEAPOLIS W 092 55 58 N 44 52 17 5610 MHz 1040 KANSAS CITY SAINT LOUIS W 094 44 31 N 39 29 55 5605 MHz 1040 W 090 29 21 N 38 48 20 5610 MHz DESOTO COUNTY W 089 59 33 N 34 53 45 5610 MHz CHARLOTTE W 080 53 06 N 35 20 14 5608 MHz RALEIGH DURHAM W 078 41 50 N 36 00 07 5647 MHz WOODBRIDGE PENNSAUKEN W 074 16 13 N 40 35 37 5620 MHz W 075 04 12 N 39 56 57 5610 MHz 551 371 757 400 19 39 64 64 113 113 97 80 113 113 97 113 97 80 97 113 97 113 113 113 97 113 80 64 97 113 113 113 113 113 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-11 TDWR Table Appendix F Table F-1: Latitude and longitude locations of TDWRs (Continued) STATE CITY LONGITUDE LATITUDE FREQUENCY TERRAIN ELEVATION
(MSL) [ft]
ANTENNA HEIGHT ABOVE TERRAIN
[ft]
NV NY OH OH OH OK OK OK OK PA PR TN TX TX TX TX UT VA WI LAS VEGAS W 115 00 26 N 36 08 37 5645 MHz 1995 FLOYD BENNETT FIELD W 073 52 49 N 40 35 20 5647 MHz 8 DAYTON CLEVELAND COLUMBUS W 084 07 23 N 40 01 19 5640 MHz W 082 00 28 N 41 17 23 5645 MHz 922 817 W 082 42 55 N 40 00 20 5605 MHz 1037 AERO. CTR TDWR #1 W 097 37 31 N 35 24 19 5610 MHz 1285 AERO. CTR TDWR #2 W 097 37 43 N 35 23 34 5620 MHz 1293 TULSA W 095 49 34 N 36 04 14 5605 MHz 712 OKLAHOMA CITY W 097 30 36 N 35 16 34 5603 MHz 1195 HANOVER SAN JUAN NASHVILLE W 080 29 10 N 40 30 05 5615 MHz 1266 W 066 10 46 N 18 28 26 5610 MHz W 086 39 42 N 35 58 47 5605 MHz HOUSTON INTERCONTL W 095 34 01 N 30 03 54 5605 MHz PEARLAND W 095 14 30 N 29 30 59 5645 MHz DALLAS LOVE FIELD W 096 58 06 N 32 55 33 5608 MHz LEWISVILLE DFW W 096 55 05 N 33 03 53 5640 MHz SALT LAKE CITY W 111 55 47 N 40 58 02 5610 MHz 4219 LEESBURG MILWAUKEE W 077 31 46 N 39 05 02 5605 MHz W 088 02 47 N 42 49 10 5603 MHz 361 820 59 722 154 36 541 554 64 97 97 113 113 80 97 113 64 113 113 97 97 80 80 31 80 113 113 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 F-12 Appendix G MIB Reference Introduction About the MIB The RADWIN MIB is a set of APIs that enables external applications to con-
trol RADWIN equipment. The MIB is divided into public and a private API groups:
Public: RFC-1213 (MIB II) variables, RFC-1214 (MIB II) System and Interfaces sections Private: Controlled by RADWIN and supplements the public group. This appendix describes the public and private MIB used by RADWIN. Terminology The following terms are used in this appendix. Term Meaning MIB API Management Information Base Application Programming Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol In addition, the MIB uses internally, the older notions of Local site and Remote site where this manual would use site A and site B. To avoid burdening the reader, this appendix will follow the MIB usage. Interface API Control Method The RADWIN Manager application provides all the means to configure and monitor a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link, communicating with the SNMP agent in each ODU. Each SNMP agent contains data on each of the IDUs RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-1 Community String Appendix G and ODUs in the link. Both agents communicate with each other over the air using a proprietary protocol. Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single IP address. Note To control and configure the device using the MIB, you should adhere to the following rules:
The connection for control and configuration is to the local site, over any SNMP/UDP/IP network. All Parameters should be consistent between both of the ODUs. Note that inconsistency of air parameters can break the air connection. To correct air parameters inconsistency you must reconfigure each of the ODUs. Common practice is to configure the remote site first and then to configure the local site. For some of the configuration parameters additional action must be taken before the new value is loaded. Please refer to the operation in the parameters description. Some of the MIB parameters values are product dependent. It is strongly recommend using the RADWIN Manager Application for changing these values. Setting wrong values may cause indetermi-
nate results. Community String To control a link, all SNMP requests should go to the local site IP address. The RADWIN Manager uses the Read Community strings public for the local ODU and public-remote for the remote ODU. It uses Write Commu-
nity strings netman for the local ODU and netman-remote for the remote ODU. These are the factory defaults. Private MIB Structure The sections in the private RADWIN MIB and its location in the MIB tree are shown in figure G-1 below:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-2 Private MIB Structure Appendix G Figure G-1: Top Level Sections of the private MIB The products MIB section contains the definition of the Object IDs for the two form factors of the ODU, Integrated Antenna and Connectorized
(referred in the MIB as external antenna):
The ODU MIB contains the sections: Admin, Service, Ethernet, Bridge, Air, PerfMon and Agent. The IDU MIB contains the sections: Admin, Service, Ethernet, Bridge and TDM. The general MIB include a single generic parameter that is used by all traps as a trap description parameter. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-3 MIB Parameters MIB Parameters Appendix G The following section describes all of the MIB parameters. The MIB parame-
ters follow the following naming convention:
<winlink1000><Section 1>...<Section n><Parameter Name>
For each of the configuration and control parameters (parameters with read-write access), the Description column describes when the new value is effective. It is recommended that you perform the appropriate action to make the values affective immediately after any change. Where a change is required on both sides of the link, it is recommended that you change both sides of the link first and then perform the action. Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Table G-1: Supported RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 1 of 2) Name OID Type ifIndex ifDescr ifType ifSpeed
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.xa Integer
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 DisplayString
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5 Integer Gauge ifPhysAddress
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6 Phys-Address ifAdminStatus
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 ifOperStatus
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInNUcastPkts
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.x
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.x
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.x Integer Integer Counter Counter Counter Description A c c e s s RO A unique value for each interface.Its value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber.The value for each interface must remain constant at least from one re-initialization of the entity's network management system to the next re-initialization. RO A textual string containing information about the interface.This string should include the name of the manufacturer, the product name and the version of the hardware interface. RO The type of interface, distinguished according to the physical/link protocol(s) immediately `below'
the network layer in the protocol stack. RO An estimate of the interface's current bandwidth in bits per second.For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for those where no accurate estimation can be made, this object should ontain the nominal bandwidth. RO The interface's address at the protocol layer immediately `below' the network layer in the protocol stack. For interfaces which do not have such an address (e.g., a serial line), this object should contain an octet string of zero length. RW The desired state of the interface. The testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. RO The current operational state of the interface. The testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. RO The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. RO The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol. RO The number of non-unicast (i.e., subnetwork-
broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-4 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-1: Supported RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 2 of 2) Name OID Type ifInErrors
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.x Counter ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.x
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.x Counter Counter ifOutNUcastPkts
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.x Counter a. x is the interface ID MIB Parameters Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 1 of 14) Name OID winlink1000OduAdmProductType winlink1000OduAdmHwRev winlink1000OduAdmSwRev winlink1000OduAdmLinkName winlink1000OduAdmResetCmd 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.4 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.5 Type DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString Integer winlink1000OduAdmAddres 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.6 IpAddress winlink1000OduAdmMask 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.7 IpAddress winlink1000OduAdmGateway 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.8 IpAddress winlink1000OduAdmBroadcast 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.10 Integer winlink1000OduAdmHostsTable winlink1000OduAdmHostsEntry winlink1000OduAdmHostsIndex winlink1000OduAdmHostsIp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.2 IpAddress Description A c c e s s RO The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. RO The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. RO The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent. RO The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a non-
unicast (i.e., a subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address, including those that were discarded or not sent. Description A c c e s s RO ODU configuration description. RO ODU Hardware Version. RO ODU Software Version. RW Link Name. A change is effective immediately. RW Reset Command. A set command with a value of 3 will cause a device reset. The read value is always 0. RW ODU IP address. A change is effective after reset. The parameter is kept for backward compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is recommended. RW ODU Subnet Mask. A change is effective after reset. The parameter is kept for backward compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is recommended. RW ODU default gateway. A change is effective after reset. The parameter is kept for backward compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is recommended. RW This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. N/A Trap destinations table. Each trap destination is defined by an IP address and a UDP port. Up to 10 addresses can be configured. N/A Trap destinations table entry. RO Trap destinations table index. RW Trap destination IP address. A change is effective immediately. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-5 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 2 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAdmHostsPort 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.3 Integer winlink1000OduBuzzerAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.13 Integer winlink1000OduProductId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.14 DisplayString winlink1000OduReadCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.15 DisplayString winlink1000OduReadWriteCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.16 DisplayString winlink1000OduTrapCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.17 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentVersion winlink1000OduAdmRemoteSiteName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.18 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.19 Integer DisplayString Description A c c e s s RW UDP port of the trap destination. A change is effective immediately. RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer while the unit is in install mode. A change is effective immediately. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabled (1). RO This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. RW Read Community String. This parameter always returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Read Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RW Read/Write Community String. This parameter always returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Read/Write Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RW Trap Community String. This parameter is used by the Manager application to change the Trap Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RO Major version of the SNMP agent. RO Remote site name. Returns the same value as sysLocation parameter of the remote site. 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.20 Integer RO Minor version of the SNMP agent. winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentMinorVe rsion winlink1000OduAdmLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.21 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmSiteLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.22 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmDefaultPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.23 Integer winlink1000OduAdmConnectionType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.24 Integer winlink1000OduAdmBackToFactorySetti ngsCmd winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.25 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.26 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmVlanID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.27 Integer winlink1000OduAdmVlanPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.28 Integer winlink1000OduAdmSN winlink1000OduSrvMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.29 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.1 DisplayString Integer RW Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Link Password. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RW Site Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Link Password of the site. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RO This parameter indicates if the current Link Password is the default password. RO This parameter indicates if the Manager application is connected to the local ODU or to the remote ODU over the air. A value of 'unknown'
indicates community string mismatch. RW Back to factory settings Command. A change is effective after reset. The read value is always 0. RW ODU IP address Configuration. The format is:
<IP_Address>|<Subnet_Mask>|<Default_Gatewa y>|
RW VLAN ID. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. RW VLAN Priority. 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest priority. RO IDU Serial Number RW System mode. The only value that can be set is installMode; normalMode reserved to the Manager application provided with the product. A change is effective after link re-synchronization. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-6 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 3 of 14) Name OID winlink1000OduSrvBridging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.1 Type Integer Integer winlink1000OduEthernetRemainingRate winlink1000OduEthernetIfTable winlink1000OduEthernetIfEntry winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex winlink1000OduEthernetIfAddress winlink1000OduEthernetIfAdminStatus winlink1000OduEthernetIfOperStatus winlink1000OduEthernetIfFailAction winlink1000OduEthernetNumOfPorts winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortTable winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortEntry winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortIndex winlink1000OduBridgeBaseIfIndex winlink1000OduBridgeTpMode winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortTable winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortEntry winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortIndex winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInFrames winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutFrames winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInBytes winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutBytes winlink1000OduAirFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.6 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.7 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.8 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.3 Integer DisplayString Integer Integer Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.101 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.3 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.4 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.10 Counter 1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.10 2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.1 Counter Integer winlink1000OduAirDesiredRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer winlink1000OduAirSSID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.3 DisplayString winlink1000OduAirTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer winlink1000OduAirSesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 winlink1000OduAirMstrSlv 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirResync 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.8 Integer winlink1000OduAirRxPower winlink1000OduAirTotalFrames winlink1000OduAirBadFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.3 Integer Counter Counter winlink1000OduAirCurrentRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.4 Integer Description A c c e s s RO Bridging Mode. Valid values are: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps. N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table. N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry. RO ODU Ethernet Interface Index. RO ODU MAC address. RW Required state of the interface. RO Current operational state of the interface. RW Failure action of the interface. RO Number of ODU network interfaces. N/A ODU Bridge Ports table. N/A ODU Bridge Ports table entry. RO ODU Bridge Port Number. RO IfIndex corresponding to ODU Bridge port. RW ODU bridge mode. A change is effective after reset. Valid values: hubMode (0) bridgeMode (1). N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table. N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table entry. RO ODU Transparent Bridge Port Number. RO Number of frames received by this port. RO Number of frames transmitted by this port. RO Number of bytes received by this port. RO Number of bytes transmitted by this port. RW Installation Center Frequency. Valid values are product dependent. A change is effective after link re-synchronization. RW Deprecated parameter actual behavior is read-
only. Required Air Rate. For Channel Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively. RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. RW Required Transmit power in dBm . This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. The min and max values are product specific. A change is effective immediately. RO Current Link State. The value is active (3) during normal operation. RO This parameter indicates if the device was automatically selected into the radio link master or slave. The value is undefined if there is no link. RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to restart the synchronization process. RO Received Signal Strength in dBm. RO Total Number of received radio frames. RO Total number of received radio frames with CRC error. RO Deprecated parameter. Actual rate of the air interface in Mbps. For Channel Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-7 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 4 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAirCurrentRateIdx winlink1000OduAirTxPower36 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.10 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirTxPower48 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.11 Integer winlink1000OduAirCurrentTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.12 Integer winlink1000OduAirMinFrequency winlink1000OduAirMaxFrequency winlink1000OduAirFreqResolution 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.13 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.14 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.15 Integer Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirCurrentFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.16 Integer winlink1000OduAirNumberOfChannels winlink1000OduAirChannelsTable winlink1000OduAirChannelsEntry winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex winlink1000OduAirChannelsFrequency winlink1000OduAirChannelsOperState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.17 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.3 Integer Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirChannelsAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.4 Integer winlink1000OduAirDfsState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.19 Integer winlink1000OduAirAutoChannelSelection State 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.20 Integer winlink1000OduAirEnableTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.21 Integer winlink1000OduAirMinTxPower winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerTable winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerEntry winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerIndex winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPower winlink1000OduAirChannelBandwidth winlink1000OduAirChannelBWTable winlink1000OduAirChannelBWEntry winlink1000OduAirChannelBWIndex winlink1000OduAirChannelBWAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.22 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.24 Integer Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.2 Integer Integer Description A c c e s s RO Index of current air rate. RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only. RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only. RO Current Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. RO Minimum center frequency in MHz. RO Maximum center frequency in MHz. RO Center Frequency resolution. Measured in MHz if value < 100 otherwise in KHz. RO Current Center Frequency. Measured in MHz if center frequency resolution value < 100 otherwise in KHz. RO Number of channels that can be used. N/A Table of channels used by automatic channels selection (ACS). N/A ACS channels table entry. RO Channel Index. RO Channel frequency in MHz. RW Channel state. Can be set by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. A change is effective after link re-synchronization. Valid values: disabled
(0) enabled (1). RO Channel state. Product specific and cannot be changed by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Radar detection state. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Deprecated parameter. Indicating Automatic Channel Selection availability at current channel bandwidth. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Indicating Transmit power configuration enabled or disabled. RO Minimum Transmit power in dBm. N/A Table of Maximum transmit power per air rate in dBm. N/A Maximum Transmit power table entry. RO Air interface rate index. RO Maximum Transmit power in dBm. RW Channel bandwidth in KHz. A change is effective after reset. N/A Channel Bandwidths table. N/A Channel Bandwidth table entry. RO Channel Bandwidth index. RO Channel Bandwidth availability product specific. Options are: Not supported supported with manual channel selection supported with Automatic Channel Selection. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-8 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 5 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAirRFD winlink1000OduAirRatesTable winlink1000OduAirRatesEntry winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex winlink1000OduAirRatesAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.26 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.27.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.27.1.2 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirDesiredRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.28 Integer winlink1000OduAirLinkDistance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.29 Integer winlink1000OduAirLinkWorkingMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.30 Integer winlink1000OduAirMajorLinkIfVersion winlink1000OduAirMinorLinkIfVersion winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredOpState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.31 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.32 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.1 winlink1000OduAirHssCurrentOpState winlink1000OduAirHssSyncStatus winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.4 winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseType winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredExtPulseT ype 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.6 Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTable winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEntry winlink1000OduAirHssRfpIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelB W5MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.2 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelB W5MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.3 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelB W10MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.4 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelB W10MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.5 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelB W20MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.6 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelB W20MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.7 Integer Description A c c e s s RO Current radio frame duration in microseconds. N/A Air Rate indexes table for current channel bandwidth. N/A Air Rate indexes table entry. RO Air Rate index. RO Air Rate availability depending on air interface conditions. RW Required Air Rate index. 0 reserved for Adaptive Rate. A change is effective immediately after Set operation to the master side while the link is up. RO Link distance in meters. A value of -1 indicates an illegal value and is also used when a link is not established. RO Link working mode as a result of comparing versions of both sides of the link. Possible modes are: Unknown - no link Normal - versions on both sides are identical with full compatibility with restricted compatibility or versions on both sides are different with software upgrade or versions incompatibility. RO Major link interface version RO Minor link interface version RW Required Hub Site Synchronization operating state. RO Current Hub Site Synchronization operating state. RO Hub Site Synchronization sync status. RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse detection status. RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse type. RW Hub Site Synchronization required external pulse type. Valid values for read write: {typeA(2) typeB(3) typeC(4) typeD(5)}. Valid value for read only: {notApplicable(1)}. N/A ODU Radio Frame Patterns (RFP) Table. N/A ODU RFP Table entry. RO ODU RFP Table index. The index represent the Radio Frame Pattern: typeA(2) typeB(3) typeC(4) typeD(5). RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-9 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 6 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAirLockRemote 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.41 Integer winlink1000OduAirAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.42 Integer winlink1000OduAirFeederLoss 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.43 Integer winlink1000OduAirMaxAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.44 Integer winlink1000OduAirMinAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.45 Integer winlink1000OduAirMaxEIRP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.46 Integer winlink1000OduAirAntennaGainConfigSu pport winlink1000OduAirAntennaType winlink1000OduAirRssBalance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.47 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.48 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.49 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirTotalTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.50 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrUAS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.1 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.2 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrSES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.3 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrBBE 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.4 Gauge 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.5 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrIntegrity winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalTable winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalUAS winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalES winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalSES winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalBBE winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIntegrity Description A c c e s s RW This parameter enables locking the link with a specific ODU. The following values can be set:
Unlock (default) - The ODU is not locked on a specific remote ODU. Unlock can only be performed when the link is not connected. Lock -
The ODU is locked on a specific remote ODU. Lock can only be performed when the link is active. RW Current Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. User defined value in case of external antenna. Legal range:
MinAntennaGain<AntennaGain<MaxAntennaGain
. RW Current Feeder Loss in 0.1 dBm resolution. User defined value in case of external antenna. RO Maximum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. RO Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. RO Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in 0.1 dBm resolution. RO Antenna Gain Configurability options are product specific: supported not supported. RW External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar. RO RSS balance. Relation between RSS in radio 1 and RSS in radio 2. RO Total Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal value While the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current number of Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current number of Background Block Errors starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Indicates the integrity of the entry. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval. RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval. RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval. RO Current number of Background Block Errors per interval. RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-10 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 7 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduPerfMonDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonDayUAS winlink1000OduPerfMonDayES winlink1000OduPerfMonDaySES winlink1000OduPerfMonDayBBE winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIntegrity winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.2 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThre sh1Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.3 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThre sh2Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.4 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.5 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.6 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTSLThre sh1Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.7 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrBBERThr esh1Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.8 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTable winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinRS L winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxR SL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLT hresh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLT hresh2Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinTS L Description A c c e s s N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 24 hours and the oldest is 30. RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval of 24 hours. RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours. RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours. RO Current number of Background Block Errors per interval of 24 hours. RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24 hours. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RO Current Min Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current Max Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold in the last 15 minutes. RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes. RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold in the last 15 minutes. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current Min Received Level Reference per interval. RO Current Max Received Level Reference per interval. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold per interval. Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold ACCESS read-only per interval. RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-11 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 8 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxT SL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTSLTh resh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalBBER Thresh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinRSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxRSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThres h1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThres h2Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTSLThres h1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayBBERThr esh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrRxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTable winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalRxMB ytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTxMB ytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayRxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.1 Gauge 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.2 Gauge Description A c c e s s RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval. RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval. RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current Min Received Level Reference per Day. RO Current Max Received Level Reference per Day. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold per Day. RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per Day. RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per Day. RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold per Day. RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per Day. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RO Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current RX Mega Bytes per interval. RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day. RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-12 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 9 of 14) Name OID Type Description A c c e s s winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrActiveS econds winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalTabl e winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalEntr y winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalActiv eSeconds winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayActiveS econds winlink1000OduPerfMonTxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.20 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.21 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.22 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonBBERThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.23 Integer winlink1000OduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeServerI P winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeOffsetFr omUTC 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.1 IpAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.2 Integer RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active. Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active. Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active. Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active. RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring TSL1 counter is incremented. RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL1 counter is incremented. RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL2 counter is incremented. RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring BBER counter is incremented. The units are 1/10 of a percent. RW If 'yes' is chosen the ifIndex Unit Severity Time_T and Alarm Id from the winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind to the end of each private trap. RW IP address of the server from which the current time is loaded. RW Offset from Coordinated Universal Time (minutes). Possible values: -1440..1440. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-13 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 10 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAgnRealTimeAndDate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.3 OctetString winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmLastChang e 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.1 Integer winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmEntry winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmSeverity winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmId winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmIfIndex winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmUnit winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTrapID winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTimeT winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmText winlink1000IduAdmProductType winlink1000IduAdmHwRev winlink1000IduAdmSwRev winlink1000OduAdmNumOfExternalAlar mIn winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInTable winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.4 DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString Integer Description A c c e s s RW This parameter specifies the real time and date Format 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'
(Hexadecimal). A date-time specification:
field octets contents range
1 1-2 year 0..65536 2 3 month 1..12 3 4 day 1.. 31 4 5 hour 0..23 5 6 minutes 0..59 6 7 seconds 0..60
(use 60 for leap-second) 7 8 deci-seconds 0..9 For example Tuesday May 26 1992 at 1:30:15 PM EDT would be displayed as:
07 c8 05 1a 0d 1e 0f 00
( 1992 -5 -26 13:30:15 ) RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each change in the winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable (either an addition or removal of an entry). N/A This table includes the currently active alarms. When a RAISED trap is sent an alarm entry is added to the table. When a CLEAR trap is sent the entry is removed. N/A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED trap. RO A running counter of active alarms. The counter is incremented for every new RAISED trap. It is cleared after a device reset. RO Current Alarm severity. RO Unique Alarm Identifier (combines alarm type and interface). The same AlarmId is used for RAISED and CLEARED alarms. RO Interface Index where the alarm occurred. Alarms that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value: 65535. RO Unit associated with the alarm. RO ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm was raised. RO Timestamp of this alarm. This number is in seconds from Midnight January 1st 1970. RO Alarm display text (same as the text in the sent trap). RO IDU configuration description. RO IDU Hardware Revision. RO IDU Software Revision. RO Indicates the number of currently available External Alarm Inputs. N/A This is the External Alarm Inputs table. N/A Entry containing the elements of a single External Alarm Input. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-14 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 11 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.2 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInAdmin State winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.4 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.3 Integer Integer winlink1000IduAdmSN winlink1000IduSrvDesiredTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.6 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.2 DisplayString Integer winlink1000IduSrvServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.4 ObjectID winlink1000IduSrvActiveTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.6 winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.8 Integer Integer winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesTable winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesEntry winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.2 winlink1000IduSrvPossibleTdmServices Integer Integer winlink1000IduSrvPossibleEthServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.3 Integer winlink1000IduSrvRemainingRate winlink1000IduSrvTrunkCost winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesTable winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesEntry winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesState winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMinRateI dx winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMaxRateI dx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.4 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.5 Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.1 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.3 Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.4 Integer Description A c c e s s RO This value indicates the index of the External Alarm Input entry. RW This field describes the External Alarm Input. It is an optional string of no more than 64 characters which will be used in the event being sent as a result of a change in the status of the External Alarm Input. DEFVAL {Alarm Description}
RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input is enabled or disabled. RO This value indicates the current status of the External Alarm Input. RO Idu Serial Number RW Required trunks bitmap. Note that the number of possible trunks that can be configured may vary based on the IDU hardware configuration the selected air interface rate and the range of the installation. The provided Manager application enables the user to select only available configurations. A change is effective immediately if applied to a master unit and the link is in service mode. RO This parameter is reserved to the Manager application provided with the product. RO A bitmap describing the currently open TDM trunks. RO A bitmap describing the number of TDM trunks that can be opened in the current configuration. The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration the air rate and the installation range. N/A IDU Possible Services table. N/A IDU Services table entry. RO Table index Rate index of the air interface. RO Deprecated parameter. A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate. RO Deprecated parameter. This parameter describes if the Ethernet Service can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps per air rate. RO Cost of the TDM Service in bps. N/A ODU Possible TDM Services table. N/A ODU TDM Services table entry. RO Table index. The index is the bit mask of the TDM service. RO Represents the TDM service availability. RO Minimum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible. RO Maximum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-15 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 12 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesReason 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.5 Integer winlink1000IduSrvEthActive winlink1000IduSrvEthAvailable winlink1000IduSrvEthThroughput 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.12 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.13 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.14 Integer Integer Gauge winlink1000IduSrvEthMaxInfoRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.15 Integer winlink1000IduEthernetIfTable winlink1000IduEthernetIfEntry winlink1000IduEthernetIfIndex winlink1000IduEthernetIfAddress winlink1000IduEthernetNumOfLanPorts winlink1000IduBridgeTpAging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.1.1.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.4.4.2 DisplayString Integer Integer winlink1000IduTdmTxClockAvailStates 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.1 Integer winlink1000IduTdmTxClockDesiredState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.2 Integer winlink1000IduTdmTxClockActualState winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAvailOpti ons 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.1 Integer Integer winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockDesired 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.2 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.3 Integer winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockActual winlink1000IduTdmConfigTable winlink1000IduTdmConfigEntry winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex winlink1000IduTdmIfIndex Description A c c e s s RO Information about the TDM Service availability. -
Not Applicable if the service is available. The reasons for TDM Service unavailability: - The available throughput isn't sufficient for Service demands; - The IDU HW doesn't support the service; - A Link Password mismatch was detected; - The external pulse type detected is improper for TDM services; - A Software versions mismatch was detected. RO Represents the Ethernet service activation state. RO Represents the Ethernet service availability state. RO Current available Ethernet service throughput in bps. RW Holds the maximum bandwidth (kbps) to be allocated for Ethernet service. Value of zero means that Ethernet service works as best effort. The maximum value is product specific. Refer to the user manual. N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table. N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table entry. RO If Index corresponding to this Interface. RO IDU MAC address. RO Number of LAN interfaces in the IDU. RW Timeout in seconds for aging. Note that for this parameter to be effective the ODU must be configured to HUB mode. A change is effective immediately. RO Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the state is available the bit value is 1. When the state is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available states are: bit 2 = Transparent. bit 3 =
Local Loop Timed. bit 4 = Remote Loop Timed. bit 5 = Local Internal. bit 6 = Remote Internal. RW Required state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control. A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM service. RO Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control. RO Available options of the TDM Master Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the option is available the bit value is 1. When the option is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available options are: bit 2 = Automatic. bit 3 =
Trunk #1. bit 4 = Trunk #2. bit 5 = Trunk #3. bit 6 =
Trunk #4. When no options are available the returned value is: 1 RW Required TDM Master Clock. A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM service. RO Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock. N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table. N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table entry. RO Table index. RO Link index in the interface table. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-16 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 13 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000IduTdmLineCoding 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.6 Integer winlink1000IduTdmLoopbackConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.9 Integer winlink1000IduTdmLineStatus winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTable winlink1000IduTdmCurrentEntry winlink1000IduTdmCurrentIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.10 Integer winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocks winlink1000IduTdmCurrentDrops winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTxClock 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.101 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.102 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.103 Integer winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocksHigh winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQual 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.104 Counter Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.8 winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQualEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.9 Integer winlink1000IduTdmSrvEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.10 Integer winlink1000IduTdmBackupAvailableLinks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.11 winlink1000IduTdmBackupTable winlink1000IduTdmBackupEntry winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex winlink1000IduTdmBackupMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.2 Integer Integer Integer winlink1000IduTdmBackupCurrentActive Link winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.3 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.13 Integer winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferDefaultSiz e winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMinSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.14 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.15 Integer winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMaxSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.16 Integer winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSizeEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.17 Integer winlink1000IduTdmType winlink1000IduTdmTypeEval winlink1000IduTdmLineStatusStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.18 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.19 Integer Integer Description A c c e s s RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only. The parameter controls the line coding. Setting the value to each of the indices applies to all. A change is effective after the next open of the TDM service. RW Loop back configuration table. Each of the trunks can be set Normal Line loop back or Reverse line loop back. A change is effective immediately. RO Line status. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. RO Table index (Same as winlink1000IduTdmLineIndex). RO Number of correct blocks transmitted to the line. RO Number of error blocks transmitted to the line. RW TDM Transmit Clock. A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM service. RO High part of the 64 bits counter Current Blocks RO Estimated average interval between error second events. The valid values are 1-2^31 where a value of -1 is used to indicate an undefined state. RO Estimated average interval between error second events during evaluation process. The valid values are 1-2^31 where a value of -1 is used to indicate an undefined state. RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask. Setting this parameter to value that is bigger than the activated TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation process for 30 seconds. Setting this parameter to 0 will stop the evaluation process immediately. RO Number of TDM backup trunks. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. RO Table index. RW TDM backup mode: Enable or Disable where the main link is the air link or the external link. Changes will be effective immediatly. RO TDM backup current active link: N/A air link is active or external link is active. RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RO TDM Jitter Buffer Default Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RO TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RO TDM Jitter Buffer Maximum Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RW TDM Type (The value undefined is read-only). RW TDM Type for evaluation. RO Line status. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-17 MIB Traps Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 14 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000GeneralTrapDescription winlink1000GeneralTrapSeverity winlink1000GeneralCookie 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.3 DisplayString Integer DisplayString winlink1000GeneralEcChangesCounter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.4 Integer Description A c c e s s RO Trap's Description. Used for Trap parameters. RO Trap's Severity. Used for Trap parameters. RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product used for saving user preferences affecting ODU operation. RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each element constant write operation via SNMP or Telnet. MIB Traps General Each ODU can be configured with up to 10 different trap destinations. When the link is operational, each ODU sends traps originating from both Site A and Site B. The source IP address of the trap is the sending ODU. The trap originator can be identified by the trap Community string or by the trap description text. The public Community string is used for Site Al ODU traps and public-
remote (as set by the user) is used for Site B ODU traps. Each trap contains a trap description and additional relevant information such as alarm severity, interface index, time stamp and additional parame-
ters. See table G-3 for additional information. Trap parameters Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 1 of 4) Name trunkStateChanged ID 1 Severity normal linkUp linkDown detectIDU disconnectIDU mismatchIDU 2 3 4 5 6 normal critical normal major major Description Indicates a change in the state of one of the TDM trunks. Raised by both sides of the link. Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: TDM Interface
%n - %x. 2 - %n: Is the trunk number. 3 - %x: Is the alarm type and can be one of the following: Normal, AIS, LOS, Loopback. Indicates that the radio link is up. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Sync on channel %n GHz. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that the radio link is down. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Out of Sync. The reason is:
%s. %s Is the reason. Indicates that the IDU was detected. Raised by both sides of the link. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: IDU of Type %s was Detected. %s Is the type of the IDU. Indicates that the IDU was disconnected. Raised by both sides of the link. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: IDU Disconnected. Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs. Raised by the master only. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description:
IDUs Mismatch: One Side is %s and the Other is %s. %s Is the type of the IDU. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-18 Trap parameters Appendix G Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 2 of 4) Name openedServices ID 7 Severity normal closedServices incompatibleODUs incompatibleIDUs incompatibleOduIdu probingChannel radarDetected transmittingOnChannel scanningChannels incompatiblePartner timeClockSet configurationChanged vlanModeActive tdmServiceAlarm ethServiceClosed ethServiceNotPermitted 8 9 10 11 normal critical major major 12 normal 13 normal 14 normal 15 normal 16 critical 17 normal 18 normal 22 normal 100 major 101 major 102 major encryptionAlarm 103 major changeLinkPasswordAlarm 104 major Description Indicates that services were opened. Raised by the master only. Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: %n2 out of %n1 Requested TDM Trunks have been Opened. 2 - %n1: Is the requested number of TDM truncks. 3
- %n2: Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were opened. Indicates that services were closed. Raised by the master only. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service has been closed. The reason is: %s. %s Is the reason. Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible ODUs. Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible IDUs. Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: The IDU could not be loaded. The reason is: %s. %s Is the incompatibility type. Indicates that the ODU is monitoring radar activity. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Monitoring for radar activity on channel %n GHz. %n is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that radar activity was detected. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Radar activity was detected in
%s, on channel %n GHz. %s Is the site name. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that the ODU is transmitting on channel. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Transmitting on channel %n GHz. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that the ODU is scanning channels. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Channel scanning in progress. Indicates that configuration problem was detected and that link installation is required to fix it. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Configuration problem detected. Link installation required. Indicates that the ODU time clock was set. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: The time was set to: %p. %p Is the date and time. Indicates that the ODU was recovered from an error, but there are configuration changes. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description:
Configuration changed. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number. Indicates to non-VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support only VLAN tag on management interface. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: VLAN Mode is active. Non-VLAN traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes. Indicates that TDM Service is in alarm state. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Alarm. Indicates that Ethernet Service is closed. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service is closed. Indicates that Ethernet Service is not permitted. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: A valid Idu could not be detected at %s. Please check your configuration. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link. Indicates an encryption key mismatch. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Failed. No Services are available. Indicates that a failure has occurred while attempting to change the Link Password. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Failed to change the Link Password at/on: %s. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-19 Trap parameters Appendix G Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 3 of 4) Name externalAlarmInPort1Alarm Severity ID 105 major externalAlarmInPort2Alarm 106 major bitFailedAlarm 107 critical wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm 108 major lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm 109 major lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm 110 major mngPortDisconnectedAlarm 111 major externalAlarmInPort3Alarm 112 major externalAlarmInPort4Alarm 113 major swVersionsMismatchFullCompatibilityAlarm 114 warning swVersionsMismatchRestrictedCompatibilityAlarm 115 minor swVersionsMismatchSoftwareUpgradeRequired 116 major swVersionsIncompatible 117 critical tdmBackupAlarm 121 major linkLockUnautorizedRemoteODU 122 major linkLockUnautorizedODU 123 major tdmServiceClear ethServiceOpened encryptionClear 200 normal 201 normal 203 normal Description The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #1. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #2. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 2 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent in case there is no way to recover from the situation. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: ODU power up built in test failed. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number. The trap is sent in case there is a way to recover from the situation. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: Wrong configuration loaded. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number. Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected. Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected. Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Management port status changed to disconnected. The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #3. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 3 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #4. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 4 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent in case SW versions mismatch with full link functionality. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Software versions mismatch - full link functionality The trap is sent in case SW versions mismatch with restricted link functionality. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software versions mismatch - restricted link functionality The trap is sent in case SW versions mismatch and SW upgrade is required. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software versions mismatch - Software upgrade required 1 - Description: Unauthorized remote The trap is sent in case SW versions are incompatible. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: SW Versions incompatible Indicates that the TDM backup link was activated. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM backup alarm -
backup link was activated. Indicates that the remote ODU is unautorized. Contains a single parameter which is its description:
ODU connection rejected. Indicates that the ODU is unautorized. Contains a single parameter which is its description:
connection rejected. Indicates that TDM Service fault is cleared. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Normal. Indicates that Ethernet Service has been opened. Contains a single parameter,3 which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service has been opened. Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Normal. 1 - Description: Unauthorized ODU RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-20 RADWIN Manager Traps Appendix G Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 4 of 4) Name changeLinkPasswordClear ID 204 Severity normal externalAlarmInPort1Clear 204 normal externalAlarmInPort2Clear 206 normal lanPort1Clear lanPort2Clear mngPort2Clear 209 normal 210 normal 211 normal externalAlarmInPort3Clear 211 normal externalAlarmInPort4Clear 213 normal swVersionsMatchFullCompatibilityClear 214 normal swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear 215 normal swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear 216 normal swVersionsCompatibleClear 217 normal tdmBackupClear linkLockAutorizedODU linkAuthenticationDisabled 221 223 normal normal 224 normal Description Indicates that the Link Password was changed successfully. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Link Password has been changed at/on: %s. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link. This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 1 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 2 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 2 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to connected. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 1 status changed to connected -
%s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex). Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to connected. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 2 status changed to connected -
%s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex). Indicates the management port status changed to connected. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: Management port status changed to connected - %s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex). This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 3 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 3 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 4 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 4 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. The trap is sent in case SW versions match. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible The trap is sent in case SW versions match and link functionality is not restricted. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software Versions compatible The trap is sent in case SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software Versions compatible The trap is sent in case SW versions compatible Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible Indicates that the ODU is autorized. is its description:
Indicates that the Link Lock is disabled. which is its description:
disabled Contains a single parameter which 1 - Description: Authorized ODU connection permitted. Contains a single parameter 1 - Description: Link Authentication has been RADWIN Manager Traps The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events. These traps are shown in the RADWIN Managerr Events Log. A list of Trap Messages as displayed by the RADWIN Manager is shown in table 7-5. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 G-21 Appendix H External Alarms Specification External Alarms Specification The IDU-C supports external input and output alarms through a standard DB25 pin female connector. Input alarms The input alarms are raised by events from external equipment, such as a fire warning, door open or air conditioner failure. Output alarms Output alarms are generated through dry contact relays to indicate vari-
ous system events according to the following table. An alarm is raised if at least one of the conditions is met. Table H-1: Output Alarms Pinout Description Alarm On Conditions Alarm Off Condition Alarm Output 1 Air interface Alarm Output 2 Equipment Alarm Output 3 Output 4 Service Alarm at Site B N/A Power Failure at Site B Link Loss due to Power Failure at Site B Link is down Link in installation mode Link authentication prob-
lem Built in Test (BIT) error No connection to the ODU Incompatible software Link is up Both ODU and IDU are in operational state Permanently off Link is up or down with-
out power failure indica-
tion within the last two seconds RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 H-1 Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I What is the Combo Configuration Tool?
The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is supplied preconfigured to a default fre-
quency band and regulation. The user may however, reconfigure it to use any one of the supported frequency bands shown in the following example:
Product Default Band 2050 FCC/IC 5.8 GHz FCC/IC 5.3 GHz FCC/IC 5.4 GHz FCC/IC 4.9 GHz FCC/IC 2.4 GHz The Combo Configuration Tool is a software utility supplied by RADWIN to change the link frequency band. It runs as familiar Windows Wizard. This appendix will walk you through the Wizard. It also provides help for common problems encountered during the configuration. Who may use the Combo Configuration Tool The Combo Configuration Tool is a password protected utility intended for the use of RADWIN accredited personnel at the users site, RADWIN Cus-
tomer Support Engineers or Professional Installers conversant with FCC requirements. Caveat to the use of the Combo Configuration Tool It is the users responsibility to operate the system according to local regula-
tions and to acquire the relevant permits or licenses for the frequency band selected, if applicable. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-1 Prerequisites to using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I Prerequisites to using the Combo Configuration Tool To use the Tool, you need a PC running Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pro to be connected to the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link. Operating the Combo Configuration Tool The tool is supplied as an executable called ComboConfigurationTool.exe. It should be copied to a convenient directory on a hard disk from where it can be run from a command line, or placed on the desktop and opened with a double click. The Combo Configuration Tool is a Wizard, which guides you through the process of changing the frequency band. Before using the Combo Configuration Tool Before starting:
Obtain the IP address of both the local ODU and remote ODUs of the link Make a note of the correct required frequency band If the link uses external antennas, ensure that they support your required frequency band Also, note that 1. The procedure below must be carried out for both ODUs in the link. 2. Changing the frequency band may affect the available Link Budget and system performance. Using the Combo Configuration Tool To change the link frequency band:
1. Open the Tool from a command line or double clicking it on the desktop. The following Welcome screen appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-2 Using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I 2. Click Next. The window below is displayed:
3. Enter the ODU IP address and password. 4. Click Next. The following progress panel is displayed:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-3 Using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I Upon completion the following screen is displayed:
The checked item is the currently configured frequency band. 5. Check the box with the required frequency band. If you do not see the required frequency band in the above window, click Cancel and consult RADWIN Customer Support. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-4 Using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I
. 6. Otherwise, click Next. The following window is displayed:
7. If the legal notice is acceptable, click the I accept radio button, and then click Next. Two successive progress panels are displayed. The con-
figuration may take several minutes. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-5 If you receive an error message Appendix I Upon successful completion of the configuration process, the following termination window is displayed:
8. Click Finish to exit the Wizard as shown. 9. Repeat the whole process for the second ODU in the link. If you receive an error message The last stage above may terminate unsuccessfully due to an error. Error messages are posted to a window like this:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-6 If you receive an error message Appendix I The following table sets out possible errors:
Error Number
(nn) Common mes-
sage preamble:
120 940 1040 1020 Error Text Message The Configure procedure has failed with the following error: ERROR nn occurred:
Failed to communicate with the ODU. Please verify the existence of a sta-
ble IP connection and try again. Product is not identified. The ODU is not a Combo product. A configuration problem detected. Aborting. The only items requiring explanation are errors 940 and 1020. Error 940 may arise as a result of an ODU firmware problem. Error 1020 will appear for any reason not caught by the other entries in the table. In all such cases, you should consult with RADWIN Customer Support. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 I-7 Appendix J Regional Notice: French Canadian Procdures de scurit Gnralits Avant de manipuler du matriel connect des lignes lectriques ou de tlcommunications, il est conseill de se dfaire de bijoux ou de tout autre objet mtallique qui pourrait entrer en contact avec les lments sous ten-
sion. Mise la terre Tous les produits RADWIN doivent tre mis la terre pendant l'usage cou-
rant. La mise la terre est assure en reliant la fiche d'alimentation une prise de courant avec une protection de terre. En outre:
La cosse de masse sur l'IDU-C doit tre constamment connecte la protection de terre, par un cble de diamtre de 18 AWG ou plus. Le matriel mont sur rack doit tre install seulement sur des racks ou armoires relis la terre Une ODU doit mise la terre par un cble de diamtre de 12 AWG ou plus Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection la terre De plus:
Il faut toujours connecter la terre en premier et la dconnecter en dernier Il ne faut jamais connecter les cbles de tlcommunication du matriel non la terre Il faut s'assurer que tous les autres cbles sont dconnects avant de dconnecter la terre RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-1 Protection contre la foudre Appendix J Protection contre la foudre L'utilisation de dispositifs de protection contre la foudre dpend des exi-
gences rglementaires et de l'utilisateur final. Toutes les units extrieures RADWIN sont conues avec des circuits de limitation de surtension afin de minimiser les risques de dommages dus la foudre. RADWIN conseille l'util-
isation d'un dispositif de parafoudre supplmentaire afin de protger le matriel de coups de foudre proches. Matriel supplmentaire requis L'quipement requis pour l'installation du matriel est le suivant:
Pince sertir RJ-45 (si un cble pr-assembl ODU/IDU n'est pas utilis) Perceuse (pour le montage sur mur seulement) Cbles de terre IDU et ODU Clef 13 mm () Cble ODU - IDU si non command (type extrieur, CAT-5e, 4 paires torsades, 24 AWG) Colliers de serrage Ordinateur portable avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP. Prcautions de scurit pendant le montage de ODU Avant de connecter un cble l'ODU, la borne protectrice de masse (visse) de l'ODU doit tre connecte un conducteur externe protecteur ou un pylne reli la terre. Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection la terre. Seulement un personnel qualifi utilisant l'quipement de scurit appropri doit pouvoir monter sur le pylne d'antenne. De mme, l'installation ou le dmontage de ODU ou de pylnes doit tre effectue seulement par des professionnels ayant suivi une formation. Pour monter l'ODU:
1. Vrifier que les supports de fixation de l'ODU sont correctement mis la terre. 2. Monter l'unit ODU sur le pylne ou sur le mur; se rfrer la Installa-
tion sur pylne et mur au dessous. 3. Connecter la cble de terre au point de chssis sur l'ODU. 4. Relier le cble ODU-IDU au connecteur ODU RJ-45. 5. Visser les presses-toupe de cbles pour assurer le scellement herm-
tique des units ODU. 6. Attacher le cble au pylne ou aux supports en utilisant des colliers clas-
ss UV. 7. Rpter la procdure sur le site distant. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-2 Connecter la terre IDU-C Appendix J Prudence Prudence Ne pas se placer en face d'une ODU sous tension. Connecter la terre IDU-C Connecter un cble de terre de 18 AWG la borne de masse de l'appareil. L'appareil doit tre constamment connect la terre. Les appareils sont prvus pour tre installs par un personnel de ser-
vice. Les appareils doivent tre connects une prise de courant avec une protection de terre. Le courant CC du IDU-C doit tre fourni par l'intermdiaire d'un dis-
joncteur bipolaire et le diamtre du cble doit tre de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-3 Installation sur pylne et mur Appendix J Installation sur pylne et mur L' ODU ou l'O-PoE peuvent tre monts sur un pylne ou un mur. Contenu du kit de montage ODU Le kit de montage ODU comprend les pices suivantes:
une grande clame (voir figure J-1) une petite clame (voir figure J-2) un bras (voir figure J-3) quatre visses hex tte M8x40 deux visses hex tte M8x70 quatre rondelles plates M8 trois rondelles lastiques M8 deux crous M8. Figure J-1: grande clame Figure J-2: petite clame Figure J-3: bras RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-4 Montage sur un pylne Appendix J Montage sur un pylne Figure J-4: Montage sur un pylne RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-5 Montage sur un mur Appendix J Montage sur un mur Figure J-5: Montage sur un mur RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-6 Montage d'une antenne externe Appendix J Montage d'une antenne externe L'antenne externe optionnelle peut tre monte sur un pylne. Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe Le kit de montage d'une antenne externe comprend les pices suivantes Douze rondelles plates Huit rondelles lastiques Huit crous hex Quatre boulons Un support en U Un support pivotement Deux courroies de fixation en mtal Pour installer une antenne externe sur un pylne:
1. Attacher le support en U l'arrire de l'antenne en utilisant quatre ron-
delles plates, quatre rondelles lastiques et quatre crous hex. 2. Attacher le support pivotement au support en U en utilisant huit ron-
delles plates, quatre rondelles lastiques, quatre crous hex et quatre boulons. 3. Passer les deux courroies de fixation par les fentes verticales dans le sup-
port pivotement. 4. Attacher l'antenne au pylne en utilisant les deux courroies de fixation . Ajuster l'inclinaison ncessaire en utilisant l'chelle angulaire et serrer tous les boulons et crous la position requise. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 J-7 Index Bridge mode,Telnet commands Buzzer, see Beeper 6-21 C Changing link password Channel, selecting Community Strings Changing Editing Factory Default Forgotten passwords MIB passwords Read-Only Read-Write Trap Configuration Parameters Configuring 4-16 4-17, 5-12 6-16 6-15 6-14, G-2 6-16 G-2 4-4 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-3 Advanced Air Interface Air interface Bridge mode Community values. contact person Date and Time Ethernet mode Frequency channel Security Service parameters System System parameters Transmit power View Inventory 6-2, 6-9, 6-11, 6-12, 6-18 6-2 5-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-1 5-1 6-2 5-1 6-2 5-1 6-1 6-2 4-17, 5-12 7-17 Connecting user equipment Customer Support D Date and time, setting Default log on password DFS Configuration Link Activation 6-2, 6-7 4-4 F-1 F-5 F-2 Index A AAR ACS aging time, ODU Bridge Mode Air Interface Technical Specifications, general 1-4 4-17, 6-20, G-8, G-8 6-10 1-12, 1-12 A-1 Alarms Active summary Connector External , specification Antennas Align with beeper Aligning bipolar Buzzer signals monopolar Cable, grounding Connecting Described External Mounting Package Contents External, Mounting Flat panel Parabolic Dish Settings types Broadband Access IP Backhaul Private Networks WiMAX Applications Automatic Adaptive Rate, see AAR Automatic Channel Selection, see ACS Automatic Repeat Request B backup Beeper configuration file ODU replacement mute muting and restoring restore 7-9 7-14 B-3 H-1 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 E-1 3-13 1-10 3-7 3-5 C-3 1-11 1-12 4-19, 5-18 1-8 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-2 1-4 1-4 6-2 7-16 6-17 6-3 6-17 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p1 Index 1 Events color codes log priority E F Factory Defaults Reset to Factory Setup Restoring 7-12 7-2, 7-4 7-13 6-14, G-2 6-19 LBC Transmission (Tx) power L Browser warnings Calculations Climactic C Factors described Fresnel Zone, described Internal data Running User input FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure FEC Forward Error Correction, see FEC 7-17 F-1 4-21, 4-22, A-4, A-4 1-4 7-4 D-6 D-2 D-10 D-1 D-13 D-1 D-3 D-1 E-1 5-20 5-21 4-18 4-9 7-1 7-9 7-9 7-9 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-14 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-13 7-13 7-12 7-12 7-13 7-4, 7-4 7-4 7-17 7-8 7-4 7-5 7-15 7-15 7-16 4-7 Lightning and Grounding Guidelines Link Budget Calculator, see LBC Configuration 5-1 Overview 5-10 Step 1 - Start Wizard 5-11 Step 2- System Parameters 5-11 Step 3 - Channel Settings 5-12 Step 4 - Tx Power and Antenna Settings 5-18 Step 5 - Services Step 6 - Summary and exit default frequency default Settings Information Air Interface Thresholds BBER Threshold RSL Threshold Air Interface Thresholds, setting Alarms Active summary Error detection and output saved Compatibility Trap messages Events Log Events log Events references trap background color default colors foreground color Preferences saving Monitor log saving Online Help Performance data, explained Performance monitoring Performance Reports Remote Power Fail Indication Dying-Gasp circuit Troubleshooting Installation 6-2 6-20 6-10 6-10 3-12 1-8 B-3 B-4 1-9 3-10 3-10, 3-11, 4-2 3-8 3-11, 3-12 3-4 1-8 6-3, 6-3, 6-12 6-16 6-12 6-2 6-20 Gateway Telnet display G I IDU Aging time aging time, ODU Bridge Mode Connecting to ODU described IDU-C Alarm Connector Connectors Front panel Described LEDs Mounting Power connections Package Contents Products Indoor Unit, see IDU Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Post Configuration main window Post Installation main window see Link, Installation 4-10 5-22 4-27 Installation Mode Inventory Displaying IP address Telnet display K Key Features of Radio Link Advanced Air Interface Capacity Combo Frequency Products Installation and management Range performance Security Spectral Efficiency 1-4 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-3 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion2.6.50p1 Index 2 ODU Mast and Wall C-1 Overview 4-13 Step 1 - Start Wizard 4-14 Step 2 - System Parameters 4-14 Step 3 - Channel Settings 4-17 Step 4 - Tx Power and Antenna Settings 4-19 Background Step 5 - Services Step 6 - Summary and Exit 4-20 4-25 4-26 4-9, 4-15, 6-20, 7-16, 7-16, 7-17 4-3 Link ID Login Login Errors Incorrect IP Address Incorrect password Unsupported Device Login showing Community Options Manager Software Name Password changing Post Configuration main window Post Installation main window Reinstalling/Realigning Site names 4-6 4-6 4-5 4-5 4-2 4-15 1-5, 7-17 4-16 5-22 4-27 7-3 4-15 7-4 4-9, 4-15, 6-20, 7-16, 7-16, 7-17 Link Budget Calculator, see LBC Link ID Link Site Planning Survey 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 Additional Indoor Site Requirements Stage 1 - Preliminary Survey Stage 2 - Physical Survey 2-4 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements 2-4 2-4 Stage 3 - RF Survey Login Errors Incorrect IP Address Incorrect password Unsupported Device M Management Addresses and trap addresses Configuring the Site Screen, Telnet Manager Software Change log on password Events Log Installing Main window Details pane Main menu Toolbar 4-6 4-6 4-5 6-4 6-1 6-2 6-22 4-7 5-8 4-1 5-1 5-6 5-3 5-2 4-5 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 4-6 5-9 1-14 1-16 1-14 1-7 6-10 1-6, 1-7 1-6 1-7 C-1 1-6, 1-7 C-1 3-2 1-8 7-16 1-10 3-2 4-4, 4-4 4-4 4-4 1-5, 7-17 4-1 main window Monitor pane Ethernet Service Radio Interface, Radio signal strength Off-line functionality Status Bar Manual MIB Chapters by Audience Conventions Terminology About G-1 Community String G-2 Interface API G-1 Parameters G-4 Private G-2 Private Parameters G-5 Reference G-1 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 G-4 Terminology G-1 Traps G-18 G-18 Parameters O ODU Bridge Mode aging time Connectorized described form factors Installation, Mast and Wall Integrated Antenna Mounting Kit Package Contents Products Replacing With integrated antenna P Package, contents of Password Community Default default log on Link PC, Minimum Requirements Performance Monitor Performance Monitoring, set time interval PoE Described PoE device, see PoE Power over Ethernet, see PoE Protection External Lightning Surge Suppressors 7-2 7-4 1-9 E-3 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion2.6.50p1 Index 3 Radio Link Grounding Antenna cable IDUs ODUs Internal ESD Protection circuits E-1 E-2 E-2 E-7 R Accessories 1-13 Additional Tools and Materials Required 3-5 Connecting user equipment 3-12 Described 1-5 Documentation set 1-13 Hardware Installation External Antennas Indoor Lightning protection Mounting U ODU Outdoor Outdoor connections Sequence Package Contents IDU ODU Package contents External Antennas Transmission rates Radio Outdoor Unit, see ODU Replacing an ODU restore configuration file S Configuration Files backup to Configuration files restore from Configuration with Telnet Dialog Change Tx Power Ethernet Properties Configuring Bridge 6-9 Maximum information rate 6-12 Ports Mode 6-11 Ethernet PropertiesIDU Aging time 6-
10 Functions Inventory Menu bar Setting the date and time 3-7 3-8 3-7 3-8 3-6 3-6 3-8 3-5 3-2 3-4 3-2 3-5 4-22 7-16 6-2 6-18 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-4 6-9 6-2 6-12 6-2 6-7 View Air Iinterface details VLAN Settings 6-3 6-5 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID 6-7 Priority number 6-6 VLAN ID 6-6 External Alarm Inputs 6-17 Reset site 6-19 Reset site to factory defaults 6-19 Reset site, preserve current configuration 6-19 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-15 6-5 6-5, 6-5 6-5 Editing Forgotten paswwords Initial log on defaults Community Strings Security Features Default Gateway IP address Trap Destination T Technical Specifications Air Interface Air Interface, general Configuration EMC Environmental Ethernet Interface Management Mechanical Power Safety Trap messages typical installation Alarm Connector IDU-C Connectors IDU-C User Port LAN Ports ODU-IDU Cable Ports LAN User Port Connectors A-6 A-1 A-1 A-6 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-6 7-3 3-5 B-1 B-3 B-4 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 Safety Practices 3-1 Grounding 3-1 Preventing overexposure to RF energy 3-1 4-17, 5-12 Selecting channel Site Configuration U User equipment, connecting 4-17, 5-12 W Wiring Specifications RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion2.6.50p1 Index 4
| 1 | Users manual part 1 | Users Manual | 1.32 MiB |
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Broadband Wireless Transmission System User Manual Version 2.6.50p UM 5000-2650/09.11 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User Manual Notice This manual contains information that is proprietary to RADWIN Ltd. (RADWIN hereafter). No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RADWIN. Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the RADWIN products and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RADWIN protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RADWIN. The RADWIN name is a registered trademark of RADWIN Ltd. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark. You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the User Manual or any other RADWIN documentation or products. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality based or derived in any way from RADWIN products.Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement. This Agreement is effective upon your opening of a RADWIN product package and shall continue until terminated. RADWIN may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term thereof. Upon such termination by RADWIN, you agree to return to RADWIN any RADWIN products and documentation and all copies and portions thereof. For further information contact RADWIN at the address below or contact your local distributor. Disclaimer The parameters quoted in this document must be specifically confirmed in writing before they become applicable to any particular order or contract. RADWIN reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detail specification at its discretion. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of RADWIN, or others. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p i RADWIN Worldwide Offices Corporate Headquarters 27 Habarzel Street Tel Aviv, 69710 Israel Tel: +972 3 766 2917 Support Headquarter 27 Habarzel Street Tel Aviv, 69710 Israel Tel: +972 3 766 2900 Mobile: +972 54 766 0044 RADWIN North America 900 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA Tel (1): 1 800 444 7234 / 341 Tel (2): +1 201 529 1100 / 341 Latin America Headquarters Rua Grao Mogol 828 Belo Horizonte, MG 30310-010 Brazil Tel (1): +55 31 919 76 402 Tel (2): +972 54 758 6808 India Headquarters Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate E-13, B-1 Extn New Delhi, 110044 India Tel: +91 11 4053 9180 APAC Headquarters 1 Jalan Kuala #13-01 The Morningside, 239639 Singapore Tel: +65 9878 3004 Indonesia Sales Office Jl. Jenderal Sudirman Kav. 86 Jakarta, 10220 Indonesia Tel: +62 8138 570 0657 Philippines Sales Office 37A. A luna St. West Rembo Makati City, 1200 Philippines Tel: +63 2882 6886 Mobile: +63 91 789 23427 China Sales Office Asian Games Village Huiyuan Gongyu J1312 Beijing 100101 China Tel: +86 010 8498 0629 For technical support contact: support@radwin.com For technical support in India only, contact: support-india@radwnin.com For sales support contact: sales@radwin.com Website: www.radwin.com RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p ii Regulatory Compliance General Note This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and in these bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause interference. FCC/IC - Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES-003 of IC. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance (RADWIN Ltd.) could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when using the outdoor antenna kits in the United States (or where FCC rules apply), only those antennas certified with the product are used. The use of any antenna other than those certified with the product is expressly forbidden in accordance to FCC rules CFR47 part 15.204. Warning In accordance to IC standard RSS-Gen - To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p) is not more than that permitted for successful communication Caution Caution Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may void the product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Resellers or distributors of this equipment are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas. The installer should configure the output power level of antennas according to country regulations and antenna type. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p iii The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 225cm from all persons and must not be co-
located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This product was tested with special accessories - indoor unit (IDU or PoE), FTP Cat 5e shielded cable with sealing gasket, 12 AWG grounding cable - which must be used with the unit to insure compliance. Warning Warning Indoor Units comply with part 15 of the FCC rules and ICES-003 standard. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause harmful interference.
(2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canadian Emission Requirements for Indoor Units This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Safety Practices Applicable requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70; and the National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI/IEEE C2, must be considered during installation. NOTES:
1. A Primary Protector is not required to protect the exposed wiring as long as the exposed wiring length is limited to less than or equal to 140 feet, and instructions are provided to avoid exposure of wiring to accidental contact with lightning and power conductors in accordance with NEC Sections 725-54 (c) and 800-30. In all other cases, an appropriate Listed Primary Protector must be provided. Refer to Articles 800 and 810 of the NEC for details. 2. For protection of ODU against direct lightning strikes, appropriate requirements of NFPA 780 should be considered in addition to NEC. 3. For Canada, appropriate requirements of Section 60 of the CEC 22.1should be considered as applicable. 4. E1/T1 ports are intended for connection to indoor lines only and are not exposed to outdoor plants. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p iv Table of Contents Notice....................................................................................................................... i RADWIN Worldwide Offices.................................................................................... ii Regulatory Compliance.............................................................................................. iii Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome! .............................................................................................................. 1-1 Key Applications ..................................................................................................... 1-2 WiMAX and IP Backhaul......................................................................................1-2 Broadband Access..............................................................................................1-2 Private Networks................................................................................................1-3 Key Features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ............................................................... 1-3 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Link................................................................................ 1-5 The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU)............................................................................1-6 The Indoor Units (IDU).......................................................................................1-8 IDU-C......................................................................................................................... 1-8 IDU-E......................................................................................................................... 1-9 Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices.....................................................................1-9 Antennas.........................................................................................................1-10 Flat Panel Antennas................................................................................................... 1-11 Parabolic Dish Antennas ............................................................................................ 1-12 RADWIN Manager.............................................................................................1-12 Accessories......................................................................................................1-13 Documentation set supplied with RADWIN 1000/2000/5000................................1-13 How to Use this Manual ........................................................................................ 1-14 A Little Terminology ............................................................................................. 1-14 Conventions Used in this Manual ........................................................................... 1-16 Notifications.....................................................................................................1-16 Typographical conventions................................................................................1-16 General .................................................................................................................... 1-16 Software................................................................................................................... 1-16 Windows Terminology.......................................................................................1-17 Chapter 2 Site Preparation Planning the Link Site ............................................................................................. 2-1 Overview...........................................................................................................2-1 The Site Survey...................................................................................................... 2-1 Introduction.......................................................................................................2-1 Recommended Equipment...................................................................................2-1 Stage 1: Preliminary Survey .................................................................................... 2-2 Stage 2: Physical Survey......................................................................................... 2-3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements..................................................................2-4 Additional Indoor Site Requirements....................................................................2-4 Stage 3: RF Survey................................................................................................. 2-4 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Safety Practices...................................................................................................... 3-1 Preventing overexposure to RF energy.................................................................3-1 Grounding..........................................................................................................3-1 Protection against Lightning................................................................................3-2 General..............................................................................................................3-2 Package Contents................................................................................................... 3-2 ODU Package Contents.......................................................................................3-2 IDU Package Contents........................................................................................3-4 External Antenna Package Contents.....................................................................3-5 Additional Tools and Materials Required ................................................................... 3-5 Tools and Materials.............................................................................................3-5 Cables and connectors........................................................................................3-5 Hardware Installation Sequence .............................................................................. 3-5 Outdoor installation ................................................................................................ 3-6 Mounting the ODU..............................................................................................3-6 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p v Mounting external antennas................................................................................3-7 Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices...........................................................3-7 Outdoor Connections..........................................................................................3-8 Indoor Installation.................................................................................................. 3-8 IDU-E Installation........................................................................................................ 3-8 Mounting the IDU-C............................................................................................3-8 Connecting power to the IDU............................................................................3-11 Connecting the ODU to the IDU.........................................................................3-12 Installing a Link using PoE Devices.....................................................................3-12 Connecting User Equipment...............................................................................3-12 Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas ............................................................. 3-13 Chapter 4 Link Installation: The RADWIN Manager Installing theRADWIN Manager Application .............................................................. 4-1 Minimum System Requirements...........................................................................4-1 Installing the Software........................................................................................4-1 Starting the RADWIN Manager ................................................................................ 4-2 Login Errors ........................................................................................................... 4-5 Unsupported Device............................................................................................4-5 Incorrect IP Address...........................................................................................4-6 Incorrect Password.............................................................................................4-6 Continuing without an IP Address............................................................................ 4-6 Changing the Log On Password...........................................................................4-7 Installing the Link: First steps.................................................................................. 4-7 Default Settings..................................................................................................4-9 Front Panel LEDs on the IDU-C............................................................................4-9 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality........................................................4-10 Installing the Link: Overview ................................................................................. 4-13 Installing the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard ........................................................... 4-14 Installing the Link: Step 2, System Parameters ....................................................... 4-14 Changing the Link Password..............................................................................4-16 Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings........................................................... 4-17 Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings ..................................... 4-19 General............................................................................................................4-20 Dual Antennas at Both Sites..............................................................................4-20 Single Antennas at Both Sites............................................................................4-21 Single and Dual Antennas..................................................................................4-21 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters...............................................4-22 Installing the Link: Step 5, Services ....................................................................... 4-25 Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit ....................................... 4-26 Chapter 5 Configuring the Link Link Configuration: Getting Started.......................................................................... 5-1 The Main Window of the RADWIN Manager..........................................................5-1 The RADWIN Manager Toolbar............................................................................5-2 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu.......................................................................5-3 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window..................................................5-6 Configuring the Link: Overview.............................................................................. 5-10 Configuring the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard ........................................................ 5-11 Configuring the Link: Step 2, System Parameters.................................................... 5-11 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings ....................................................... 5-12 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings.................................. 5-18 Configuring the Link: Step 5, Services.................................................................... 5-20 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit................................. 5-21 Chapter 6 Site Configuration Configuring the Site................................................................................................ 6-1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site........................................................6-1 Functions on the left of the dialog box:......................................................................... 6-2 Functions at the top of the dialog box:.......................................................................... 6-2 Viewing Air Interface Details ................................................................................... 6-3 Changing the Transmit Power ................................................................................. 6-4 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p vi Site Management: IP Address and VLAN .................................................................. 6-4 Configuring the ODU Address..............................................................................6-4 Configuring VLAN Settings...................................................................................6-5 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID............................................................................................ 6-7 Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................................... 6-7 Ethernet Properties................................................................................................. 6-9 Configuring the Bridge........................................................................................6-9 ODU Mode................................................................................................................ 6-10 IDU Aging time ......................................................................................................... 6-10 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode.......................................................................6-11 Setting the Maximum Information Rate..............................................................6-12 Displaying the Inventory ....................................................................................... 6-12 Security Features ................................................................................................. 6-13 Changing the Link Password..............................................................................6-14 RADWIN Manager Community Strings................................................................6-14 Editing Community Strings ......................................................................................... 6-15 Forgotten Community string....................................................................................... 6-16 Muting the alignment tone .................................................................................... 6-17 Setting External Alarm Inputs................................................................................ 6-17 Managing Configuration Files................................................................................. 6-18 Backup Configuration to a File...........................................................................6-18 Restoring a Configuration File............................................................................6-19 Resetting.........................................................................................................6-19 Configuration with Telnet...................................................................................... 6-20 Chapter 7 Monitoring and Diagnostics Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics)........................................................... 7-1 Link Compatibility................................................................................................... 7-3 Reinstalling and Realigning a Link............................................................................ 7-3 The Link Budget Calculator ..................................................................................... 7-4 Performance Monitoring.......................................................................................... 7-4 The Monitor Log.................................................................................................7-4 Saving the Monitor Log................................................................................................ 7-4 Viewing Performance Reports....................................................................................... 7-5 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar........................................................................ 7-9 Setting Air Interface Thresholds ................................................................................... 7-9 The Events Log................................................................................................7-10 RADWIN Manager Traps...................................................................................7-11 Setting the Events Preferences................................................................................... 7-12 Saving the Events Log ............................................................................................... 7-13 Reverting Alarm Messages ......................................................................................... 7-13 Active Alarms............................................................................................................ 7-14 Remote Power Fail Indication..................................................................................... 7-15 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-16 Replacing an ODU ................................................................................................ 7-16 Restoring Factory Setup........................................................................................ 7-17 Online Help.......................................................................................................... 7-17 Customer Support ................................................................................................ 7-17 Appendix A Technical Specifications Configuration ........................................................................................................ A-1 Radio ................................................................................................................... A-1 Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................. A-5 Management......................................................................................................... A-5 Mechanical............................................................................................................ A-5 Power................................................................................................................... A-5 Environmental....................................................................................................... A-5 Safety................................................................................................................... A-6 EMC ..................................................................................................................... A-6 Air Interface.......................................................................................................... A-6 Appendix B Wiring Specifications ODU-IDU Cable ..................................................................................................... B-1 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p vii User Port Connectors............................................................................................ B-1 LAN Port...........................................................................................................B-1 IDU-C Alarm Connector......................................................................................B-3 Appendix C Pole and Wall Installation ODU Mounting Kit Contents.................................................................................... C-1 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a pole......................................................... C-2 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a Wall ........................................................ C-3 Mounting an External Antenna ............................................................................... C-3 Appendix D Link Budget Calculator Overview .............................................................................................................. D-1 User Input........................................................................................................D-1 Link Budget Calculator Internal Data...................................................................D-1 Calculations .......................................................................................................... D-2 EIRP.................................................................................................................D-2 Expected RSS and Fade Margin...........................................................................D-2 Min and Max Range...........................................................................................D-2 Service..............................................................................................................D-2 Availability........................................................................................................D-2 Antenna Height.................................................................................................D-3 Running the Link Budget Calculator ........................................................................ D-3 About the Fresnel Zone........................................................................................ D-13 Appendix E Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Grounding for Antenna Cable .................................................................................. E-1 Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units ........................................................................ E-2 ODU Grounding..................................................................................................E-2 IDU Grounding...................................................................................................E-2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding................................................ E-3 Internal ESD Protection circuits ............................................................................... E-7 Appendix F FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Links: Background .................................................................... F-1 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation.......................................................................... F-2 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration..................................................................... F-5 FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration ............................................................................. F-7 Registering the Device........................................................................................F-8 TDWR Table ........................................................................................................ F-11 Appendix G MIB Reference Introduction.......................................................................................................... G-1 About the MIB...................................................................................................G-1 Terminology......................................................................................................G-1 Interface API ........................................................................................................ G-1 Control Method..................................................................................................G-1 Community String..............................................................................................G-2 Private MIB Structure ............................................................................................ G-2 MIB Parameters .................................................................................................... G-4 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB.......................................................G-4 MIB Parameters.................................................................................................G-5 MIB Traps........................................................................................................... G-18 General...........................................................................................................G-18 Trap parameters..............................................................................................G-18 RADWIN Manager Traps..................................................................................G-21 Appendix H External Alarms Specification External Alarms Specification.................................................................................. H-1 Appendix I Combo Configuration Tool What is the Combo Configuration Tool? ................................................................... I-1 Who may use the Combo Configuration Tool ............................................................ I-1 Caveat to the use of the Combo Configuration Tool .................................................. I-1 Prerequisites to using the Combo Configuration Tool................................................. I-2 Operating the Combo Configuration Tool.................................................................. I-2 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p viii Before using the Combo Configuration Tool.............................................................. I-2 Using the Combo Configuration Tool........................................................................ I-2 If you receive an error message .............................................................................. I-6 Appendix J Regional Notice: French Canadian Procdures de scurit............................................................................................ J-1 Gnralits.........................................................................................................J-1 Mise la terre....................................................................................................J-1 Protection contre la foudre..................................................................................J-2 Prcautions de scurit pendant le montage de ODU............................................J-2 Connecter la terre IDU-C..................................................................................J-3 Installation sur pylne et mur.................................................................................. J-4 Contenu du kit de montage ODU.........................................................................J-4 Montage sur un pylne.......................................................................................J-5 Montage sur un mur...........................................................................................J-6 Montage d'une antenne externe...........................................................................J-7 Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe...............................................J-7 Index RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p ix List of Figures FIGURE 1-1 TYPICAL WIMAX AND IP BACKHAUL APPLICATION ....................................................1-2 FIGURE 1-2 TYPICAL BROADBAND ACCESS APPLICATION ...........................................................1-3 FIGURE 1-3 PRIVATE NETWORK..........................................................................................1-3 FIGURE 1-4 EXAMPLE OF LINK ARCHITECTURE - SYSTEM COMPONENTS ........................................1-6 FIGURE 1-5 ODU FORM FACTORS.......................................................................................1-7 FIGURE 1-6 IDU-C FRONT PANEL.......................................................................................1-9 FIGURE 1-7 IDU-E - FRONT VIEW.......................................................................................1-9 FIGURE 1-8 IDU-E: REAR PANEL........................................................................................1-9 FIGURE 1-9 POE DEVICE - SHOWING THE RADIO ETHERNET PORT .............................................1-10 FIGURE 1-10 ODU WITH INTEGRATED FLAT PANEL ANTENNA...................................................1-10 FIGURE 1-11 FLAT PANEL ANTENNA ..................................................................................1-11 FIGURE 1-12 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS - PARABOLIC DISH...........................................................1-12 FIGURE 1-13 RADWIN MANAGER SCREEN..........................................................................1-13 FIGURE 1-14 SITE CONFIGURATION WINDOW WITH OPEN MANAGEMENT PANEL............................1-18 FIGURE 3-1 ODU MOUNTING KIT .......................................................................................3-3 FIGURE 3-2 CONNECTORIZED ODU - FRONT AND REAR VIEWS...................................................3-3 FIGURE 3-3 INTEGRATED ODU - FRONT AND REAR VIEWS ........................................................3-4 FIGURE 3-4 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE IDU-C .............................................................3-4 FIGURE 3-5 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE MOUNTING KIT AND DC POWER PLUGS .....................3-4 FIGURE 3-6 TYPICAL INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (WITH EXTERNAL ANTENNA)....................................3-6 FIGURE 3-7 NEW STYLE IDU-E: REAR PANEL ........................................................................3-8 FIGURE 3-8 IDU-C FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................3-9 FIGURE 3-9 IDU-C - A PERSPECTIVE VIEW ...........................................................................3-9 FIGURE 3-10 IDU-C LEDS .............................................................................................3-10 FIGURE 3-11 DU-C OWER CONNECTORS.............................................................................3-12 FIGURE 3-12 BEEP SEQUENCE FOR ANTENNA ALIGNMENT ........................................................3-14 FIGURE 4-1 LAN PORTS ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE IDU-C ...................................................4-2 FIGURE 4-2 PINGING AN UNINSTALLED AND UNCONFIGURED LINK................................................4-3 FIGURE 4-3 LOGIN SCREEN ...............................................................................................4-3 FIGURE 4-4 LOGIN SCREEN WITH COMMUNITY OPTIONS VISIBLE.................................................4-5 FIGURE 4-5 UNSUPPORTED DEVICE MESSAGE .........................................................................4-5 FIGURE 4-6 UNREACHABLE DEVICE MESSAGE..........................................................................4-6 FIGURE 4-7 OPENING RADWIN MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ...............................4-8 FIGURE 4-8 IDU-C FRONT PANEL LEDS ............................................................................4-10 FIGURE 4-9 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD............................................................................4-14 FIGURE 4-10 : INSTALLATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX ..................................................4-15 FIGURE 4-11 CHANGE LINK PASSWORD DIALOG BOX..............................................................4-16 FIGURE 4-12 LOST OR FORGOTTEN LINK PASSWORD RECOVERY................................................4-17 FIGURE 4-13 CHANNEL SETTINGS - AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION........................................4-18 FIGURE 4-14 CHANNEL SETTINGS - SHOWING AVAILABLE INSTALLATION RATES ............................4-19 FIGURE 4-15 TRANSMISSION POWER AND ANTENNA PARAMETERS.............................................4-20 FIGURE 4-16 ANTENNA CONFIGURATION DIALOG WITH OPENED TYPE SELECTION .........................4-23 FIGURE 4-17 ANTENNA PARAMETERS CHANGE WARNING..........................................................4-24 FIGURE 4-18 TX POWER LIMITS .......................................................................................4-24 FIGURE 4-19 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG.........................................................................4-25 FIGURE 4-20 INSTALLATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY ............................................................4-26 FIGURE 4-21 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER INSTALLATION.........................................4-27 FIGURE 5-1 MAIN WINDOW, WIRELESS LINK IS ACTIVE ..........................................................5-2 FIGURE 5-2 ETHERNET BANDWIDTH INDICATION ....................................................................5-8 FIGURE 5-3 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD.........................................................................5-11 FIGURE 5-4 CONFIGURATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX....................................................5-12 FIGURE 5-5 CHANNEL SETTINGS DIALOG BOX - AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION .........................5-13 FIGURE 5-6 SEARCHING FOR THE BEST OPERATING CHANNEL ...................................................5-14 FIGURE 5-7 CHANNEL SETTINGS WITHOUT AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION................................5-15 FIGURE 5-8 CHANNEL FREQUENCY OPTIONS .........................................................................5-16 FIGURE 5-9 CHOOSING AN OTHER OPERATING CHANNEL FREQUENCY ......................................5-17 FIGURE 5-10 TRANSMISSION POWER AND ANTENNA PARAMETERS.............................................5-18 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p x FIGURE 5-11 ANTENNA CONFIGURATION DIALOG WITH OPENED TYPE SELECTION .........................5-19 FIGURE 5-12 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG.........................................................................5-20 FIGURE 5-13 CONFIGURATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY..........................................................5-21 FIGURE 5-14 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER CONFIGURATION ......................................5-22 FIGURE 6-1 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ............................................................................6-2 FIGURE 6-2 AIR INTERFACE DETAILS....................................................................................6-3 FIGURE 6-3 CHANGING THE TRANSMIT POWER.......................................................................6-4 FIGURE 6-4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX..................................6-5 FIGURE 6-5 CONFIGURING MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC VLAN SETTINGS .............................................6-6 FIGURE 6-6 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION........................................................................6-8 FIGURE 6-7 CHANGE DATE AND TIME ..................................................................................6-8 FIGURE 6-8 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURED FROM AN NTP SERVER...............................................6-9 FIGURE 6-9 BRIDGE CONFIGURATION - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX .................................6-10 FIGURE 6-10 INVENTORY SCREEN .....................................................................................6-13 FIGURE 6-11 AVAILABLE SECURITY FEATURES.......................................................................6-14 FIGURE 6-12 CHANGING THE COMMUNITY STRING ................................................................6-16 FIGURE 6-13 ALTERNATIVE COMMUNITY DIALOG BOX ............................................................6-17 FIGURE 6-14 EXTERNAL ALARM CONFIGURATION ..................................................................6-18 FIGURE 6-15 TELNET MANAGEMENT SCREEN .......................................................................6-22 FIGURE 7-1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DIALOG BOX .........................................................................7-2 FIGURE 7-2 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX.................................................................................7-5 FIGURE 7-3 BASIC PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT ..........................................................7-6 FIGURE 7-4 A TYPICAL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT .....................................................7-6 FIGURE 7-5 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX .............................................................7-9 FIGURE 7-6 EVENTS LOG DISPLAY.....................................................................................7-10 FIGURE 7-7 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX...............................................................................7-12 FIGURE 7-8 ACTIVE ALARMS SUMMARY ..............................................................................7-15 FIGURE 7-9 ONLINE HELP FOR RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ..................................................7-17 FIGURE B-1 EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING THE ALARM CONNECTOR................................................ B-4 FIGURE C-4 MOUNTING ON A POLE..................................................................................... C-2 FIGURE C-5 MOUNTING ON A WALL ................................................................................... C-3 FIGURE D-1 ACCESSING THE LINK BUDGET CALCULATOR ......................................................... D-4 FIGURE D-2 LINK BUDGET SCREEN..................................................................................... D-5 FIGURE D-3 PRODUCT SELECTOR ....................................................................................... D-7 FIGURE D-4 RATE SELECTOR............................................................................................. D-8 FIGURE D-5 CALCULATION OF DISTANCE FROM SITE COORDINATES............................................ D-9 FIGURE D-6 CLIMACTIC C FACTORS.................................................................................. D-10 FIGURE D-7 CLIMACTIC C FACTOR DESCRIPTION ................................................................. D-11 FIGURE D-8 WORLD MAP SHOWING C FACTOR CONTOURS ..................................................... D-12 FIGURE D-9 FRESNEL ZONE ............................................................................................ D-13 FIGURE E-1 GROUNDING ANTENNA CABLES ............................................................................E-2 FIGURE E-2 GROUNDING A TYPICAL POLE INSTALLATION ...........................................................E-3 FIGURE E-3 GROUNDING A TYPICAL WALL INSTALLATION...........................................................E-4 FIGURE E-4 ODU SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING ..........................................................E-4 FIGURE E-5 TRANSTECTORS SURGE SUPPRESSOR ...................................................................E-5 FIGURE E-6 SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING AT BUILDING ENTRY POINT................................E-7 FIGURE F-1 ACTIVATING AN ODU - INACTIVE LINK .................................................................F-2 FIGURE F-2 AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX...............................................................................F-3 FIGURE F-3 THE LOCAL ODU AFTER ACTIVATION - PROBING .....................................................F-4 FIGURE F-4 BOTH SITES ACTIVATED AND AWAITING CONFIGURATION ...........................................F-5 FIGURE F-5 CHANNEL SELECT DIALOG BOX - ACS PERMANENTLY ENABLED ....................................F-6 FIGURE F-6 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHZ OPERATIONAL ...................................................................F-7 FIGURE G-1 TOP LEVEL SECTIONS OF THE PRIVATE MIB ......................................................... G-3 FIGURE J-4 MONTAGE SUR UN PYLNE ................................................................................. J-5 FIGURE J-5 MONTAGE SUR UN MUR ..................................................................................... J-6 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p xi List of Tables TABLE 1-1 AVAILABLE ODU PRODUCTS - RELEASE 2.6.50P ......................................................1-8 TABLE 1-2 RELEASE 2.1 IDU-C PRODUCTS...........................................................................1-8 TABLE 3-1 COMPONENTS OF AN IDU-C FRONT PANEL ............................................................3-10 TABLE 3-2 IDU-C FRONT PANEL LEDS ..............................................................................3-11 TABLE 4-1 PC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE RADWIN MANAGER APPLICATION...................................4-1 TABLE 4-2 RADWIN MANAGER: OFFLINE FUNCTIONALITY........................................................4-7 TABLE 4-3 DEFAULT SETTINGS...........................................................................................4-9 TABLE 4-4 FRONT PANEL LEDS........................................................................................4-10 TABLE 4-5 RADWIN MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY ...................................................4-11 TABLE 4-6 RADWIN MANAGER TOOLBAR..........................................................................4-12 TABLE 4-7 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD .............................................................................4-13 TABLE 4-8 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 TRANSMISSION RATES ...............................................4-22 TABLE 5-1 RADWIN MANAGER TOOLBAR............................................................................5-3 TABLE 5-2 RADWIN MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY .....................................................5-4 TABLE 5-3 LINK DETAILS ..................................................................................................5-6 TABLE 5-4 LINK SITE DETAILS, SITE A AND SITE B .................................................................5-7 TABLE 5-5 STATUS BAR INDICATORS....................................................................................5-9 TABLE 5-6 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD ..........................................................................5-10 TABLE 6-1 ODU MODE CONFIGURATION FOR COMMON ...........................................................6-11 TABLE 6-2 TELNET COMMANDS ........................................................................................6-20 TABLE 7-1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DATA AND DESCRIPTION............................................................7-2 TABLE 7-2 LINK COMPATIBILITY TRAP MESSAGES ...................................................................7-3 TABLE 7-3 EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE DATA....................................................................7-8 TABLE 7-4 ACTION OF THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS.......................................................................7-9 TABLE 7-5 RADWIN MANAGER TRAP MESSAGES..................................................................7-11 TABLE 7-6 ACTIVE ALARMS COMMAND BUTTONS ...................................................................7-15 TABLE 7-7 LED FAULT INDICATORS ...................................................................................7-16 TABLE 7-8 TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................................7-16 TABLE B-1 ODU-IDU CONNECTOR PINOUT.......................................................................... B-1 TABLE B-2 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT................................................................... B-2 TABLE B-3 IDU-C ALARM CONNECTOR (DRY-CONTACT) ......................................................... B-3 TABLE B-4 TERMINAL BLOCK 3-PIN -48VDC ........................................................................ B-4 TABLE C-1 BILL OF MATERIALS: ODU MOUNTING KIT............................................................. C-1 TABLE F-1 LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE LOCATIONS OF TDWRS ................................................. F-11 TABLE G-1 SUPPORTED RFC 1213 VARIABLES...................................................................... G-4 TABLE G-2 PRIVATE MIB PARAMETERS ............................................................................... G-5 TABLE G-3 MIB TRAPS ................................................................................................. G-18 TABLE H-1 OUTPUT ALARMS PINOUT .................................................................................. H-1 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p xii Welcome!
Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radio series, designed for the IP and WiMAX Backhaul, Private Networks and Broadband Access global mar-
kets. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 series is an innovation in high-capacity carrier-grade sub-6GHz radios, and designed to meet the requirements of current and next-generation markets and applications. RADWIN 1000/2000/
5000 also features software configurable antenna port activation enabling single (RADWIN 1000) or dual (RADWIN 2000) antenna port operation. The RADWIN 5000 series is identifier for software configured Point to Multipoint devices. The device configured as RADWIN 2000 has an advanced air-inter-
face based on MIMO, antenna diversity. The RADWIN 1000/2000 radio series offers unmatched performance and carrier-class quality with the following features:
Superior spectral efficiency at 5, 10, 20MHz and 40MHz channels in the 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands. High Ethernet capacity (up to 270Mbps at 40MHz channel band-
width.) Combo frequency products for maximum flexibility Advanced air-interface based on MIMO, built-in diversity and OFDM technologies Superior range performance Simple installation and management High Tx power The RADWIN 1000/2000 radio series supports the 2.4, 4.9, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands, and complies with international standards and regula-
tions (FCC, IC Canada). The 5.8 GHz spectrum band complies with FCC rule 47 CFR Part 15 subparts C and E. The RADWIN 5000 radio series supports 4.9, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands, and complies with international standards and regulations (FCC, IC Canada). The 5.8 GHz spectrum band complies with FCC rule 47 CFR Part 15 subparts C and E. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-1 Key Applications Chapter 1 The model RADWIN 1000 RW-1020-0150 / RADWIN 2000 RW-2020-0150 supports the 2.4GHz band and complies with FCC and IC standards. The RADWIN 1000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 2000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 5000 3GHz Band support the 3.5 and 3.65 GHz spectrum bands and comply with FCC and IC standards. Key Applications WiMAX and IP Backhaul The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radio series offers WiMAX operators and ISPs a unique, highly scalable and cost-effective backhaul solution. Designed to suit a wide range of topologies, RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is easy to install and maintain, enabling operators to quickly and efficiently expand their net-
works and introduce new services to a growing subscriber base. Figure 1-1: Typical Wimax and IP Backhaul application Broadband Access With RADWIN 1000/2000/5000, service providers can quickly and efficiently expand their networks, and provide high-capacity services that meet the increasing demand for high-quality, high-speed broadband. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-2 Private Networks Chapter 1 Figure 1-2: Typical Broadband Access application Private Networks RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is the ultimate solution for private networks such as enterprises, education, government and utility organizations that wish to own and manage their own networks and eliminate the costly recurring charges from service providers. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000's cost-effective solution enables a variety of orga-
nizations to connect geographically dispersed sites at ranges of up to 80km
(50 miles). Figure 1-3: Private Network Key Features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Some of the outstanding features of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radio series are as follows:
High Capacity The RADWIN 1000/2000 system provides a high-capacity link of up to 270Mbps at 40MHz channel bandwidth. Superior Spectral Efficiency RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-3 Key Features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Chapter 1 Built on advanced MIMO and OFDM technologies, the RADWIN 1000/2000 system provides a high-capacity link at channel band-
width of 40MHz. This channel bandwidth supports high robustness of the air interface under interference and harsh conditions. In coun-
tries where applicable, narrow channel bandwidth reduces the cost of the spectrum license. Advanced Air Interface The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system provides an advanced air-
interface based on MIMO, built-in diversity and OFDM technologies, resulting in an exceptionally robust air interface. Using the following technologies, the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 air interface is designed to ensure nonstop, high quality transmission, even under interference and harsh conditions:
Automatic Adaptive Rate (AAR) is a mechanism that dynami-
cally adapts the air interface rate by changing both the signal modulation and coding. Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) chooses the best channel by monitoring the available radio channels and dynamically select-
ing a channel which is best suited for transmission at any given time. Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) is a mechanism for error con-
trol during data transmission. When the receiver detects an error in the received information, it automatically requests the transmitter to resend the information. This process is repeated until the transmission is error free or the error continues beyond a predetermined number of maximum transmissions. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000's ARQ mechanism is optimized for time-critical traffic. Forward Error Correction (FEC) with very low overhead and algorithms specifically designed for the varying conditions of license-exempt frequency bands, ensuring fast, robust and error-free communications. High transmission (Tx) power of 29.95dBm The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system supports high Tx power, com-
pliant with radio regulations. High Tx power increases the system's availability and range, and enables the high performance with smaller antennas, thus reducing the total cost of the solution (lower CAPEX), installation and tower rent costs (lower OPEX). Superior range performance The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system supports high capacity at superior ranges. The Link Budget Calculator (appendix D) is used to determine the capacity and range according to the choice of prod-
uct, antenna, type of service and environmental conditions. Simple installation and management RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 systems are extremely simple to install and maintain. They are typically up and running in less than an hour. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-4 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Link Chapter 1 The RADWIN Manager application has full local and remote manage-
ment capabilities. The user-friendly SNMP based management tool provides full end-to-end configuration, event logging, and perfor-
mance monitoring capabilities. Enhanced Security The security features of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 include:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000's AES 128-bit integrated advanced encryption support provides enhanced air interface security for carriers and private networks. It ensures user data protection with one of the most sophisticated commercially available com-
bined encryption and authentication techniques, CCM/AES. This technique combines message authentication (preventing anti-
spoofing and replay protection) with commercial encryption, and complies with the IEEE 802.11i (phase iii) security recom-
mendations. CCM/AES uses a symmetric 128-bit encryption key (EK), and a nonce, and provides both message encryption and authenticat-
ing signature. The nonce mechanism enables the receiver to remember already received genuine messages and reject all replayed messages. Initial encryption and authentication is based on a user-defined master key (Link Password). While standard Wireless LAN encrypts only the Ethernet Payload, the AES encrypts both the source and destination MAC addresses. In addition to normal login access, Read or Write Community access is available at login RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Link The RADWIN 1000/2000 point-to-point solution is a wireless communication link. RADWIN 5000 is a point-to-multipoint topology solution. Typically each side of the link is comprised of an Outdoor Unit (ODU) and antenna and an Indoor Unit (IDU) or PoE device as shown in figure 1-4 below. The link is managed by the SNMP-based RADWIN Manager application. The IDU and the ODU are connected by a CAT5e cable that carries the ser-
vice traffic and power. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-5 The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU) Chapter 1 Figure 1-4: Example of Link Architecture - System Components The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU is the radio transceiver of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system. It supports two radios for MIMO operation. It is available with an integrated antenna (Integrated Antenna ODU) or with connectors for an external antenna (Connectorized ODU). The ODU may be mounted on a pole or a wall, and connects to the IDU or PoE device using a CAT5e cable. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-6 The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU) Chapter 1 The ODU comes in two form factors as shown in figure 1-5 below:
a. Connectorized ODU - Front b. Connectorized ODU - Rear c. Integrated Antenna ODU -
Front d. Integrated Antenna ODU -
Rear Figure 1-5: ODU Form Factors Integrated Antenna ODU This ODU has an integrated 370mm (1.2ft) flat panel antenna, with a gain of 23dBi. The ODU contains both the radio and the antenna as a single unit housed in a weatherproof case. Connectorized ODU This ODU has 2x N-type connectors for connecting an external antenna. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-7 The Indoor Units (IDU) Chapter 1 The ODU products available in release 2.6.50p are shown below:
Table 1-1: Available ODU Products - Release 2.6.50p Description Form Factor Frequency Bands and Regulations Part Number RW-2050-0150 RW-5550-0150 RW-2050-0250 RW-2020-0150 RW-1020-0150 RW-1030 3 GHz BAND RW-2030 3 GHz BAND RW-2030 3 GHz BAND Integrated antenna Connectorized for exter-
nal antenna (2x N-type) Integrated and connector-
ized antenna (2x N-Type) RW-5200-0250 RW-5550-0250 Connectorized for exter-
nal antenna (2 x N-type) The only available external antenna is, single bipolar. FCC/IC5.725 5.850 GHz FCC/IC5.250 5.350 GHz FCC/IC5.470 5.725 GHz FCC/IC4.940 4.990 GHz FCC/IC2.400 2.4835 GHz FCC/IC2.400 2.4835GHz FCC/IC3.650 3.700GHz IC3.475 3.650GHz FCC/IC5.725 5.850 GHz FCC/IC5.250 5.350 GHz FCC/IC5.470 5.725 GHz FCC/IC 5.725 5.825 GHz FCC/IC4.940 4.990 GHz For further information, see page 4-20, Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings. The Indoor Units (IDU) IDU-C The IDU-C has the service ports and provides aggregation of these services towards the ODU that transports them over the air. The IDU-C also provides power to the ODU. The IDU-C is a carrier-class 19 inch, 1U unit, providing two Ethernet ports, dry contact alarms and indication LEDs. It has two DC power feed connec-
tors. An AC to DC converter is available for powering the IDU-C from an AC source. The IDU-C is designed to be rack mounted. One IDU-C product is available in release 2.6.50p:
Table 1-2: Release 2.1 IDU-C Products Part Number Ethernet ports Power 7200-2000 2 Dual DC feed
-20 to -60VDC Form factor 19" 1U RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-8 Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices Chapter 1 Figure 1-6: IDU-C Front Panel IDU-E The IDU-E is a carrier grade, compact, half 19 inch wide, 1U plastic unit, providing up to two Ethernet ports and up to two E1/T1 interfaces. It offers Layer 2 support for Ethernet service and HSS support for collocated links. It is a low cost unit intended for both Access applications and Enterprise use. Figure 1-7: IDU-E - front view The IDU-E rear panel (right to left) has a 25 pin Dry Contact Alarms port. the two (or no) trunk ports, two LAN ports, an ODU port and finally a 3 pin DC power plug identical to that used on the IDU-C. Figure 1-8: IDU-E: Rear panel Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices The PoE device provides Ethernet service only, with power for the ODU. The PoE device is extremely compact, having only two Ethernet ports and a standard 3 pin male AC power socket. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-9 Antennas Chapter 1 Figure 1-9: PoE device - showing the radio Ethernet port Antennas An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig-
nal, in the form of RF power, is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa. The antenna gain and transmitting power may be limited by country regula-
tions. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 may be operated with an integrated antenna that is part of the ODU unit, or with external antennas connected to the ODU via N-type connectors. All cables and connections must be connected correctly to reduce RF losses. The required antenna impedance is 50. The Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 370 mm (1.2ft) flat panel antenna. The radio and the antenna are housed in a weatherproof case as a single unit. Figure 1-10: ODU with integrated Flat Panel antenna External antennas are available for the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 radios, varying in operating frequencies, form factor, size and gain, dual or single polarization. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-10 Antennas Chapter 1 The RADWIN 1000/2000 operating in frequency bands 5.3, 5.4, 5.8 GHz can utilize external antennas with RF feeder cables that produce 6 dBi mi-nimal assembly gain. The RADWIN 1000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 2000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 5000 3GHz Band operating in the 3.5 and 3.65 GHz can utilize external antennas with RF feeder cables that produce 13.5 dBi minimal assembly gain. Flat Panel Antennas The Flat Panel antenna shown in figure 1-11 below has an integrated or external configuration:
Integrated or External 1.2ft Flat Panel Dual Polarization Frequency Gain 4.9 6.0 GHz 2.4 2.7 GHz (Ext) 2.3 2.7 GHz (Int) 3.3 3.8 GHz (Int/Ext) External 21 dBi at 4.9 5.0 GHz 22 dBi at 5.0 5.15 GHz 23 dBi at 5.15 6.0 GHz 20 dBi at 2.4 2.7 GHz 22 dBi at 3.3 3.8 GHz 14 dBi at 4.9 5.95 GHz 14.5 dBi at 4.9 4.95 GHz 15 dBi at 4.95 5.15 GHz 15.5 dBi at 5.15 5.47 GHz 16.5 dBi at 5.47 6.0 GHz 13.5 dBi at 6.0 6.06 GHz Integrated 21 dBi at 4.9 5.0 GHz 22 dBi at 5.0 5.15 GHz 23.5 dBi at 5.15 5.725 GHz 24 dBi at 5.725 6.0 GHz 16.2 dBi at 2.3 2.4 GHz 17.5 dBi at 2.4 2.7 GHz 21 dBi at 3.3 3.8 GHz Size 1.2 x 1.2 ft / 371x371 mm Figure 1-11: Flat Panel Antenna RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-11 RADWIN Manager Chapter 1 Parabolic Dish Antennas External 2ft Dish Dual Polarization Frequency Gain Diameter Beam Width 5.150 - 5.875 GHz 4.900 5.850 GHz 3.300 3.800 GHz 28 dBi 25 dBi (3.5/3.65GHz) 2 ft / 620 mm H,V: 5.6 Figure 1-12: External Antennas - Parabolic Dish See the RADWIN products catalog for RADWIN offering of external anten-
nas. External antennas are also available from authorized antenna vendors. RADWIN Manager The RADWIN Manager is an SNMP-based management application which manages a complete link over a single IP address. It can also manage each side of the link separately. The RADWIN Manager application facilitates installation and configuration of the link between the ODU units. The intuitive, easy-to-use RADWIN Man-
ager has a graphical Microsoft Windows interface, and can be run locally and remotely. The RADWIN Manager provides:
Installation Wizard On-line monitoring of air interface quality allowing the administrator to monitor the service and status of each link Local and remote loopback testing On-line monitoring of equipment alarms and QoS Configuration settings On-line user manual and help files Link Budget Calculator for calculating the expected performance of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless link and the possible service configurations for a specific link range. The RADWIN Manager can easily be integrated with any NMS system. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-12 Accessories Chapter 1 Figure 1-13: RADWIN Manager screen Accessories RADWIN provides a variety of accessories to support the RADWIN 1000/
2000/5000 system:
PoE devices AC Power Adaptor Cables to connect the various system elements External Lightning Protection Unit Documentation set supplied with RADWIN 1000/2000/
5000 The technical documentation supplied with a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 includes the following items:
A Quick Start Guide for experienced installers A full User Manual - the document which you are reading RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-13 How to Use this Manual Chapter 1 How to Use this Manual This User Manual is divided into functionally distinct chapters reflecting the activities required to set up a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000. The division is shown in the following table:
Chapter/
Appendix Subject Audience 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D E G H I Site Preparation Site survey team Hardware Instal-
lation Link Installation:
The RADWIN Man-
ager Configuring the Link Field technician Installation technician Installation technician, System manager Site Configuration Installation technician, System manager Monitoring and Diagnostics Technical Specifi-
cations Wiring Specifica-
tions Pole and Wall Installation Link Budget Cal-
culator Lightning Protec-
tion and Ground-
ing Guidelines Installation technician, System manager Installation technician, System manager Installation technician Installation technician Installation technician Field technician MIB Reference System manager External Alarms Specification Combo Configura-
tion Tool Installation technician, System manager, Field technician Installation technician A Little Terminology In the field, a link typically has a local or headquarters site as for example in figure 1-2 above. Here the service provider is the local or headquarters site. The service recipient is the remote site. Where the link is completely internal to a corporation, the choice of the local and remote is just a matter of convenience. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-14 A Little Terminology Chapter 1 A link then, consists of two sites. In Broadband Wireless terminology, the local and remote sites are some-
times referred to as near and far, HQ and remote and so on. The site which is closer to the network core (often the local site) will be referred to as site A, and the opposite side of the link, usually closer to the end user, as site B. This choice is application-neutral and will be used throughout the manual both to describe the sites and their names as in the examples. The link is configured and managed using a PC, the managing computer connected to site A. (The precise requirements for the managing computer are set out in chapter 3, Hardware Installation). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 supports three connection methods for the man-
aging computer:
Local - a direct peer to peer connection between the Ethernet ports on the managing computer and the IDU or PoE device. Local con-
nection is always read-write. Network - the managing computer and the site A IDU or PoE device belong to a LAN and communicate through a router or hub Over-the-air - the managing computer connects to site B via the air interface The managing computer may be connected to the link through an IDU or a PoE device. In what follows, where ever we refer to an IDU it includes PoE devices unless stated otherwise. Typically, if we need to refer to an IDU as such, we will use a model name such as IDU-C. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-15 Conventions Used in this Manual Chapter 1 Conventions Used in this Manual Notifications Notifications consist of Notes, Cautions and Warnings. The purpose of a Note is to Note Draw your attention to something that may not be obvious or coun-
ter-intuitive Emphasize a special feature or peculiarity of the RADWIN 1000/2000/
5000 Offer an external reference for additional information Add a caveat that would not qualify as a full Caution or Warning (see below) Provide additional background to what follows Offer a recommendation Highlight an indication of something to watch out for Advise you if an action has side effects i.e. it may disturb something else that would be best left undisturbed Caution Warning Remind you of something that should be kept in mind A Caution is a notification of risk of damage to equipment or of service degradation A Warning is a notification of risk of danger to persons operating near the equipment Typographical conventions General Where a term is defined or introduced for the first time, it is shown in Bold-
face. You will have noticed this usage in the Terminology section above. Software The RADWIN Manager is a Microsoft Windows application following the user interface conventions of familiar Microsoft Windows programs. We would describe the chain of menu commands indicated in the following screen shot, like this:
Tools|Active Alarms|1 A RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-16 Windows Terminology Chapter 1 using Boldface for the menu labels and vertical bars to separate them. Similarly, mouse click items will be referred to like this:
Click Next to continue.
(A mouse click always uses the left mouse button unless stated otherwise.) Windows Terminology Look at figure 1-13 above. The main application display which you see consists of a frame-window with a menu bar, system icons and content. It will be referred to as a window, the main window or the Manager win-
dow depending on context. The top line of icons is the tool bar, and provides part of the menu bar functionality with a mouse click. At the bottom of the window is the status bar, a line of icons and text boxes. The central part of the main window consists of several panes: On the right, there are Radio Interference, Ethernet Service and the Frequency panes. The left hand pane (with the blue background) is split into three sub-panes. If you click Site A or Site B in the tool bar, you will be offered another win-
dow, which in turn displays on of several panels depending on which func-
tion you choose. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-17 Windows Terminology Chapter 1 Figure 1-14: Site Configuration window with open Management panel RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 1-18 Site Preparation Chapter 2 Planning the Link Site Overview Link site planning consists of a set of surveys, which must be carried out before any equipment is brought to the site. If for some reason, the out-
come of any of these surveys is negative, site re-location will need to be considered. A Site Survey consists of three stages:
1. Preliminary survey - The proposed link is analyzed in the office using a topographic map. 2. Physical survey - The locations of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 indoor and outdoor equipment are determined on-site. 3. Radio Frequency (RF) survey - It is recommended that the installation area be scanned with a spectrum analyzer, to identify RF interference so as to determine a clear channel for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 installation
(on-site). The Site Survey Introduction RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless links must be planned before installa-
tion. The designated installation site must be appraised to determine that the wireless system is able to operate efficiently and provide connectivity without signal degradation. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 offers a wide operating frequency range. A free frequency channel must be determined within the operating range, for opti-
mum performance. Recommended Equipment Stage 1: Preliminary Survey Topological map of the area RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 2-1 Stage 1: Preliminary Survey Chapter 2 Urban map of the area Compass Stage 2: Physical Survey Binoculars 100 meter tape measure Ohmmeter, to check ground connection Map Digital camera GPS device (optional) Compass (optional) Paper, pencil, and a clipboard Stage 3: RF Survey Spectrum Analyzer with Max Hold function and screen capture facil-
ity that can store multiple images, for documentation purposes RF accessories (connectors and cables) Communication devices (for example, cellular phones, or a set of walkie-talkies) Stage 1: Preliminary Survey A preliminary survey is necessary before visiting potential installation sites. As much detail as possible should be obtained about the two designated ODU installation sites and the area between them. To perform a preliminary survey:
1. Mark the two designated installation sites on a topographic map of the area. 2. Measure the distance between the sites; check that it is within the speci-
fied range of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000. 3. On the urban map, check for developed areas situated between the two installation sites. Pay attention to these areas when performing the phys-
ical site survey; there may be tall buildings, RF towers, or transmitters, which could cause interference to the link. 4. Check the area between the two sites for obstructions such as:
High ground - hills or mountains Lakes or large bodies of water. Water has a reflection effect on RF signals like a building. This type of reflection causes the received amplitude to be reduced. As a rule of thumb, the presence of a large body of water between the link sites may double the required antenna height. 5. Determine and record the compass bearings between both ODUs, rela-
tive to north. 6. If there are obstructions between the two sites, calculate the Fresnel Zone (see appendix D for details). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 2-2 Stage 2: Physical Survey Chapter 2 7. If the site chosen does not meet requirements, consider alternative sites. 8. Use the Link Budget Calculator (on the CD supplied with the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 or using the RADWIN Manager) to determine the expected performance. Stage 2: Physical Survey The physical site survey reviews the environment of the proposed RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 installation location, to ensure that the link sites are suit-
able for the wireless network. The results of the physical site survey should be recorded. It is advisable to go on a clear day, so you can more easily see any obstructions between the two sites. Note To perform a physical survey:
1. From the compass readings taken in the preliminary survey, find the azi-
muth (horizontal position) that the ODU should face towards the second ODU. 2. Using binoculars, locate any obstructions such as tall trees, high build-
ings, hills or mountains. Look for other RF towers between the two sites. Mark the locations of the obstructions on the map. 3. Determine the location for the ODU (having regard for existing rooftop installations and tower space). It should be above any obstructions, con-
sidering the Fresnel zone (see appendix D). 4. If you need to install the ODU on a tower, make sure that the tower is far away from overhead electric power lines. 5. Determine a location for the indoor equipment; it should be as close as possible to the ODU. At an existing site, there is probably an equipment room with cable-routing channels. The IDU - ODU cable length limit is 100m, in accordance with IEEE 10/
100BaseT standards. Note 6. Measure and record the path length of the cable from the ODU position to the indoor equipment room. 7. Determine the ground and lightning connection points of the installation. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU and IDU must both be grounded. 8. Using the Ohmmeter, measure and record the resistance of the required installation to the grounding point. The resistance must be less than 1O ohm. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 2-3 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements Chapter 2 9. Review the results of the physical site survey. Decide if the site is suitable for the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless network installation. If the site is suitable, continue with stage 3, the RF survey If the site is not suitable, survey another site Additional Outdoor Site Requirements The ambient outdoor operating temperature should be -35 to 60C (-31 to 140F). Additional Indoor Site Requirements The following requirements guarantee proper operation of the system:
For IDU-C units, allow at least 90 cm (36 ) of front clearance for operating and maintenance accessibility. Allow at least 10 cm (4 ) clearance at the rear of the unit for signal lines and interface cables The ambient operating temperature should be 0 to 50C (32 to 122 F) at a humidity of up to 90%, non condensing Stage 3: RF Survey The RF survey examines the wireless environment of the RADWIN 1000/
2000/5000 installation site, to determine whether there are available chan-
nels within the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 operating frequency band. An RF survey is performed using a spectrum analyzer. It is advisable to familiarize yourself with the spectrum analyzer before going out on site, specifically the Max Hold and Marker functions. You should perform the RF survey at both proposed link sites. The survey should be carried out during a busy time of day, to best judge the worst-case radio interference. Allow 2-4 hours duration for a good RF survey. It is possible to install the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link and use the RADWIN Manager to find a clear channel. Each frequency channel can be evaluated in turn. Achievement of a clear channel is indicated by the Quality bar on the Channel Setting window (see figure 4-13) becoming green. Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 2-4 Hardware Installation Chapter 3 This chapter sets out the requirements and procedures for the hardware installation and alignment of a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link in accordance with the prior planning as set out in chapter 2. It is intended to guide quali-
fied field technicians. Warning Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. RADWIN and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas. Safety Practices Preventing overexposure to RF energy To protect against overexposure to RF energy, install the ODUs so as to pro-
vide and maintain minimal separation distances from all persons. When the system is operational, avoid standing directly in front of the antenna. Strong RF fields are present when the transmitter is on. The ODU must not be deployed in a location where it is possible for people to stand or walk inadvertently in front of the antenna. Grounding All RADWIN products should be grounded during operation. In addition:
The ODU should be earthed by a wire with diameter of at least 12AWG. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user's responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 or Section 54 of the Canadian Electri-
cal Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge unit. It RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-1 Protection against Lightning Chapter 3 also lays down the size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU must be grounded to a Protec-
tive Earth as described in appendix E and in accordance with the Local Electrical Regulations. The earth lug on the IDU-C and IDU-E should be connected to the protective earth at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets. Further, you should -
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last Never connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment Ensure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground More detailed guidelines are supplied in appendix E. Protection against Lightning The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. All of RADWIN outdoor units are designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes. See appendix E for detailed installation instructions of lightning protection devices. General It is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer. Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecom-
munication lines, you should remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts. Use extreme care when installing antennas near power lines. Use extreme care when working at heights. When using an AC power source for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 always use the AC power adapter supplied by RADWIN. Use the right tools. In addition to standard tools required for any kind of ODU or antenna installation, RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 requires additional specific tools detailed on page 3-5 below. Package Contents The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 packages include the following items:
ODU Package Contents The ODU package contains:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-2 ODU Package Contents Chapter 3 One ODU - see figure 3-2 below for front and rear view An ODU mounting kit - see figure 3-1 below A CD containing -
the RADWIN Manager Quick Start Guide User Manual Label showing the MAC address and the alternative Community string. The label is self-adhesive. You should keep this label safe Link Budget Calculator Cable glands (to be used with the ODU-IDU cable) Figure 3-1: ODU Mounting kit ODU - Front View ODU - Rear View Figure 3-2: Connectorized ODU - Front and rear views RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-3 IDU Package Contents Chapter 3 ODU - Front View ODU - Rear View Figure 3-3: Integrated ODU - Front and rear views IDU Package Contents The IDU package contains:
IDU-C - see figure 3-4 below. 19 rack mounting kit - see figure 3-5 below Two DC power plugs for power cables - see figure 3-5 below Figure 3-4: IDU-C Package contents - the IDU-C Figure 3-5: IDU-C Package contents - the mounting kit and DC power plugs RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-4 External Antenna Package Contents Chapter 3 External Antenna Package Contents Antenna RF cable 1m (3) long; two cables supplied with bipolar antennas, single cable supplied with monopolar antennas Mounting kit Additional Tools and Materials Required The following is a list of the equipment and materials required to install RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 hardware. Tools and Materials Spanner/wrench 13 mm () Crimping tool for RJ-45 (if the ODU-IDU cable is without connectors) Drill (for wall mounting only) Cable ties Sealing material Cables and connectors ODU grounding cable 12AWG IDU grounding cable 18AWG ODU-IDU cable (outdoor class, CAT-5e, 4 twisted pairs, 24AWG) Hardware Installation Sequence The following steps are required to install the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system:
1. Mounting the ODUs, page page 3-6. 2. Mounting the external antennas (if used), page page 3-7. 3. Mounting the Lightning Protection devices (if used), page page 3-7. 4. Outdoor connections, page page 3-8. 5. Mounting the IDUs, page page 3-8. 6. Indoor connections, page page 3-12. 7. Aligning the ODUs/antennas, page page 3-13. See figure 3-6 below, which illustrates a typical installation of RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 with an external antenna. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-5 Outdoor installation Chapter 3 Figure 3-6: Typical Installation Diagram (with external antenna) The installation steps are detailed in the following sections. Outdoor installation Mounting the ODU The ODU can be mounted on a pole or a wall. In both installations, the sup-
plied mounting kit is used to secure the ODU. A mast-sited ODU typically uses a pole attached to the mast. Note A RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link operates in pairs of two ODUs with the same configuration. Both ODUs must be installed, and the antennas aligned for maximum throughput. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-6 Mounting external antennas Chapter 3 Warning Prior to connecting cables to the ODU, the protective earth terminal (screw) of the ODU must be connected to an external protective ground conductor or to a grounded pole. Only a qualified person using the proper safety equipment should climb the antenna mast Only qualified professional personnel should install or dismantle ODUs and masts To mount the ODU on a pole or a wall:
1. Ensure that the ODU is properly grounded. 2. Mount the ODU onto the pole or wall. Ensure that the unit is oriented so that the cable connectors are at the bottom. (If they are on top, water may penetrate into the unit causing damage.) 3. Refer to Appendix C, Pole and Wall Installation for detailed ODU mounting kit contents and schematics. Do not tighten the ODU to its mounting brackets until the alignment process of the antenna is complete. Note Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of the ODU or interference from man-made obstacles. Mounting external antennas If you are using ODU with an integrated antenna, skip to Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices below. The supplied mounting kit is used to mount the antenna onto a pole. The antennas must be aligned for maximum throughput. Do not stand in front of a live antenna. Warning To mount an external antenna:
1. To mount an external antenna ensure that the antenna is properly grounded and then mount the antenna onto the pole. Refer to Appen-
dix C, Pole and Wall Installation for detailed antenna mounting instructions. 2. Follow the mounting instructions supplied with the antenna. Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user requirements. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU is designed with surge limiting circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-7 Outdoor Connections Chapter 3 RADWIN recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to pro-
tect the equipment from nearby lightning strikes. Refer to appendix E for detailed installation instructions of lightning protec-
tion devices. Outdoor Connections To complete the outdoor connections:
1. Connect the ground cable to the ODU chassis as marked on the ODU. 2. Connect the antenna cable(s) to the ODU. 3. Connect the lightning protection device to the ODU (see appendix E). 4. Attach the ODU-IDU cable to the ODU RJ-45 connector (see appendix B for the connector pin-out) 5. Screw in the cable glands to ensure hermetic sealing of the ODU. 6. Secure the cables to the pole, mast or brackets using UV-rated cable ties. Indoor Installation IDU-E Installation The IDU-E can be wall mounted, placed on a desktop or take up one half of a 1U rack slot. The unit should be grounded, cabled to the ODU and con-
nected to power using the supplied AC/DC adapter. Figure 3-7: New style IDU-E: Rear panel Mounting the IDU-C The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 IDUs are all rack mounted, as shown in figure 1-6. A front panel keyed schematic of a rack mounted IDU-C is shown in figure 3-8 below. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-8 Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 3 Figure 3-8: IDU-C front panel In figure 3-9 we display a perspective view of the IDU-C:
Figure 3-9: IDU-C - A perspective view RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-9 Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 3 Further description of the keyed items in figure 3-8 is shown in table 3-1 below:
Table 3-1: Components of an IDU-C front panel Key Label Remarks A B C D E F G H I J K Indicator LEDs See figure 3-10. ODU Port 2 LAN Ports SFP Port Alarm Ports RJ-45 connector, see table B-1. Ethernet, RJ-45 connector, see table B-2 The IDU-C is SFP ready. Standard DB25 female connector, see table B-3. Label indent Place for adhesive identification labels Primary 3 pin Power Connector Standard 3 pins in line power connector, see table B-4. Secondary 3 pin Power Connector Standard 3 pins in line power connector, see table B-4. Grounding Lug Use the lug supplied Rack mounting holes Detachable Rack mounting brackets The Indicator LEDs (Item A in table 3-1 above) are shown in more detail in figure 3-10 below:
Figure 3-10: IDU-C LEDs RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-10 Connecting power to the IDU Chapter 3 The purpose of the LEDs is shown in table 3-2 below:
Table 3-2: IDU-C Front Panel LEDs Name IDU ODU AIR I/F SVC HSS Color Function Green Green Red Green Red IDU operational During power-up only Failure ODU-to-IDU communication link is operating ODU-to-IDU communication link is disrupted Green Orange Red Wireless link is synchronized During installation mode only Wireless link lost synchronization Off Off To mount an IDU (using figure 3-8 above):
1. If the rack already holds other equipment, ensure that it is properly grounded. Do not proceed with installation into a live rack unless it is properly grounded. 2. Attach the rack mounting brackets (K) to the IDU. 3. Bolt the IDU into an empty slot in the rack, ensuring that it sits securely. 4. Ground the IDU to the rack using grounding lug I. The IDU should be left permanently grounded. Instead of using the rack mounting brackets, the IDU may be rail mounted using the four screw holes on each of its sides. Warning Note Connecting power to the IDU The IDU-C has redundant power connection circuits (items G and H in figure 3-8 above). An enlarged schematic of the power connectors is shown in below:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-11 Connecting the ODU to the IDU Chapter 3 Figure 3-11: DU-C ower connectors The connectors are 3 pin in line female, with polarities (left to right) minus, ground, plus. To avoid damage to the IDU, always use an AC/DC adapter supplied by RADWIN. Ensure that the IDUs at both sites are powered up. Connecting the ODU to the IDU The ODU-IDU cable conducts all the user traffic between the IDU and the ODU, and also provides power to the ODU. The maximum length of the ODU-IDU cable is 100m (328 ') in accordance with 10/100BaseT standards. The ODU-IDU cable is supplied pre-assembled with RJ-45 connectors, at the length specified when ordering, or as a cable drum with spare connectors. If the ODU-IDU cable was not ordered, use an outdoor class, CAT-5e 24AWG shielded cable. See appendix B for Wiring Specifications. To connect the ODU to the IDU, route the cable from the ODU to the IDU, secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the ODU RJ-45 connector on the IDU (see item B in figure 3-8 above). Installing a Link using PoE Devices The PoE device is a very simple unit having a power input connector and two Ethernet ports. It is AC powered, and has a power LED. To prepare a link using PoE devices:
1. To connect the ODU to the PoE device, route the cable from the ODU to the PoE device, secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the P-LAN-OUT RJ-45 connector on the PoE device. 2. Connect it to AC power. 3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for the second link. Connecting User Equipment To connect user equipment to the IDU:
Connect user switch/router or any other compatible device to the IDU panel RJ-45 ports designated LAN (see item C in figure 3-8 above). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-12 Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas Chapter 3 Refer to appendix B, Wiring Specifications, for connector pinouts. Do not connect two LAN ports to the same network, or flooding may occur. Note To connect user equipment to the PoE device:
Connect a user switch, router or any other compatible device to the PoE device RJ-45 port designated LAN-IN. Refer to appendix B, Wiring Specifications, for connector pinouts. Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas You perform antenna alignment using the ODU's audible tone. To speed up the installation time, alignment of a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 system should be performed by two teams simultaneously, at site A and at site B. To align ODUs with integrated antennas or external bipolar antennas:
1. For external bipolar antennas: Using a coax cable with N-Type connec-
tors, connect the vertical polarization connector of the antenna to the ANT 1 connector of the ODU. 2. For external bipolar antennas: Using a coax cable with N-Type connec-
tors, connect the horizontal polarization connector of the antenna to the ANT 2 connector of the ODU. 3. Ensure that power is connected to the IDUs at both sites. 4. Ensure normal operation of the IDUs by the LED indications on the front panel. Provided that site A detects the signal from site B, the ODU starts beep-
ing 20 seconds after power up, and continues beeping until the ODUs are aligned, and the installation is complete. In the following steps, antenna refers both to an external antenna and an integrated antenna. 5. Direct the antenna of site B in the direction of site A. This is simplified if a previous site survey has been completed and azimuths are known. When aligning the antennas, do not stand in front of a live antenna. Warning 6. Make a horizontal sweep of 180 degrees with the site A antenna so that the strongest signal from site B can be detected. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-13 Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas Chapter 3 7. Slowly turn the site A antenna back towards the position of site B, listen-
ing to the tone until the best signal is reached. See the following figure for audible signal variations. Figure 3-12: Beep Sequence for antenna alignment Note Three beeps and a pause is 'best signal so far'
Two beeps and a pause is 'signal quality increased'
One beep and pause is 'no change in signal'
One beep and a long pause is 'no air link'
Any other signal does not relate to antenna alignment Long beep and short pause is 'signal quality decreased'
8. Secure the site A antenna to the pole/wall. 9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 for site B. To align two external monopolar antennas:
The ODU buzzer only works on the radio connected to the ANT 1 connector marked
. You will therefore need to use ANT 1 to align both antennas in turn. Upon completion of the alignment procedure, you may connect the two antennas to ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors. Note 1. Using a coax cable with N-Type connectors, connect one antenna to the ANT 1 connector of the ODU. 2. Follow the steps 3 to 7 above to align the antenna connected to the ODU connector ANT 1 on both sides of the link. 3. On both sides of the link, disconnect the antenna connected to the ODU connector ANT 1. Connect the other antenna to connector ANT 1 and fol-
low the steps 3 to 7 above to align the second antenna. 4. Secure the antennas to the pole/wall. 5. Restore one of the antennas to ANT 2 on both sides of the link. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 3-14 Chapter 4 Link Installation: The RADWIN Manager This chapter explains how to use the RADWIN Manager to install a radio link. Installing theRADWIN Manager Application Minimum System Requirements The RADWIN Manager application is distributed on a CD. Operating system specific PC resources required by the application are set out in table 4-1 below:
Table 4-1: PC Requirements for the RADWIN Manager Application Windows 2000 Windows XP Pro Windows Vista Memory 128 MB Processor P III 512 MB P IV 1 GB P IV Dual Core Requirements common to all systems are:
Hard disk: 1 GB free space Network: 10/100BaseT NIC Graphics: 1024x768 screen resolution with 16 bit color Microsoft Explorer version 5.01 or later Installing the Software To install the RADWIN Manager application:
1. Insert the CD into the CD/DVD drive of your computer. The CD opening screen appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-1 Starting the RADWIN Manager Chapter 4 2. Choose Install RADWIN Manager and follow the on-screen instructions of the installation wizard to complete the setup of the RADWIN Manager application. If the installation program fails to start, browse to your CD/DVD drive, chose the setup.exe program and run it. Any PC running the RADWIN Manager application can be used to configure a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link. Starting the RADWIN Manager To start the RADWIN Manager:
1. Connect the managing computer to one of the two LAN ports as shown in figure 4-1 below:
Figure 4-1: LAN ports on the front panel of the IDU-C If you are not using a direct connection as above, ensure that you have IDU to managing computer connectivity (e.g. through a LAN). 2. Check that you have connectivity to the ODU. You can do this by opening up a command line session (Start|Run and then type, cmd). At the command prompt, type RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-2 Starting the RADWIN Manager Chapter 4 ping 10.0.0.120 You should see something like this:
Figure 4-2: Pinging an uninstalled and unconfigured link Any other response from ping means that the ODU is not responding. Check your Ethernet connection and that both the the IDU and ODU are switched on and then try again. If you do not succeed, seek assistance from RADWIN Customer Support. 3. Dismiss the command line session. 4. Double-click the RADWIN Manager icon on the desktop, or click Start|Programs|RADWIN Manager|RADWIN Manager. The Login dialog box appears. Figure 4-3: Login Screen 5. Type an IP address for the ODU (if you connect through a network), or click Local Connection (if you are connected directly to the IDU port). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-3 Starting the RADWIN Manager Chapter 4 1. If you log in on Local Connection, but your physical connection is not local (i.e. anything other than a direct connection between the managing computer and the IDU), then any configuration you carry out may affect other links in the network. Warning 2. If you log in via an over-the-air IP address, you will receive a warning. If you reset the site to which you are connected to factory settings, you can lock yourself out of the Link. 3. Network login (IP address to the ODU) is recommended. The default IP address for the ODU is 10.0.0.120. The subnet mask is 255.0.0.0. Note The actual IP address is defined during link configuration (see Site Management: IP Address and VLAN on page 6-4). 6. Enter the password The default password is admin (see Changing the Log On Password on page 4-7). 7. If you are a user with Read-Write permission, click Options to enter the Community options. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is protected with Community passwords. A user may be defined with read-only permission or with read-write permission
(see page 6-14 for more details). Note Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-4 Login Errors Chapter 4 Figure 4-4: Login Screen with Community options visible If you are using the system for the first time, leave the default Com-
munity passwords, netman for read-write, and public for read-
only. If Community values were previously defined, enter them under Community in the Read-Only or Read-Write boxes. If you are a user with read-only permission, click the Read Only Mode check box. The RADWIN Manager main window is displayed (see figure 4-7). Login Errors Unsupported Device Attempting to connect to an unsupported device will result in the following error message:
Figure 4-5: Unsupported device message RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-5 Incorrect IP Address Chapter 4 Incorrect IP Address If the IP address chosen is invalid or the link is unreachable, the following error message will be displayed:
Figure 4-6: Unreachable device message In both of the above situations, you will see a warning graphic side the IP Address field. along-
Incorrect Password If you type an incorrect password in the Login screen, you will see a warn-
ing graphic alongside the password field. Continuing without an IP Address The RADWIN Manager provides limited offline functionality when there is no accessible IDU/ODU. It is primarily for setting managing computer related parameters and running the Link Budget Calculator. The offline func-
tionality is shown in table 4-2 below. The table does not show menu items grayed out. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-6 Changing the Log On Password Chapter 4 Table 4-2: RADWIN Manager: Offline Functionality Menu level Top
+1
+2 Function Reference File Tools Help Log Off Exit Change Password Events Log RADWIN Manager Help Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Information About RADWIN Manager Return to Log On dialog. Same as Log Off button Exit the RADWIN Manager. Same as Exit button Change the Log On pass-
word dialog page 4-7 page 7-10 Clear Events Save to File Clear local events log Save events log data to a file View online help version of the User Manual Calculator opened in default browser Appendix D Obtain system information page 7-1 RADWIN Manager build information Changing the Log On Password To change the log on password:
1. From the Tools menu, select Change Password. The Change Password dialog box appears. 2. Enter the current password, and the new password. 3. Click OK to confirm. Installing the Link: First steps At this point the main window of the RADWIN Manager should be displayed:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-7 Installing the Link: First steps Chapter 4 Figure 4-7: Opening RADWIN Manager window prior to installation A detailed field by field description of the contents of the RADWIN Manager main window may be found in chapter 5. The procedure required to make the link functional has three phases:
1. Link Installation - which we will detail below. Installation actually gets the link operational by setting the link parame-
ters. It uses a fixed channel at the lowest possible modulation, BPSK at 6.5Mbps and will work under the harsh interference condition. During the installation procedure, the definition of all parameters is automatically applied to both sides of the link. Note 2. Link Configuration - described in chapter 5. Configuration provides much the same functionality as Installation, but for a running link. A fallback to Installation mode is provided for situa-
tions which cannot be handled without resetting the link, such as antenna realignment and IDU or ODU replacement. The Link Installation and Configuration phases are both carried out with Wizards, which walk you through the processes. The Wizards are visu-
ally quite similar and will be described in detail below. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-8 Default Settings Chapter 4 3. Site Configuration - described in chapter 6. Site specific configuration for each side of the link is available at any time
- under a running link or under the restricted Installation mode. Site Configuration consists of a set of panels, which may be invoked indi-
vidually in any order, as needed. An installed and configured link can be returned to installation mode for re-
installation and configuration from last settings or from factory settings. Note Reversion to installation mode requires a complete break in the link service Configuration mode may vary the service throughput and quality, but without a service break Default Settings The default settings of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 configuration parame-
ters are listed in table 4-3 below:
Table 4-3: Default Settings Parameter ODU IP Address Subnet Mask Trap destination Default Value 10.0.0.120 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Manager Login password admin Link ID Site 1 Site 2 Link Site Site Link Password wireless-bridge Rate Adaptive Ethernet Configuration Auto Detect Radio Link Failure Actions No action Bridge or Hub mode Hub Mode, Aging time = 300 sec Community values Read-write netman Read-only public Front Panel LEDs on the IDU-C The front panel LEDs on the IDU provide basic information about link sta-
tus. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-9 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Chapter 4 Figure 4-8: IDU-C Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the indicators:
Table 4-4: Front Panel LEDs Name Color Function IDU With Ethernet only ODU AIR I/F SVC HSS Green Green Red Green Red During power-up only IDU operational Failure ODU-to-IDU communication link is operating ODU-to-IDU communication link is disrupted Green Orange Red Wireless link is synchronized During installation mode only Wireless link lost synchronization Off Off Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality The RADWIN Manager menu functionality is displayed in table 4-5. The Toolbar buttons are detailed in table 4-6. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-10 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Chapter 4 Table 4-5: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality Menu level Top
+1
+2 File Function Reference Return to Log On dialog. Same as Log Off button Exit the RADWIN Manager. Same as Exit button Run the Configuration Wiz-
ard. Not available in installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Runs the Installation Wiz-
ard. Not available in configuration mode Configuration Tools Log Off Exit Link Configuration 1 Configure
<Site 1 name>
2 Configure
<Site 2 name>
Link Installation Performance Monitoring Report Active Alarms 1 <Site 1 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
2 <Site 2 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
Change Password Change the Log On pass-
word dialog page 4-7 page 7-10 Events Log Clear Events Clear local events log Save to File Save events log file Preferences Local preferences dialog RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-11 Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Chapter 4 Table 4-5: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality (Continued) Menu level Top
+1
+2 Maintenance Function Reference Clear counters Loopbacks Disabled Disabled Reset 1 <Site 1 name> Reset <Site 1 name> ODU 2 <Site 2 name> Reset <Site 2 name> ODU Help RADWIN Manager Help Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Information About RADWIN Manager View online version of the User Manual Calculator opened in default browser Appendix D Obtain system information page 7-1 Manager build and system information Table 4-6: RADWIN Manager Toolbar Item Link Configuration Link Installation Site: <Site 1 name>
Site: <Site 2 name>
Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log off Exit Description Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link;
assigns text files for storing alarms, statistics and configuration data. This button is disabled until a link installation has been completed Performs preliminary configuration of the system. This button is disabled after the link is installed Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site A. Same as Configuration | 1 Configure <Site 1 name>
Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site B. Same as Configuration | 2 Configure <Site 2 name>
Obtain system information Disabled Closes the current session and logs off RADWIN Manager Exits RADWIN Manager RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-12 Installing the Link: Overview Chapter 4 Installing the Link: Overview The Installation wizard has seven steps as shown in table 4-7 below. Table 4-7: Link Installation Wizard 1 Wizard welcome 2 System parameters Link ID Site details 3 Channel settings - ACS Configuration 4 Tx power and antenna settings 5 Services - Adaptive or fixed 6 Wizard summary and completion RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-13 Installing the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard Chapter 4 Installing the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the RADWIN Manager main window, click the Link Installation button. The Link Installation button is only accessible if anten-
nas are properly aligned. If this box is grayed out, you should align the antennas as set out in Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas on page 3-13. The Installation Wizard opens:
Figure 4-9: Link Installation Wizard The bottom data area reproduces the corresponding data from the main window - which the above panel obscures. See page 5-7 for a field by field description of this data area. Click Next to proceed with the installation procedure. Installing the Link: Step 2, System Parameters The system dialog box opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-14 Installing the Link: Step 2, System Parameters Chapter 4 Figure 4-10: : Installation Wizard, System dialog box To complete Installation Step 2:
1. Enter a Link ID. (Link ID - must be unique for each link in the area). The Link ID must include at least eight alphanumeric characters. Up to 24 characters are allowed.You should use a Link ID composed of both alphabetic and numeric characters. Both sides of a link must have the same Link ID. Note 2. Enter a Link Name for the link identification. The default name is Link. You should change it. 3. Enter names for Site 1 and Site 2. The default names are both Loca-
tion. You should change them. Throughout this manual, we use A for Site 1 and B for Site 2. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-15 Changing the Link Password Chapter 4 4. Optionally enter a new Link Password. If the Link Password is incorrect a link is established but configuration cannot be performed and no services are available. A new link password may be obtained from RADWIN Customer Support or use the alternative password supplied with the product. (see for more details). Note The link password is peculiar to the link itself and should not be confused with the RADWIN Managerlog on password. 5. Click Next. The default link with a rate of 6.5 Mbps is evaluated. The Channel Setting dialog box appears. Proceed to Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings, below. Changing the Link Password The default password is wireless-bridge. Optionally, you can change the link password as explained here. To change the link password:
1. Click the Change button in the System dialog box. The Change Link Password dialog box opens. Use the Hide characters check box for maximum security Note Figure 4-11: Change Link Password dialog box 2. Enter the current link password (The default link password for a new ODU is wireless-bridge). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-16 Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 4 If you have forgotten the Link Password, click the Forgotten Link Pass-
word button. The following window is displayed:
Figure 4-12: Lost or forgotten Link Password recovery Follow the instructions to use the Alternative Link Password, and click OK to finish. You are returned to the window in figure 4-11 above. Con-
tinue with the next step. 3. Enter a new password. 4. Retype the new password in the Confirm field. 5. Click OK. 6. Click Yes when asked if you want to change the link password. 7. Click OK at the Password changed success message. Restoring Factory Defaults returns the Link Password to wireless-
bridge. If the link is inactive, then the link password may also be changed from the Site Configuration dialogs. See page 6-14. Note Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 systems have a feature called Automatic Channel Selection (ACS). In the event of sync loss, ACS chooses the first available channel in a list of monitored channels nominated in the Channel settings window of figure 4-13 below. A channel switch takes place sufficiently fast as to ensure no loss of service. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-17 Installing the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 4 Figure 4-13: Channel Settings - Automatic Channel Selection The default frequency for the product is shown. To select channels to be used by the link:
1. Select the main frequency from the Installation Channel box. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-18 Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings Chapter 4 Figure 4-14: Channel Settings - Showing available installation rates For version 2.1, channel bandwidth is set to 20 MHz and cannot be changed. Note 2. Click the check box if Automatic Channel Selection is required. 3. The Available Channels List contains all of the allowable channels for the link. Check the channels that can be automatically selected. Selecting a new channel causes the system quality to change. The Qual-
ity bar provides an indication of the link quality from poor (red) to good
(green) as shown in the bottom of figure 4-13 above. 4. Click Next. Installing the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings The Tx Power and Antenna Parameters dialog appears. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-19 General
. Chapter 4 Figure 4-15: Transmission Power and Antenna Parameters The choice of Tx power, antenna gain and cable loss determines the EIRP and is affected by such considerations as radio limitations and regulatory restrictions. Before proceeding to antenna installation details, the following background information should be considered:
General Each RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODU is made of two radio transceivers
(radios). The radios make use of algorithms that utilize both polarization and space diversity resulting in enhanced capacity, range and link availabil-
ity. The number of antennas (i.e. radios) used is determined by user config-
uration and by automatic system decisions, explained below. Dual Antennas at Both Sites Using dual antennas at both sites (single bipolar antenna or two monopolar antennas) enables the use of MIMO technology. With MIMO the system doubles the link capacity. At the same time, it keeps the same rate and modulation per radio as was used with single antenna, thus increasing capacity, range and availability. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-20 Single Antennas at Both Sites Chapter 4 For example with a dual antenna RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 can transmit at modulation of 64QAM and FEC of 0.83 and get an air rate of 130 Mbps, compared to 65 Mbps with single antenna. To work in this mode, each antenna port must be connected to an antenna, the RSS level in both receivers should be balanced and a minimal separation between the antennas must be maintained. (For example, by using dual polarization antennas a cross polarization separation is attained). Upon selecting Antenna Type as Dual, RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 automati-
cally doubles the air rates. RADWIN Manager indicates a case of unbalanced RSS between the two antennas. Single Antennas at Both Sites By selecting a single antenna at both sites the ODUs operate with a single radio that is connected to the ANT 1 connector. The second radio is auto-
matically shut down. Single and Dual Antennas In this mode one of the sites uses the ODU with a single antenna while the other site uses the ODU with a dual antenna. The advantages in this mode in comparison to using a single antenna in both sites are doubled total Tx power and additional polarization and/or space diversity. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 automatically switches to this mode if one of the ODUs is connected to a dual antenna or if the RSS at one of the ODU receiv-
ers is below minimal level. The air rates used in this mode are same as when using single antennas in both sites. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-21 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Chapter 4 The rates used by RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 are shown in Table 4-5 below:
Table 4-8: RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Transmission rates Radio Modulation FEC Air-Rate
[Mbps]
Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual Dual BPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM BPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Let:
maxAllowedTx Power denote the maximum Tx Power practically avail-
able from an ODU. It appears as Tx Power per Radio in figure 4-16 below. maxRegEIRP denote the maximum EIRP available by regulation. It will be determined by three factors:
per band/regulation per channel bandwidth antenna gain It appears in figure 4-16 as Max EIRP. maxRegTxPower denote the maximum regulatory Tx Power for the equipment, also having regard the above three points RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-22 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Chapter 4 maxODUTxPower denote the maximum Tx Power of the ODU, itself depending on the air rate used. Then, the following relationship must be satisfied:
maxAllowedTxPower min maxRegEIRP These parameters are controlled as follows:
AntennaGain CableLoss maxRegTxPower
... (*) To set Tx power and configure antennas:
1. Click the Configure buttons in turn to configure the antennas on both sides of the link. Each one offers a dialog like this:
Figure 4-16: Antenna configuration dialog with opened type selection 2. Choose the antenna type and required transmission (Tx) power for the first site and click OK. Repeat the process for the second site. The Tx power (per radio) indicates the power of each radio inside the ODU and is used for Link Budget Calculations. The Tx power (System) shows the total transmission power of the ODU and is used to calculate the EIRP according to regulations. To see the relationship between Tx Power (radio) and TX Power (system), note that so that if you double the power in milliWatts (for two radios) then dBm will increase by milliWatt log dBm log 3 10 10
10 2
. 10 Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-23 Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters Chapter 4 3. Set the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss. If do this you will receive a warn-
ing message:
Figure 4-17: Antenna parameters change warning The Max EIRP level will be automatically set according to the selected band and regulation. The EIRP level is the sum of the System Tx power and the Antenna Gain minus the Cable Loss. Note If inequality (*) above is violated, then the following warning window is displayed:
Figure 4-18: Tx Power Limits The precise relationship between the items in inequality (*) and the win-
dow of figure 4-16 is follows:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-24 Installing the Link: Step 5, Services Chapter 4 Required Tx Power (per radio) will be adjusted down to the lesser of the value entered and maxAllowedTxPower TxPower (system)is maxAllowedTxPower + 3 (for 2 radios) Max EIRP is maxRegEIRP. EIRP is maxAllowedTx Power + Antenna Gain - Cable Loss The table in figure 4-18 only shows rates where the maximum Tx Power is the limitation, rather than regulations. Recall that maxAllowedPower and maxEIRP are regulatory. In an unregulated environment, the only limit is maxODUTxPower. Note When you close the window of figure 4-18, the change you requested will not be honored, and you will need to try again. 4. When you are finished with Tx Power configuration, Click Next. Installing the Link: Step 5, Services The Services dialog appears:
Figure 4-19: Services and Rates dialog RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-25 Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit Chapter 4 For version 2.1, Ethernet Only is the only available service. You may choose a specific modulation rate or use Adaptive. To choose a modulation rate:
1.Choose Adaptive or one of the available rate (see page 1-4 for informa-
tion about Automatic Adaptive Rate). 2. Click Next to continue. The service is activated as show below:
Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit Figure 4-20: Installation Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-26 Installing the Link: Step 6, Installation Summary and Exit Chapter 4 The main window now reflects the installation:
Figure 4-21: Main window of the manager after installation To verify the installation:
Verify that the Radio Signal Strength (RSS) is according to expected results as determined by the Link Budget Calculator. Installation mode, as described above, may be re-entered using Configuration | 1 Configure Site A and Installation Mode the Site Configuration dialog. Some Installation mode functionality may cause a break in link service. Caution If you can accomplish link changes without breaking the service, always prefer to use Configuration mode, described in chapter 5. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 4-27 Configuring the Link Chapter 5 This chapter describes the link configuration procedure, which is performed after the installation of both sides of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link, as set out in chapters 3 and 4. Link configuration uses a Link Configuration Wizard to redefine the configu-
ration parameters and fine-tune an operational link. Both sides of the link are configured simultaneously. The following parameters are configured using the Link Configuration Wiz-
ard:
Channel settings Transmission power and antenna settings Service parameters System parameters Link Configuration: Getting Started The Main Window of the RADWIN Manager Ensure that the RADWIN Manager is running. The main window should look similar to that in figure 5-1:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-1 The RADWIN Manager Toolbar Chapter 5
. Figure 5-1: Main window, Wireless Link is Active Before starting a configuration session, make sure that a communication link exists between the two sides of the link. The Link Status indication bar must be green. In the Link Status panel, the Status field should show Link Active in green. The main window of the RADWIN Manager contains a large amount of information about the link. Before proceeding to details of link configuration we set out the meaning of each item in the main window. The RADWIN Manager Toolbar In configuration mode, the RADWIN Manager toolbar contains the following buttons:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-2 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu Chapter 5 Table 5-1: RADWIN Manager Toolbar Item Description Link Configuration Link Installation Site: <Site 1 name>
Site: <Site 2 name>
Get Diagnostics Clear Counters Log off Exit Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link;
assigns text files for storing alarms, statistics and configuration data. This button is disabled until a link installation has been completed Performs preliminary configuration of the system. This button is disabled after the link is installed Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site A. Same as Configuration | 1 Configure <Site 1 name>
Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site B. Same as Configuration | 2 Configure <Site 2 name>
Obtain system information Disabled Closes the current session and logs off RADWIN Manager Exits RADWIN Manager The RADWIN Manager Main Menu The RADWIN Manager menu, is shown in table 5-2 below:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-3 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu Chapter 5 Table 5-2: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality Menu level Top
+1
+2 File Function Reference Configuration Tools Log Off Exit Link Configuration 1 Configure
<Site 1 name>
2 Configure
<Site 2 name>
Installation Performance Monitoring Report Active Alarms Return to Log On dialog. Same as Log Off button Exit the manager. Same as Exit button Run the Configuration Wiz-
ard. Not available in installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Provides limited configura-
tion for site. Has a path to return to installation mode Runs the Installation Wiz-
ard. Not available in configuration mode 1 <Site 1 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
2 <Site 2 name> Shows active alarms for
<Site 1 name>
Change Password Events Log Change the Log On pass-
word dialog page 4-7 page 7-10 Clear Events Clear local events log Save to File Save events log file Preferences Local preferences dialog RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-4 The RADWIN Manager Main Menu Chapter 5 Table 5-2: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality (Continued) Menu level Top
+1
+2 Maintenance Function Reference Help Clear counters Loopbacks Reset RADWIN Manager Help Link Budget Calculator Get Diagnostics Information About RADWIN Manager Disabled Disabled 1 <Site 1 name> Reset <Site 1 name> ODU 2 <Site 2 name> Reset <Site 2 name> ODU View online version of the User Manual Calculator opened in default browser Appendix D Obtain system information page 7-1 Manager build and system information RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-5 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Link details pane The Link details pane on the left is split into three sections. The top section summarizes information about the link:
Table 5-3: Link Details Item Link ID Services selected Frequency Channel bandwidth Rate Link status The two lower panels show basic link site details:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-6 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Table 5-4: Link site details, Site A and Site B Item IP Address Subnet Mask Trap Desalination Monitor pane he monitor pane, is the main source of real time information about link per-
formance at both link sites. It includes the following panes (top to bottom):
Radio Interface, Received Signal Strength (RSS) in dBm Ethernet Service:
Ethernet Throughput: The numbers are the current calculated throughputs at each site. The colored bars (with numbers) indi-
cate the maximum possible throughput having regard for air conditions. Rx and Tx Rates: Actual Ethernet traffic received and transmit-
ted rates per site, in Mbps of Fbps. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-7 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Figure 5-2: Ethernet Bandwidth Indication Frequency box: It shows the link frequency. The color of the box indicates the status Green is an active link Red is an inactive link Magenta shows an authentication or compatibility problem Brown shows severe compatibility problem Events Log The Events Log, stores alarms generated from both sides of the link and is detailed in chapter 7, The Events Log. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-8 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 5 Status Bar The Status bar, displays the following icons:
Table 5-5: Status bar indicators Icon or Label Connectivity Purpose Shows if RADWIN Manager is communicating with the ODU. Connection mode to the ODU Connection available Over-the-Air connection - using the IP address of the remote unit. Local connection - direct connection to the IDU without using an IP address. Network connection - through a LAN IP Address Login IP address Normally encrypted link Encryption indicator Link password validation failed. The link is encrypted with default keys. Service and configuration are unavailable. Change the link password. There are several floating icons, which appear under specific conditions Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-9 Configuring the Link: Overview Chapter 5 Configuring the Link: Overview The Configuration Wizard has seven steps as shown in table 5-6 below. Table 5-6: Link Configuration Wizard 1 Wizard welcome 2 System parameters Link ID Site details 3 Channel settings 4 Tx power settings 5 Services 6 Wizard summary and completion RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-10 Configuring the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard Chapter 5 Since configuration functionality is included in the installation, we will briefly review the main steps and for most part offer references to the correspond-
ing installation step. Configuring the Link: Step 1, Start the Wizard In the tool bar of the RADWIN Manager main window, click the Link Con-
figuration button. The Link Configuration button is only accessible on a fully installed link as set out in chapter 4. The Configuration Wizard opens:
Figure 5-3: Link Configuration Wizard Click Next to proceed with the configuration procedure. Configuring the Link: Step 2, System Parameters The System dialog box opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-11 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-4: Configuration Wizard, System dialog box The System attributes may be edited and the Link Password may be changed exactly as in the corresponding Link Installation step on page 4-
14. Click Next to continue. Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Configuring the Channel Settings follows the same pattern as the Installa-
tion procedure:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-12 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-5: Channel Settings dialog box - Automatic Channel Selection Notice that the operating channel is grayed out. If you use the Reselect Channel button, to change it, you will be asked for confirmation:
If you accept, then the system will search for the best operating channel:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-13 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-6: Searching for the best operating channel The link will return to the status of figure 5-5 above with a possible change to the operating channel. If you work without automatic channel selection, the Channel Settings win-
dow looks like this:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-14 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-7: Channel Settings without automatic channel selection If you click the Operating Channel drop-down list, the following window appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-15 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-8: Channel frequency options Selecting one of the frequencies presented returns you to the status of figure 5-7 with the appropriate change. If you choose Other..., the follow-
ing window opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-16 Configuring the Link: Step 3, Channel Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-9: Choosing an Other Operating Channel frequency The right hand drop-down list (showing 5.800) allows you to fine-tune the frequency in increments of 5MHz within a range of 5.740 - 5.835 GHz. When you have completed making your choice, click Next to continue. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-17 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings Chapter 5 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings
. Figure 5-10: Transmission Power and Antenna Parameters If you chose to configure either antenna, you are presented with the follow-
ing window:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-18 Configuring the Link: Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings Chapter 5 Figure 5-11: Antenna configuration dialog with opened type selection So far, the procedure duplicates the corresponding Installation process on. If you choose a different antenna type and click OK, you will receive the fol-
lowing cautionary message:
In this context, entering Installation mode causes a service break until it is restored by running the Installation wizard. Caution If you are uncertain, do not do this without expert technical assistance. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-19 Configuring the Link: Step 5, Services Chapter 5 You may also change the Required Tx Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss. The procedure is the same as that set out in the Installation procedure on page 4-23. When you have completed making your choice, proceed to the Services window. Configuring the Link: Step 5, Services Here is the services dialog:
. Figure 5-12: Services and Rates dialog To choose Services, see the corresponding Installation procedure on page 5-20. Click Next to continue. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-20 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit Chapter 5 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit Figure 5-13: Configuration Wizard Exit Summary Click Done to return to the main window. The main window now reflects the configuration:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-21 Configuring the Link: Step 6, Configuration Summary and Exit Chapter 5 Figure 5-14: Main window of the manager after configuration RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 5-22
| 1 | Users manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.14 MiB |
Site Configuration Chapter 6 The Site Configuration dialog panels are used to configure parameters, which may differ between both sides of the link. The parameters configured using the Site Configuration dialog panels include (among others):
System settings Air interface - Transmit (Tx) power and antenna Network management including VLAN Date and time Hub or Bridge mode Security settings In addition, the Link Site Configuration panels include several information windows:
Inventory - link hardware and software model details External alarms indicators The Operations dialog offers a doorway to jump into installation mode reverting to factory settings. The Site Configuration dialog has its own main menu with the following extra functionality:
Backup configuration parameters to a text file Restore configuration from a previously backed up configuration file Enable/disable the site ODU buzzer Jump back into installation mode keeping current configuration set-
tings Configuring the Site Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site You can edit the configuration parameters for each site individually. The fol-
lowing functions are available from the left side of the dialog box. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-1 Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site Chapter 6 Figure 6-1: Configuration Dialog Box Functions on the left of the dialog box:
System Air Interface Inventory Management Security Date and Time Advanced Edit the contact person and location details. View the system details Change the transmit power, cable loss, antenna type and settings View the hardware and software inventory
(release numbers, model identification, MAC address) Configure the IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, the Trap Destination and VLAN Change the Community Values and the Link Password Set the date and time of the link from an NTP servers otherwise Choose Hub or Bridge ODU mode, set the Ethernet ports configuration, set the external alarm inputs, restore factory settings Functions at the top of the dialog box:
Backup Restore Save the current configuration to an .ini file Restore the link configuration from the .ini file created by the backup RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-2 Viewing Air Interface Details Chapter 6 Installation Mode Mute Return to Installation Mode for the entire link. Selecting the Mute check box before clicking the Install Mode button mutes the Beeper. Mutes the alignment tone in installation mode. Reactivate the beeper during alignment. To edit the Configuration Parameters:
1. Click the required site button on the main tool bar of the RADWIN Man-
ager OR Click Configuration from the main menu and choose a site to config-
ure. The Configuration dialog box opens (see figure 6-1 above). 2. Choose the appropriate item in the left hand list to open a dialog box. 3. Click Apply to save changes. In subsequent instructions, we will simply say Choose a site to configure on the understanding that the foregoing procedure is implied. Viewing Air Interface Details Click the Air Interface item in the left hand list. A window similar to the fol-
lowing appears:
Figure 6-2: Air interface details RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-3 Changing the Transmit Pow er Chapter 6 Changing the Transmit Power Each site can have a different transmit power level. To change the Transmit Power:
1. Choose a site to configure. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Choose Air Interface (see figure 6-3). 3. Choose the required Transmit (Tx) Power Level. 4. Click Apply to save the changes. Figure 6-3: Changing the Transmit Power The same considerations apply here as were noted in the Installation procedure on page 4-23. Note Site Management: IP Address and VLAN Configuring the ODU Address Each site must be configured separately, first site A then site B. To define the Management Addresses:
1. Choose a site to configure. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-4 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 6 The Configuration dialog box opens:
Figure 6-4: Management Addresses - Site Configuration dialog box 5. Choose Management. 6. Enter the IP address of the ODU in the IP Address field. If performing configuration from the RADWIN Manager, the IP address is that entered from the login screen. Note 7. Enter the Subnet Mask. 8. Enter the Default Gateway. 9. Enter the Trap Destination. This could be the IP address of the managing computer. The events log will be stored at this address. 10.Click Apply to save the changes. Configuring VLAN Settings VLAN Management enables separation of user traffic from management traffic whenever such separation is required. It is recommended that both sides of the link be configured with different VLAN IDs for management traf-
fic. To enable VLAN management:
1. Click Configuration from the main menu. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-5 Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 6 2. Choose a site to configure. If you are configuring both sites, choose site B first. 3. Choose Management. 4. Open the VLAN tab. 5. Check the Enabled box. 6. Enter a VLAN ID. Its value should be between 1 and 4094. After entering the VLAN ID, only packets with the specified VLAN ID are processed for management purposes by the ODU. This includes all the protocols supported by the ODU (ICMP, SNMP, TELNET and NTP). The VLAN priority is used for the traffic sent from the ODU to the managing computer. Using VLAN for management traffic affects all types of man-
agement connections (local, network and over the air). 7. Enter a Priority number between 0 and 7. 8. Change the VLAN ID and Priority of the managing computer NIC to be the same as those of steps 6 and 7 respectively. 9. Click Apply or OK. Figure 6-5: Configuring management traffic VLAN Settings Changing this parameter causes the RADWIN Manager to immediately disconnect.To avoid inconvenience, you should verify the change by setting the VLAN only to one ODU, and only after verifying proper management operation, change the other ODU VLAN setting. Caution RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-6 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 6 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID If the VLAN ID is forgotten or there is no VLAN traffic connected to the ODU, then reset the relevant ODU. During the first two minutes of connection to the ODU uses management packets both with and without VLAN. You may use this period to reconfigure the VLAN ID and priority. Setting the Date and Time The ODU maintains a date and time. The date and time should be synchro-
nized with any Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 3 compatible server. During power-up the ODU attempts to configure the initial date and time using an NTP Server. If the server IP address is not configured or is not reachable, a default time is set. When configuring the NTP Server IP address, you should also configure the offset from the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). If there is no server available, you can either set the date and time, or you can set it to use the date and time from the managing computer. Note that manual setting is not recommended since it will be overridden by a reset, power up, or synchroni-
zation with an NTP Server. The NTP uses UDP port 123. If a firewall is configured between the ODU and the NTP Server this port must be opened. Note It can take up to 8 minutes for the NTP to synchronize the ODU date and time. To set the date and time 1. Determine the IP address of the NTP server to be used. 2. Test it for connectivity using the command (Windows XP), for example:
w32tm /stripchart /computer:216.218.192.202 You should get a continuous response of times, each a few seconds apart. 3. Choose a site to configure. The Configuration dialog box opens. 4. Choose Date & Time:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-7 Setting the Date and Time Chapter 6 Figure 6-6: Date and Time Configuration 5. If entering an IP address for the NTP Server, click Clear, and then enter the new address. 6. Set your site Offset value in minutes ahead or behind GMT1. 7. To manually set the date and time, click Change and edit the new values. Figure 6-7: Change Date and Time If you used an NTP Server, you will see a window like this:
1. Greenwich Mean Time RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-8 Ethernet Properties Chapter 6 Figure 6-8: Date and Time configured from an NTP Server 8. Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog. Ethernet Properties Configuring the Bridge Bridge configuration is required in various network topologies, such as pro-
tection (1+1) and ring applications. The bridge configuration parameters are located under the Advanced tab of the Site Configuration dialog box:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-9 Configuring the Bridge Chapter 6 Figure 6-9: Bridge Configuration - Site Configuration dialog box ODU Mode This parameter controls the ODU mode with two optional values, Hub Mode - in Hub mode the ODU transparently forwards all packets over the wireless link. Bridge Mode - In Bridge mode the ODU performs both learning and aging, forwarding only relevant packets over the wireless link. The aging time of the ODU is fixed at 300 seconds. Changing these modes requires system reset. IDU Aging time This parameter controls the IDU aging time. The aging time parameter controls the time after which each MAC address is dropped from the MAC address learning table. The default value is 300 seconds. Any change to these parameters is effective immediately. Each side of the link can be configured separately. Note Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-10 Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode Chapter 6 The following table shows the appropriate configuration for several common scenarios. Both link sites must be configured with the same parameter:
Table 6-1: ODU mode configuration for common Scenario Standard (Default) Configuration for Ethernet Applications ODU Mode IDU Aging Time Bridge 300 sec Rapid network topology changes where fast aging is required Hub 1 sec Ethernet Hub Ethernet Bridge Hub Bridge N/A N/A Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode The ODU Ethernet port is configured to auto-detect by default and may not be changed. The ODU Ethernet port mode is configurable for line speed (10/100BaseT) and duplex mode (half or full duplex). An Auto Detect feature is provided, whereby the line speed and duplex mode are detected automatically using auto-negotiation. Use manual con-
figuration when attached external equipment does not support auto-negoti-
ation. The default setting is Auto Detect. You should not reconfigure the port that is used for the managing computer connection, since a wrong configuration can cause a management disconnection or Ethernet services interruption. Caution To configure the Ethernet Mode:
1. From the Configuration menu, choose the site to reconfigure. The Site Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Click Advanced | Ethernet. 3. In the Ethernet Ports Configuration pane, use the drop-down menu to choose the configuration. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-11 Setting the Maximum Information Rate Chapter 6 4. Click Apply to save the changes. It is possible to close the Ethernet service by disconnecting the Ethernet port. Note If you close the port, you may subsequently be unable to access the device. If this should occur, a workaround is as follows:
Connect the system from the remote site Connect via other Ethernet port (of the IDU) Power down the equipment and connect immediately after power up (the fastest way is to enter install mode) Setting the Maximum Information Rate The maximum Ethernet throughput of the link can be limited. The default setting is Not Limited (see figure 6-9 above), where the highest informa-
tion rate available for the link conditions and settings is used. To limit the Ethernet information rate:
1. From the Configuration menu, choose the site to reconfigure. 2. Click Advanced | Ethernet The Configuration dialog box opens. 3. In the Information Rate pane, use the drop-down menu to choose the maximum Information Rate. 4. Choose Other to define the throughput with 1 Kbps resolution 5. Choose Not Limited for the highest information rate possible for the link conditions and settings 6. Click Apply to save the changes. Displaying the Inventory To view the inventory data 1. Choose a site from the main menu. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Choose Inventory (figure 6-10). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-12 Security Features Chapter 6 Figure 6-10: Inventory Screen Security Features The Security dialog enables you to change the Link Password and the SNMP Communities details:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-13 Changing the Link Password Chapter 6 Figure 6-11: Available security features Changing the Link Password This item is only available when the link is down. Otherwise, it works the same way as the corresponding item on page 4-16. RADWIN Manager Community Strings The ODU communicates with the application using SNMPv1 protocol. The protocol defines three types of communities:
Read-Only for retrieving information from the ODU Read-Write to configure and control the ODU Trap used by the ODU to issue traps. The Community string must be entered at login. The user must know the password and the correct Community string to gain access to the system. A user may have read-only privileges. It is not possible to manage the ODU if the read-write or the read Commu-
nity values are forgotten. A new Community value may be obtained from RADWIN Customer Support for the purpose of setting new Community; the serial number or the MAC address of the ODU must be supplied. The RADWIN Manager uses the Read Community strings public for the site Al ODU and public-remote for the site B ODU. It uses Write Community strings netman for the site A ODU and netman-remote for the site B ODU. These are the factory defaults. Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-14 RADWIN Manager Community Strings Chapter 6 The read-write Community strings and read-only Community strings have a minimum of five alphanumeric characters. (bru1 and bru4097 are not per-
mitted). Changing the trap Community is optional and is done by clicking the check box. Editing Community Strings The Community change dialog box is available from the Configuration |
Security tab. Both read-write and read-only communities must be defined. On logging on for the first time, use the following as the current Commu-
nity:
For Read-Write Community, use netman. For Read-Only Community, use public. For Trap Community, use public To change a Community string:
1. From the Configuration dialog box, choose the Security tab. 2. Type the current read-write Community (default is netman). 3. Choose the communities to be changed by clicking the check box. 4. Type the new Community string and re-type to confirm. 5. Click OK to save. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-15 RADWIN Manager Community Strings Chapter 6 Figure 6-12: Changing the Community String Forgotten Community string If the read-write Community string is unknown, an alternative Community key can be used. The alternative Community key is unique per ODU and can be used only to change the Community strings. The alternative Community key is supplied with the product, and should be kept in a safe place. If both the read-write Community and the alternative Community key are unavailable, then an alternative Community key can be obtained from RAD-
WIN Customer Support using the ODU serial number or MAC address. The serial number is located on the product label. The serial number and the MAC address are displayed in the Site Configuration inventory tab. When you have the alternative Community key, click the Forgot Commu-
nity button and enter the Alternative Community key (figure 6-13). Then change the read-write Community string. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-16 Muting the alignment tone Chapter 6 Figure 6-13: Alternative Community Dialog box Muting the alignment tone The ODU alignment tone becomes audible as soon as power is supplied, and continues until the ODUs are aligned and the link established. It is possible to mute the tone during regular operation of the link. It must be enabled when performing the alignment procedure. To mute the alignment tone:
1. Choose a site. 2. The Configuration dialog box opens. 3. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Buzzer button. The button tog-
gles between on and off. The tone is disabled. To restore the alignment tone:
1. Choose a site. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Buzzer button. The button tog-
gles from on to off. The tone is enabled. Setting External Alarm Inputs The IDU-C has two external alarm inputs and two external alarm outputs in the form of dry-contact relays. The Alarm interface is located on the front panel of the IDU-C and is a 25-pin D-type female connector. see IDU-C Alarm Connector on page B-3, for wiring specifications and pinout. The user enables or disables each of the alarms and can configure the alarm RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-17 Managing Configuration Files Chapter 6 description text that appears in the alarm trap. The ODU sends the alarm within less than a second from actual alarm trigger. To set the external alarm inputs:
1. Open the Site Configuration Alarms configuration by clicking Configura-
tion | Advanced. Figure 6-14: External Alarm Configuration 2. Choose an alarm and set its mode to Enabled or Disabled 3. Enter a description of the alarms in the text field. 4. Click Apply to save. 5. Click OK to exit from the dialog. Managing Configuration Files Backup Configuration to a File RADWIN Manager allows you to backup configuration parameters of the local and remote units to the managing computer as .ini files. Each site is backed up in a separate .ini file. To save the configuration in a file:
1. Choose a site to back up. The Configuration dialog box opens. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-18 Restoring a Configuration File Chapter 6 2. Click Backup. 3. In the Save As dialog box, indicate in which folder and under what name configuration file is to be saved, and click Save. Restoring a Configuration File Configuration files (*.ini) can be uploaded from the managing computer. Such configuration files can be distributed to other units that use the same configuration. To restore a configuration file:
1. Choose a site to restore (from a previous backup). The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Click Restore. 3. From the Open dialog box choose *.ini file to upload and click OK. Backup files are specific to a site (IDU / ODU pair and Link ID). Caution Do not restore a backup configuration file to a site other than that from which it was originally taken. Resetting You may reset the link, preserving the current configuration, or reset to fac-
tory defaults. Resetting the link causes service disconnection. Caution To maintain the connection between the managing computer and the link, first reset Site B. To reset the link preserving current configuration:
1. From Maintenance on the main window, reset the remote unit. 2. From Maintenance on the main window, reset the local unit. To reset to Factory Defaults 1. Choose either of the sites. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. Choose Operations in the Configuration dialog box. 3. Click the Restore Defaults button. A message box asking if you want to restore factory default appears. 4. Click the check box if you want to keep the current IP address settings. 5. Click Yes to continue. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-19 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 6 Configuration with Telnet A Telnet terminal can be used to configure and monitor the RADWIN 1000/
2000/5000. To start a Telnet session, use telnet <manager IP>. For example, if you run Telnet as follows, telnet 10.0.0.120 you will be asked for a user name and password. The login user name/password is identical to the Community strings; Read allows display only, Read/Write allows display and set commands. Supported Telnet commands are shown in table 6-2. Note that some of the commands are model-specific. For example, TDM commands will not apply to Ethernet only and PoE based links. Table 6-2: Telnet Commands Command display inventory Explanation Displays ODU product name, Name, Location, hardware and software revisions, uptime, MAC address, IDU product name, IDU software and hardware revisions display management Displays IP, Subnet, Gateway, Traps table display link display Ethernet display tdm display ntp set ip <ipaddr> <subnetMask>
<gateway>
display PM
<interface:AIR,LAN1,LAN2,TDM1, TDM2,TDM3,TDM4>
<interval:current,day,month>
Displays State, Link ID, Channel BW, RSS, TSL, Frequency/ACS, DFS, Rate/ARA, Distance Displays Bridge Mode, Aging time, Port table (State, Status and action) Displays Clock Mode, Master Clock Mode, Current Clock, Quality[1], TDM table (Line status, Error Blocks) Displays Time, Server and Offset Set the ODU IP address, subnet mask and gateway The user must reset the ODU after the command completion Shows the performance monitor tables for each interface according to user defined monitoring intervals set trap <index:1-10> <ipaddr>
<port:0-65535>
Set a specific trap from the traps table (set trap 3 10.0.0.133 162) set readpw <oldpasswd> <passwd>
Set the read access password (Read Community) set writepw <oldpasswd> <passwd>
Set the read-write access password (Read-Write Community) set trappw <oldpasswd> <passwd>
Set the trap Community string set buzzer <mode:0=OFF,1 =ON>
Toggle the buzzer mode (0 off, 1 on) RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-20 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 6 Table 6-2: Telnet Commands (Continued) Command Explanation set tpc<power:Value between minimal TX power, and maximal TX power>
set bridge <mode:0=Bridging OFF,1=
Bridging ON >
Set the ODU transmit power. If a wrong value is entered, both min and max values shall be displayed in the error reply Set the ODU bridge mode (0 off, 1 on) set name <new name>
Set the name of the link set location <new location>
Set the name of the location Set contact <new contact>
Set the name of the site manager set Ethernet <>port:MNG,LAN1,LAN2>
<mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DIS ABLE>
Set the mode and speed of each ethernet port Reboot Help Reset both the IDU and the ODU. The user shall be prompt that the command will reset the card and that he has to reconnect the telnet session after TBD seconds. Displays the available commands RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-21 Configuration with Telnet Chapter 6 figure 6-15, below, shows the available Telnet commands via the Help command. Hello admin, welcome to ODU Management CLI!
Software Revision 2.1.00_b2070_Jun 5 2008
admin@10.0.0.120-> Type "help" for help. admin@10.0.0.120-> help display inventory display management display link display ethernet display tdm display ntp display PM <interface:AIR,LAN1,LAN2,TDM1,TDM2,TDM3,TDM4>
<interval:current,day,month>
set ip <ipaddr> <subnetMask> <gateway>
set trap <index:1-10> <ipaddr> <port:1-65535>
set readpw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set writepw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set trappw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set buzzer <mode:0=OFF,1=ON>
set tpc <power:Value between minimal TX power, and maximal TX power>
set bridge <mode:0=Bridging OFF,1=Bridging ON>
set name <new name>
set location <new location>
set contact <new contact>
set ethernet <port:MNG,LAN1,LAN2> <mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DISABLE>
reboot help Command "help" finished OK. Figure 6-15: Telnet Management Screen RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 6-22 Chapter 7 Monitoring and Diagnostics The RADWIN Manager application enables you to monitor the link, as well as perform diagnostic operations such as loopback tests. This chapter covers:
Link compatibility issues Retrieving link information Reinstalling and realigning a link Replacing an ODU Restoring to factory setup Performance monitoring Troubleshooting Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) The Get Diagnostics feature collects and writes all link and Manager infor-
mation (from both sites) into a text file. The file information can be used for diagnostics and should be sent to RADWIN Customer Support to speed up assistance. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-1 Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) Chapter 7 The following table lists link and system information that can be monitored. Table 7-1: Get Diagnostics Data and Description Data Description System Data General information about the system Link Information Information about the link properties Events Log List of recent system events Site Configuration Data about the site parameters Active Alarms List of active alarms Performance Monitor Network performance data over defined time periods Monitor Detailed event data record To get diagnostics 1. On the Help menu, choose Get Diagnostic Information. Figure 7-1: Get Diagnostics Dialog Box 2. Select or deselect the data options. If the file is to be sent to RADWIN Customer Support leave all options checked. 3. Click File Path to specify the folder in which you want to save the file and then click Start to save the information. The file is saved in the specified folder as Diagnostics Informa-
tion.txt RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-2 Link Compatibility Link Compatibility Chapter 7 Link Compatibility indicates the version compatibility using software traps. As new hardware or software is added to existing networks compatibility issues may arise. An incompatibility issue is indicated to the user by a change of color of the Link Status box on the Main Menu screen. Trap mes-
sages in the events Log indicate the problems or limitations and suggest upgrades when appropriate. The following Link Status messages are given:
fullCompatibility - different software versions were detected that are fully compatible. The message indicates that an upgrade is available. restrictedCompatibility - different software versions were detected that operate correctly. However, new features are not supported softwareUpgradeRequired - different software versions were detected allow-
ing limited operation. The message is, that a software upgrade required. versionsIncompatibility - different software versions were detected that are incompatible. You need to perform local upgrades. Table 7-2: Link Compatibility Trap Messages Link State Link State text fullCompatibility Active restrictedCompatibility softwareUpgradeRequired versionsIncompatibility Active - SW Version mis-
match Active SW Upgrade Required Not Active -
SW Upgrade Required Link Status Color Green Magenta
(Same as authen-
tication error) Site Description SW Upgrade Available Site Desc. Color Link Status Color Yellow Green SW Upgrade Recommended Yellow Magenta
(Same as authentication error) Brown
(Major) SW Upgrade Required Yellow Brown (Major) Red Local SW Upgrade Required Yellow Red Reinstalling and Realigning a Link It may be necessary to reinstall the link if the ODUs need to be realigned. Activating Install Mode causes both sites to go into install mode, causing disruption in service for approximately fifteen seconds. Note RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-3 The Link Budget Calculator Chapter 7 To reinstall the link:
1. Choose a site. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Install Mode button. A message box asking if you want to enter install mode appears. 3. Click Yes to continue. The system enters Install mode and the alignment tone becomes audi-
ble. 4. Realign the ODUs and start the Installation wizard (see chapter 4). The Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is part of the RADWIN Manager software and is found in the Help menu. This useful utility enables you to calculate the expected performance of the wireless link and the possible configurations for a specific link range including antenna size, cable loss and climate condi-
tions. For full details, see appendix D. Performance Monitoring RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Performance Monitoring constantly monitors traf-
fic over the radio link and collects statistics data for the air interface and Ethernet ports. It does so continuously, even when the RADWIN Manager is not connected. Two types of logs are recorded:
Monitor Log that records statistics on traffic rate and radio signal strength. Events Log that records when the rates fall above or below a pre-
defined threshold. Both the statistics Monitor log and events log can be saved as TXT files. The Monitor Log The Monitor Log records performance statistics for predefined intervals. You can save the monitor log to a text file, as well as display the information in an on-screen report. Saving the Monitor Log You can save the recorded Monitor Log statistics to a text file. To save the monitor log:
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-4 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Figure 7-2: Preferences dialog box 2. Click the Monitor Tab. 3. Select the file to save. 4. Click the check box to open the file for saving. 5. Click the button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder and under what name the monitor log file is to be saved. 6. Set the time interval for adding data to the file. 7. Click OK to save the file. Viewing Performance Reports The Performance Monitor Report displays performance views of each of the interfaces1. To obtain performance monitoring reports:
1. From the main menu, choose Tools | Performance Monitoring Report ... You are presented with the following window:
1. Ethernet performance is not collected from PoE devices. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-5 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Figure 7-3: Basic Performance Monitoring Report 2. Choose a report type from the left panel and click the Get Data toolbar button. For example, if you choose Site A, Air and Current, you will be offered a report looking like this:
Figure 7-4: A typical Performance Monitoring Report You can click the Selection Pane icon to toggle the side panel on or off. The other reports look similar. Here is a detailed description of the reports and their fields:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-6 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Several performance data occurrences are collected for each of the inter-
faces (ES, SES, and UAS), as well as Specific data per Interface type (e.g., TX and RX bytes for Ethernet). For the Air Interface, user defined thresholds data are collected. Refer to table 7-3 and table 7-4, in Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar below. Data is collected and selectively displayed based on three time intervals as selected by the Interval radio buttons:
Current (t=0) Daily 15 minutes Intervals RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-7 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Table 7-3: Explanation of performance data Data type Reported Value Explanation Generic PM Data Air Interface PM Data UAS Unavailable Seconds ES Errored Sec-
onds SES Severe Errored Seconds BBE Background Block Error Integrity Max RSL Min RSL Max TSL Min TSL RSL Threshold 1 RSL Threshold 2 TSL Threshold BBER Threshold Seconds in which the interface was out of service. The number of seconds in which there was at least one error block. Note that the notation of an error block is different per interface. The number of seconds in which the service quality was low (the quality is different per type of inter-
face and determined by the BBER threshold per interface). The number of errored blocks in an interval. A flag indicating that the data was valid. Note that the Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values were stored (e.g., due to clock changes within the interval or power up reset). The maximum of the receive signal level (mea-
sured in dBm). The minimum of the receive signal level (measured in dBm). The maximum of the transmit signal level (mea-
sured in dBm). The minimum of the transmit signal level (mea-
sured in dBm). The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the specified threshold. The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the specified threshold. The number of seconds in which the RSL was above the specified threshold. The BBER Threshold value counts the number of seconds in which the Background Block Error Ratio
(BBER) exceeded the specified threshold. Ethernet Interface PM Data Received Bytes The number of Megabytes received at the specified port within the interval Transmitted Bytes The number of Megabytes transmitted at the spec-
ified port within the interval. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-8 The Monitor Log Chapter 7 Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar You can use the toolbar to perform the actions described in the following table:
Table 7-4: Action of the toolbar buttons Command Button Action Get Data Gathers current performance monitoring data. Save Clear Save current performance monitoring data to a file Clear current performance monitoring data. Thresholds Set Air Interface Thresholds Close Closes the active alarm window. Setting Air Interface Thresholds Use the Thresholds button on the Monitoring Performance Report toolbar to set the Air Interface Thresholds:
Figure 7-5: Threshold configuration dialog box BBER Threshold This parameter counts the seconds during which the radio performance is below a user specified threshold. The threshold is measured as a percent-
age. The threshold can be set from 0.1% up to 50%. For links with Ethernet only service, 8% threshold is recommended. If there are no problems during the interval, then for that threshold, the recom-
mended BBER value should be 0. Since the system provides a lossless Ethernet service, there is throughput degradation in case of interference. The degradation is proportional to the BBER. RSL Threshold RSL Threshold can also be used as an indicator of problems in the radio channel. You can check the RSS by from the Link Budget Calculator results RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-9 The Events Log Chapter 7 during installation. A value of -5dB from the current RSS is recommended as a threshold. The Events Log The Events Log records system failures, loss of synchronization, loss of sig-
nal, compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events. Alarms (traps) are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the main window. The Events Log may be saved as a text file. The Events Log includes the following fields:
Sequential number (ID) Date and time stamp Message Trap source IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm. For complete information about traps and alarms see appendix G, MIB Reference, table G-3. The events are displayed in the Events Log in the lower part of the RADWIN Manager main window:
Figure 7-6: Events Log Display RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-10 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 RADWIN Manager Traps The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events, displayed in the Wvents Log. Table 7-5: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages Trap Message Severity Remarks Error loading trap catcher. Port 162 is already in use. Warning NMS will not catch any traps from target, some other application has grabbed this port Device unreachable!
Connected to <site_name>
<site_name> Site will be reset. Restore Factory Default Settings in process on Site
<site_name>
Error Check connectivity to target Information Information Information Factory Settings: The process was not finished due to connection issues. Warning Reset: The process was not finished due to connec-
tion issues. Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem to tar-
get Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem to tar-
get - Target will not be reset Cannot Write to Monitor file. There is not enough space on the disk. Warning Free some space on disk and retry Windows Error: <error_ID>. Cannot Write to Monitor file. Warning Operating System error TDM Counters were cleared for both sides Identical IP addresses at <local_site_name> and
<remote_site_name>
Information Warning The Product is not identified at the
<local_site_name> site. The Product is not identified at the
<remote_site_name> site. The Product is not identified at both sites. Product Not Identified!
The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the
<remote_site_name> site. Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Set up a different IP to each site NMS is incompatible with the target release ODU release is newer than NMS release. Wizards are not available. NMS will be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the NMS. (You will get this message as a pop up) The Manager identified a newer ODU release at both sites. Warning RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-11 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 Table 7-5: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages Trap Message Severity Remarks The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the
<local_site_name> site. Newer Version identified at the <local_site_name>
site. Warning Warning Newer Version identified at the <remote_site_name>
site. Warning Newer Version Identified!
Warning ODU release is newer than NMS release. Wizards are not available. NMS will be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the NMS Setting the Events Preferences You can define a color for the traps to be displayed in the Event Log win-
dow, according to the severity of the event. The severity is predefined. To set the trap color:
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears. 2. Click the Events Tab:
Figure 7-7: Preferences dialog box RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-12 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 3. Select the event type and click on the button. A color chart opens. 4. Select the desired color. 5. Repeat for all of the event types. To set the trap background color:
Click Background Color to change the text background. To reset the event colors:
Click Reset Settings to return to the default color settings. Saving the Events Log You can save recorded events in an Events Log text file. New alarms are automatically added to the text file, as they enter the Events Log. To save the Events Log:
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears 2. Click the Events Tab. 3. Select the file to save. 4. Click the check box to open the file for saving. Click the and under what name the Events Log file is to be saved, and click OK. button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder To store the Events Log, first define the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and trap address of the managing computer (see Configuring the ODU Address on page 6-4 for details). Note Reverting Alarm Messages Alarm messages can be reverted to their default values by choosing the Advanced tab from the Preferences dialog:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-13 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 Just click the Restore Defaults button, followed by OK. Active Alarms Upon setting a trap destination, applicable events are reported as active alarms to the user. The active alarms are saved and can be viewed in the Active Alarms window. To view summary of saved alarms:
From the Tools menu, choose Active Alarm Summary. The Active Alarms Summary window opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-14 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 7 Figure 7-8: Active Alarms Summary The following table provides an explanation of the command buttons Table 7-6: Active Alarms command buttons Command Action Save Saves the alarms in CSV or text format for further analysis. Refresh Reads the alarms from the ODU. Site Close Selects site for the active alarms. Closes the active alarm window. Remote Power Fail Indication Remote power fail indication indicates to one side that the other side has had a power failure. The failed site sends a final trap indication about the power loss just before powering off. A Dying-Gasp circuit identifies the power failure at a minimum interval of 20 milliseconds before the ODU or IDU powers off. During that interval a message notifying the power failure is sent to Site B. Alarm output number 4 indicates power failure at Site B. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-15 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Use the following table to troubleshoot LED fault indications:
Table 7-7: LED fault indicators LED PWR IDU ODU Status Remedy Off Check that AC adapter is connected to the IDU-E and the AC power outlet. Orange Check that the IDU/ODU cable is properly wired and connected. Red Check that the IDU/ODU cable is properly wired and connected. AIR I/F Orange Complete the installation procedure from the management soft-
ware. Red Check the ODU Antenna alignment. Check that the radio configu-
ration of both site A and site B units are the same (channel and Link ID). SVC Off Use the following table to troubleshoot faults in the system:. Table 7-8: Troubleshooting Symptom Remedy No power Ensure that power is connected to the IDU. Ensure that the ODU cable is properly wired and connected. No signal Complete the installation procedure from the RADWIN Manager Check the ODU alignment. Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B units are the same (channel and Link ID. Weak signal received Check the ODU alignment, reconfigure the link. Check the alignment tone sounds the Best Signal sequence. Replacing an ODU Prior to any action ensure that both ODUs have the same software version. You can see this on the inventory panels for each site. For Site A, click Site A | Inventory and note the ODU software version. Repeat this for Site B using Site B | Inventory. If either ODU has an old software version, perform a software upgrade. It is important to configure the new ODU exactly the same as the old ODU to avoid configuration mismatches, which will disrupt the link. An ODU may be reconfigured in several ways. Use the backup Configuration If a backup of the configuration is available, restore that configura-
tion using Site A| Restore. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-16 Restoring Factory Setup Chapter 7 Manual Configuration The new ODU can be configured manually according to the link con-
figuration. Remember to use the same settings for Link ID, chan-
nels, link password, IP addresses, and names. Restoring Factory Setup To restore factory setup:
1. Set the remaining ODUs back to the factory setup by using the Site A
|Advanced option. 2. Activate the second ODU and carry out a new Installation. Online Help Online help can be accessed from the Help menu on the main screen of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Manager. Figure 7-9: Online Help for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Customer Support Customer support for this product can be obtained from the local VAR, Inte-
grator or distributor from whom it was purchased. For further information, please contact the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 dis-
tributor nearest to you or one of RADWIN's offices worldwide (see RAD-
WIN Worldwide Offices at the beginning of this manual). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p 7-17 Technical Specifications Appendix A Configuration Architecture IDU to ODU Interface Radio Capacity Range Channel Bandwidth ODU: Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna or Connector-
ized for External Antenna IDU: Indoor Unit for service interfaces or PoE device for Ethernet only Outdoor CAT-5e cable; Maximum cable length: 100 m Up to 270Mbps at 40MHz channel bandwidth in the 5.3/5.4 IC and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands Up to 130Mbps at 20MHz channel bandwidth in the 3.5/3.6 GHz spectrum bands Up to 120 km / 75 miles 5, 10, and 20 MHz 40 MHz in the 5.3/5.4 IC and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p A-1 Radio Appendix A Frequency Bands Band Regulations 5.725 5.850 GHz FCC / IC 5.725 5.825 GHz FCC(UNII)/IC 5.250 5.350 GHz (exclud-
ing 40 MHz channel band-
width and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) FCC 5.250 5.350 GHz (including 40 MHz channel bandwidth and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) IC 5.470 5.725 GHz (exclud-
ing 40 MHz channel band-
width and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) FCC 5.470 5.725 GHz (including 40 MHz channel bandwidth and 6dBi antenna assembly gain) IC 4.940 4.990 GHz 2.400 2.4835 GHz FCC 3.650 3.700 GHz 3.475 3.650 GHz IC Band Max Tx Power Antenna 5.725 5.850 GHz 29.95 dBm 29.95 dBm 29.95 dBm 23 dBm 20 dBm 28 dBm 28 dBi Dish 24 dBi Integral Flat 23 dBi External Flat 14 dBi External Flat 16.5 dBi External Flat 8 dBi assembly RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p A-2 Radio Appendix A Band Max Tx Power Antenna 1.9 dBm 6.5 dBm 7.5 dBm 28 dBi Dish 23.5 dBi Integral Flat 22.5 dBi External Flat 5.250 5.350 GHz 23.5dBm 6 dBi assembly 7.4 dBm 7.4 dBm 23.5 dBm 1.6 dBm 6.3 dBm 7.3 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 15.5 dBi External Flat 6 dBi assembly 28 dBi Dish 23.5 dBi Integral Flat 22.5 dBi External Flat 5.470 5.725 GHz 23.7 dBm 6 dBi assembly 7.2 dBm 7.2 dBm 23.7 dBm 23.8 dBm 26.4 dBm 26.4 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 16.5 dBi External Flat 6 dBi assembly 28 dBi Dish 22.5 dBi Integral Flat 23.5 dBi External Flat 5.725 5.825 GHz 29.4 dBm 6 dBi assembly 24.4 dBm 24 dBm 29.3 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 16.5 dBi External Flat 6 dBi assembly 21 dBi Integral Flat 21 dBi External Flat 4.940 4.990 GHz 31 dBm 28 dBi Dish 2.400 2.4835 GHz 25.5 dBm(*) 25.5 dBm(*) 23.7 dBm 23.7 dBm 3.475 3.650 GHz 26 dBm 14 dBi External Flat 15 dBi External Flat 20 dBi External Flat 17.5 dBi Integral Flat 20 dBi External Flat 17.5 dBi Integral Flat 21 dBi Integral Flat 22 dBi External Flat 24 dBi Dish 13 dBi External Flat RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p A-3 Radio Appendix A Band Max Tx Power Antenna 26 dBm 3.650 3.700 GHz 20 dBm 17 dBm 24 dBm 13.5 dBi assembly 13 dBi External Flat 21 dBi Integral Flat 22 dBi External Flat 24 dBi Dish 17 dBi assembly
(*) Relevant for RADWIN 1000 RW-1020-0150 / RADWIN 2000 RW-2020-
0150 models only Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, and 20 MHz, (10MHz not supported in the 5.8 GHz band) Radio Modulation 2x2 MIMO-OFDM (BPSK/QPSK/16QAM/64QAM) Adaptive Modulation &
Coding Supported Automatic Channel Selection Supported Radio Regulation FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart C, E, Part 90 Subpart Y, Z IC (Canada) RSS-210, RSS-111, RSS-192, RSS-197 Duplex Technology TDD Error Correction FEC k = 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 Encryption AES 128 Rate Single Antenna
[Mbps]
Rate Single Antenna in the 5.8 GHz spectrum band
[Mbps]
Rate Dual Antenna [Mbps]
Rate Dual Antenna in the 5.8 GHz spectrum band
[Mbps]
Modulation FEC [k=]
Max Tx Power [dBm]
Sensitivity (dBm) @BER
<10e-11 (20MHz) 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13.5 13 27 BPSK 1/2
-88 27 26 54 40.5 39 81 54 52 81 108 121.5 135 78 104 117 130 108 162 216 243 270 QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 1/2 25
-86 3/4 1/2 24 3/4 21 2/3 19 3/4 5/6 18
-83
-81
-80
-72
-70
-67 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p A-4 Ethernet Interface Ethernet Interface Throughput Number of Ethernet ports Type Framing/Coding Line Impedance VLAN Support Connector Maximum Frame Size Bridge Latency Appendix A Up to 270Mbps in the 5.3/5.4 IC and 5.8 GHz spectrum bands IDU-C and E: 2; PoE Device: 1 10/100BaseT with Auto-Negotiation (IEEE 802.3u) IEEE 802.3 100 Transparent RJ-45 2048 Bytes Layer 2, self-learning of up to 2047 MAC addresses (IEEE 802.1Q), hub/Bridge selectable mode 3 msec (typical) Management Management Application RADWIN Manager Protocol SNMP and Telnet Mechanical Dimensions Power ODU with Integrated Antenna: 37.1/14.84(W) x 37.1/
14.84(H) x 9.00/3.6(D) cm/in; 3.5 kg / 7 lbs ODU Connectorized: 18.0/7.2(W) x 27.0/10.8(H) x 5.5/
2.2(D) cm/in; 1.5 kg / 3.0 lbs IDU-C: 43.6/17.2(W) x 4.5/1.7(H) x 21/8.3(D) cm; 1.5 kg /
3.3 lbs IDU-E: 22/8.7(W) x 4.4/1.7(H) x 17/6.7(D) cm/in; 0.5 Kg /
1.1 lbs Power Feeding Dual feeding, -20 to -60 VDC (AC/DC converter is available) Power Consumption
< 35 W (IDU+ODU) Environmental Operating Temperatures Humidity ODU: -35C to +60C / -31F to +140F IDU-C: 0C to +50C / 32F to +122F IDU-E: -5C to 45C / 32F to 122F ODU: Up to 100% non-condensing, IP67 IDU: 90% non-condensing RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p A-5 Safety Safety FCC/IC (cTUVus) UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA 60950-1 C22.2 Appendix A ETSI EMC FCC ETSI CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC AS/NZS Air Interface EN/IEC 60950-1 CFR47 Class B, Part15, Subpart B EN 300 386 (2005), EN 301 489-1 (2001), EN 301 489-4
(2002) CISPR 22-02 CISPR 22:2002 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is available in several different frequency band ranges that comply with ETSI, FCC and IC regulations. The RADWIN 1000 RW-1020-0150 / RADWIN 2000 RW-2020-0150 is avail-
able only in the 2.4GHz frequency band range that complies with FCC and IC regulations. The RADWIN 1000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 2000 3GHz Band / RADWIN 5000 3GHz Band support the 3.5 / 3.6 GHz frequency bands and comply with FCC and IC regulations. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p A-6 Wiring Specifications Appendix B ODU-IDU Cable The ODU-IDU cable is shielded/outdoor class CAT-5e, 4 twisted-pair 24 AWG terminated with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. A cable gland on the ODU side provides hermetic sealing. The following table shows the connector pinout:
Table B-1: ODU-IDU Connector Pinout Function Color IDU RJ-45 ODU RJ-45 Ethernet (RxN) White/Green Ethernet (RxT) Green Ethernet (TxT) White/Orange Ethernet (TxN) Orange Power (+) Power (+) Power () Power () Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown 1 twisted 2 pair 3 twisted 6 pair 4 twisted 5 pair 7 twisted 8 pair 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 User Port Connectors LAN Port The LAN 10/100BaseT interface terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in accordance to table B-2. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p B-1 LAN Port Appendix B Table B-2: Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout Pin Signal Function 1 2 3 6 TD (+) TD () RD (+) RD () Transmit Data
(positive) Transmit Data
(negative) Receive Data
(positive) Receive Data
(negative) RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p B-2 IDU-C Alarm Connector Appendix B IDU-C Alarm Connector The IDU-C Alarm interface is a 25 pin D type female connector. Its pinout is listed in table B-3. Table B-3: IDU-C Alarm Connector (Dry-Contact) I/O Description Pin Input 1 Positive Input 1 Negative Input 2 Positive Input 2 Negative Input 3 Positive Input 3 Negative Input 4 Positive Input 4 Negative Output 1 Normally Open Output 1 Common Output 1 Normally Closed Output 2 Normally Open Output 2 Common Output 2 Normally Closed Output 3 Normally Open Output 3 Common Output 3 Normally Closed Output 4 Normally Open Output 4 Common Output 4 Normally Closed 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 The following diagram describes how to connect external input and output alarms. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p B-3 IDU-C Alarm Connector Appendix B Note Use an external current limit resistor to limit the current at the output relays to 1 Ampere. Such resistor is not required if the equipment connected to the IDU supports current limiting to 1 Amp. The voltage of the input alarm must be within the range of -10 to -50 VDC. Figure B-1: Example for connecting the alarm connector DC Power Terminal Table B-4: Terminal Block 3-pin -48VDC Function Pin
Right Chassis Center Left RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p B-4 Pole and Wall Installation Appendix C ODU Mounting Kit Contents Table C-1: Bill of Materials: ODU mounting kit Item Qty Large Clamp (see figure C-1) Small Clamp (see figure C-2) Arm (see figure C-3) Screw hex head M8x40 Screw hex head M8x70 Washer flat M8 Washer spring M8 M8 Nuts 1 1 1 4 2 4 3 2 Figure C-1: Large Clamp Figure C-2: Small Clamp Figure C-3: Arm RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p C-1 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a pole Appendix C Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a pole Figure C-4: Mounting on a pole RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p C-2 Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a Wall Appendix C Mounting RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 on a Wall Figure C-5: Mounting on a Wall Mounting an External Antenna Optional external antennas can be mounted on a pole. The external mount-
ing kit varies according to the specific antenna. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p C-3 Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Overview The Link Budget Calculator is a utility for calculating the expected perfor-
mance of the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 wireless link and the possible con-
figurations for a specific link range. The utility allows you to calculate the expected RSS of the link, and find the type of services and their effective throughput as a function of the link range and deployment conditions. User Input You are required to enter or choose the following parameters. Depending on the product, some of the parameters have a default value that cannot be changed. Product (or Regulation and Band) Tx Power (maximum Tx power per modulation is validated) Channel Bandwidth (fixed to 20 MHz for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000) Antenna Type (cannot be changed for ODU with integrated antenna) Antenna Gain per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna) Cable Loss per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna) Required Fade Margin Rate (and Adaptive check box) Service Type (Ethernet Only for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 version 2.1) Required Range Link Budget Calculator Internal Data For each product (or Regulation and Band) the calculator stores the follow-
ing data required for link budget calculations:
Maximum Transmit power (per modulation) Receiver Sensitivity (per modulation) for Ethernet service and for TDM services at various BER RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-1 Calculations Appendix D Maximum linear input power (used to calculate minimum distance) Antenna gain and cable loss for ODU with integrated antenna Available Channel Bandwidths Calculations EIRP EIRP
TxPower AntennaGainSiteA CableLossSiteA
Expected RSS and Fade Margin ExpectedRSS
EIRP PathLoss AntennaGainSiteB CableLossSiteB where:
Site A is the transmitting site Site B is the receiving site PathLoss is calculated according to the free space model, PathLoss frequencyMHz 32.45 log 20 20
10 log RequiredRangeKm 10 ExpectedFadeM in where Sensitivity is dependent on air-rate. arg
Sensitivity ExpectedRSS Min and Max Range MinRange is the shortest range for which ExpectedRSS MaxInputPower MaxRange (with Adaptive checked) is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS ship is true. In a link with adaptive rate this will be the actual behavior. MaxRange (for a given air-rate) is the largest range for which ExpectedRSS Sensitivity RequiredFadeM in Sensitivity per air-rate. arg
, at the highest air-rate for which this relation-
. Service The Ethernet throughput is calculated according to internal product algo-
rithms. Availability The Service Availability calculation is based on the Vigants Barnett method which predicts the downtime probability based on a climate factor (C fac-
tor). RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-2 Antenna Height Appendix D Availability 10 7 ExpectedFadeM in arg
6 10 10 Cfactor frequencyGHz RequiredRangeKM 3 Antenna Height The recommended antenna height required for line of sight is calculated as the sum the Fresnel zone height and the boresight height. See About the Fresnel Zone below. The Fresnel zone height is calculated as:
0.6 300 ExpectedRange
frequencyGHz
ExpectedRange
----------------------------------------- ExpectedRange
2
2 2 2 The boresight clearance height is calculated as:
R2 Maean
ExpectedRange
2 2 RMaean where RMean
6367.4425Km
. Running the Link Budget Calculator The Link Budget Calculator is supplied on the RADWIN Manager CD. It may be run stand-alone from the CD or from the RADWIN Manager application. To run the Link Budget Calculator from the CD:
1. Insert the RADWIN Manager CD into the drive on the managing com-
puter. In the window which opens, click the Link Budget Calculator option. 2. If the CD autorun application does not start by itself, then point your browser to Z:\RADWIN\Setup\DATA\Link Budget Calculator.htm where Z should be replaced with your own CD drive name. To run the Link Budget Calculator from the RADWIN Manager:
Choose Help | Link Budget Calculator from the main menu of the RADWIN Manager as in the following figure:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-3 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-1: Accessing the Link Budget Calculator However invoked, your browser displays the following page:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-4 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-2: Link Budget Screen RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-5 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Microsoft Internet Explorer users may see a warning message like this:
Click the yellow bar and follow the instructions to allow blocked content. Note Mozilla FireFox and Google Chrome users may see a warning mes-
sage like this:
You may ignore it and continue. To use the Link Budget Calculator for RADWIN 1000/2000/5000:
1. Choose a product from the drop-down list (or choose a Regulation and Band):
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-6 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-3: Product selector 2. Enter the radio details. Note that Rate is chosen from a drop-down list:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-7 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Note Figure D-4: Rate selector The Rate shown, defines the air-interface rate in Mbps. The system operates in TDD mode and has the overhead of the air-interface pro-
toco.l Thus, the Ethernet actual throughput is provided by the Ethernet Rate. For a given air-rate, Ethernet throughput will decrease with increasing range due to propagation delay. The Fade margin is the minimum required for LOS conditions. For degraded link conditions, a larger Fade margin should be used. The EIRP is given in dBm and Watts. 3. If the required range between the two link sites is known, you may enter it directly. Alternatively, you may enter the latitude and longitude of each site in the link, in which case the distance between them will be calcu-
lated and displayed. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-8 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-5: Calculation of distance from site coordinates RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-9 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D 4. Located to the right of the green Coordinates button is a dropdown list of Climactic C Factor values. Figure D-6: Climactic C Factors For help about what these mean, click the ? button to the right of the list in figure D-6. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-10 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-7: Climactic C Factor description In figure D-8 we display a map of the world showing C Factor contours:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-11 Running the Link Budget Calculator Appendix D Figure D-8: World map showing C Factor contours 5. Click Calculate to obtain the required performance estimate. Placing the cursor in any other calculated field will also update the calculated results. Note The Expected Performance parameters are calculated and displayed:
Expected RSS - the expected RSS that the RADWIN Manager shows when the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 ODUs are optimally aligned Ethernet Rate - maximum throughput available for the chosen parameter combination Antenna height for LOS the minimum antenna height required for line-of-sight operation. It is the sum of the height required for boresight clearance due to the earths curvature plus the height required to clear the Fresnel zone If the expected performance is not suitable for your application, try different parameters and repeat the calculation. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-12 About the Fresnel Zone Appendix D About the Fresnel Zone The Fresnel zone (pronounced "frA-nel", with a silent s) is an elliptically shaped conical zone of electromagnetic energy that propagates from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. It is always widest in the middle of the path between the two antennas. Figure D-9: Fresnel zone Fresnel loss is the path loss occurring from multi-path reflections from reflective surfaces such as water, and intervening obstacles such as build-
ings or mountain peaks within the Fresnel zone. Radio links should be designed to accommodate obstructions and atmo-
spheric conditions, weather conditions, large bodies of water, and other reflectors and absorbers of electromagnetic energy. The Fresnel zone provides us with a way to calculate the amount of clear-
ance that a wireless wave needs from an obstacle to ensure that the obsta-
cle does not attenuate the signal. There are infinitely many Fresnel zones located coaxially around the center of the direct wave. The outer boundary of the first Fresnel zone is defined as the combined path length of all paths, which are half wavelength (1/2 ) of the frequency transmitted longer than the direct path. If the total path distance is one wavelength (1 ) longer than the direct path, then the outer boundary is said to be two Fresnel zones. Odd number Fresnel zones rein-
force the direct wave path signal; even number Fresnel zones cancel the direct wave path signal. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-13 About the Fresnel Zone Appendix D The amount of the Fresnel zone clearance is determined by the wavelength of the signal, the path length, and the distance to the obstacle. For reliabil-
ity, point-to-point links are designed to have at least 60% of the first Fresnel zone clear to avoid significant attenuation. The concept of the Fresnel zone is shown in figure D-9 above. The top of the obstruction does not extend far into the Fresnel zone, leaving 60% of the Fresnel zone clear; therefore, the signal is not significantly attenuated. For more about Fresnel zone, see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
Fresnel_zone. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p D-14 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines Appendix E Meticulous implementation of the guidelines in this appendix will provide best protection against electric shock and lightning. 100% protection is neither implied nor possible. Warning Note This appendix is at best a guide. The actual degree of lightning protection required depends on local conditions and regulations. The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 Lightning protection system consists of the following components:
Grounding for the antenna coax cable Grounding for each IDU and ODU External Primary Surge Suppressor units and grounding for the out-
door cable Internal ESD protection circuits over the Power/Telecom lines Grounding for Antenna Cable A Grounding Kit must be connected to the coax antenna cable and reliably grounded as shown in Figure X. The grounding kit is an Andrew Type 223158-2 (www.andrew.com). See figure E-1 below. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-1 Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units Appendix E Figure E-1: Grounding antenna cables Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units ODU Grounding RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 uses a Shielded CAT-5e cable to interconnect the Outdoor (ODU) and Indoor (IDU) units. However, this shielding does not provide a good Lightning Discharge path, since it can not tolerate the high Lightning Current surges. To provide an alternate Lightning Discharge path, the ODU and antenna grounding posts should be connected to ground point by a 10 AWG short copper wire. The device should be permanently connected to ground. IDU Grounding The IDUs grounding post should be connected to the internal ground point, using a grounding wire of at least 10 AWG. The grounding wire should be connected to a grounding rod or the building grounding system. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-2 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E The device should be permanently connected to ground. External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding A Grounding Kit and Surge Arrestor Unit must be located near the ODU and properly grounded as illustrated in figure E-2 and figure E-3 below:
Figure E-2: Grounding a typical pole installation RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-3 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E Figure E-3: Grounding a typical wall installation The next figure shows a close-up of the rear of grounded ODU:
Figure E-4: ODU Surge Suppressor and grounding RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-4 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E The Transtector protection circuits shown in figure E-5 below, utilize silicon avalanche diode technology. The unit consists of an outdoor rated NEMA 3R type enclosure with easy mounting flanges, ground stud attachment and easy wiring. The ALPU-POE features RJ-45 protection circuits for the ODU-IDU data pairs
(pins 1,2 & 3,6) and DC power (pins 4,5 & 6,7 with the pairs bonded). The unit is designed to be wall mounted. An optional set of bracket is avail-
able to allow a wide range of pole mount applications. A dedicated ground stud is provided inside the unit that must be bonded to the nearest ground-
ing system (or Master Ground bar) for proper surge protection. The system wiring is installed with RJ-45 type connectors that can feed directly into the chassis without having to cut, splice or route through awk-
ward strain relief holes. Figure E-5: Transtectors Surge Suppressor To mount the lightning protection devices:
1. Mount the device as close to the ODU as possible. Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom (to prevent water from penetrat-
ing), with the strain reliefs facing the ground. 2. Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit. 3. Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes. 4. Connect the ODU-IDU cable using the RJ-45 jack. 5. Connect one cable between the ODU and the suppressor using an RJ-45 jack. 6. Connect the suppressors ground stud to a grounding point. Use the appropriate wire gauge and type, keeping the wire as short as possible, less than 1m (3), between the stud and the site grounding point. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-5 External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Appendix E 7. Replace the cover. There may also be regulatory requirements to cross bond the ODU-IDU CAT-
5e cable at regular intervals up the mast. This may be as frequent as every 10 meters (33 feet). Note A second Surge Arrestor Unit should be mounted at the building entry point and must be grounded, as shown in figure E-3 above. To mount the lightning protection at the building entry point:
1. Mount the device outside the building, located as near as possible to the entrance of the CAT-5e ODU-IDU cable. Mount the unit so that the cable connectors are at the bottom (to prevent water from penetrating), with the strain reliefs facing the ground. 2. Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit. 3. Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes. 4. Connect the ODU-IDU cable using the RJ-45 jack. 5. Connect one cable between the IDU and the suppressor using an RJ-45 jack. 6. Connect the suppressors ground stud to a grounding point. Use the appropriate wire gauge and type, keeping the wire as short as possible, less than 1m (3), between the stud and the site grounding point. 7. Replace the cover RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-6 Internal ESD Protection circuits Appendix E Figure E-6: Surge Suppressor and grounding at building entry point Internal ESD Protection circuits RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is designed to meet the ETSI/FCC/Aus/NZ/CSA EMC and Safety requirements. To fulfill these requirements, the system's Telecom lines at the ODU/IDU are Transformer-isolated and include internal ESD (Electro-Static-Discharge) Protection circuits. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p E-7 Appendix F FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Links: Background The FCC/IC regulation for 5.4/5.3 GHz allows unlicensed wireless data equipment, provided that it does not interrupt radar services. If radar activ-
ity is detected, the equipment must automatically change frequency chan-
nel. This feature is termed Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). According to the standard, a channel with active radar is prohibited from use for 30 minutes. Before using a channel for transmission, the radio equipment must probe it for radar signals for a period of 60 seconds. The FCC/IC regulations for 5.4 GHz band requires the frequency range 5600 5650 MHz to be banned from use. The FCC regulation for 5.4 GHz band requires that within 35 km radius from any (Terminal Doppler Weather Radars) TDWR location the frequency range 5570 5680 MHz shall be banned from use. Note Follow the instructions in the last section of this chapter. RADWIN radio products support DFS as well as ACS. An immediate consequence of the FCC/IC regulation for 5.4/5.3 GHz is that the standard method of link installation using a single default fixed installa-
tion channel, cannot be used. Instead of the installation procedure of Chapter 4, a link activation method is used. The ODUs do not transmit until they are both configured and in place. An activation button may be found by navigating to Site:Location|Air Interface. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-1 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Appendix F The ODUs are either supplied from the factory ready for use at 5.4 GHz or 5.3 GHz FCC/IC or alternatively, they can be set up for these bands using the RADWIN Manager. The following procedure is generic to all relevant RADWIN radio products. What you see on your running RADWIN Manager may differ in some details from the screen captures used to illustrate this chapter. Note FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation To Activate a FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link:
1. Install RADWIN Manager software as usual. 2. Connect the PC to the IDU-ODU pair to be used as the local site. 3. Run the RADWIN Manager and log in as Installer. You will see the follow-
ing window:
Figure F-1: Activating an ODU - Inactive link When the Manager Main Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta-
tus label red and showing Inactive. 4. Click Site:Location | Air Interface for the logged in site. 5. The Air Interface dialog box opens:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-2 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Appendix F Figure F-2: Air Interface dialog box 6. Enter the Link ID and note it for use with the second site of the link. 7. Check the Master radio button. 8. Click OK. The following window appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-3 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Appendix F Figure F-3: The local ODU after activation - Probing Notice that the Link ID is shown in the Link details pane (circled). 9. Repeat the above procedure for the remote ODU, ensuring that in the Air Interface window, that you enter exactly the same Link ID, but this time that you check the Slave radio button. If both ODUs are powered up, after a minute or so a link will be estab-
lished. If you are still connected to the remote site (from the previous steps), the window of figure F-3 will look like this:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-4 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Appendix F Figure F-4: Both sites activated and awaiting configuration FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration The Configuration procedure may be carried out from either site using the Configuration wizard as shown in Chapter 5. Both sites in a FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link must be configured identically. Note The only difference is in the Channel Settings window:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-5 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Appendix F Figure F-5: Channel Select dialog box - ACS permanently enabled ACS cannot be disabled. Note Upon completion of the wizard, the Site configuration dialogs can be used in the usual way. Once operational, the RADWIN Manager window is the same as for other radio equipment models. Here is the RADWIN Manager main window upon completion of the wizard:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-6 FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration Appendix F Figure F-6: FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz operational FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration The FCC requires that devices installed within 35 km of any TDWR location should be registered in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database. The FCC has published a TDWR Location Information table that lists the exact location of all TDWR towers (see table F-1 at the end of the chap-
ter). 1. When installing a 5.4 GHz device define your exact location (latitude and longitude) 2. Use the TDWR Location Information table to determine if the distance between the device and any TDWR tower is less than 35 km. 3. If the distance is less than 35 km then register the device in the voluntary WISPA sponsored database (following section) 4. Disable the frequencies between 5570 5680 MHz from the available channels list. 5. The frequency range between 5.600 to 5.650 GHz is not included in the available channels list. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-7 Registering the Device Appendix F Registering the Device To register a device:
1. Enter the website http://www.spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx and follow the instructions. At your first entry into the site, you will be required to register as a user:
2. Click the User Registration button to enter the registration page. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-8 Registering the Device Appendix F 3. Fill in the registration page and click Register. 4. To complete device registration enter the Register Device tab as shown:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-9 Registering the Device Appendix F You are offered this:
5. Fill in the required information in the preceding web page and click the Register Device button. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-10 TDWR Table TDWR Table Appendix F The following table contains the latitude and longitude locations of Terminal Doppler Weather Radars (TDWR). Use this table to determine if the Master or Client device installed is within 35 km radius of a TDWR location. If one of the installed devices is within 35 km radius of any TDWR location then disable all frequencies between 5570 5680 MHz from the available chan-
nels list. Table F-1: Latitude and longitude locations of TDWRs STATE CITY LONGITUDE LATITUDE FREQUENCY TERRAIN ELEVATION
(MSL) [ft]
ANTENNA HEIGHT ABOVE TERRAIN
[ft]
AZ CO FL FL FL FL FL GA IL IL IN KS KY KY LA MA MD MD MD MI MN MO MO MS NC NC NJ NJ PHOENIX DENVER W 112 09 46 N 33 25 14 5610 MHz 1024 W 104 31 35 N 39 43 39 5615 MHz 5643 FT LAUDERDALE W 080 20 39 N 26 08 36 5645 MHz MIAMI ORLANDO TAMPA W 080 29 28 N 25 45 27 5605 MHz W 081 19 33 N 28 20 37 5640 MHz W 082 31 04 N 27 51 35 5620 MHz WEST PALM BEACH W 080 16 23 N 26 41 17 5615 MHz ATLANTA MCCOOK W 084 15 44 N 33 38 48 5615 MHz W 087 51 31 N 41 47 50 5615 MHz CRESTWOOD W 087 43 47 N 41 39 05 5645 MHz INDIANAPOLIS W 086 26 08 N 39 38 14 5605 MHz 7 10 72 14 20 962 646 663 751 WICHITA W 097 26 13 N 37 30 26 5603 MHz 1270 COVINGTON CINCINNATI W 084 34 48 N 38 53 53 5610 MHz LOUISVILLE W 085 36 38 N 38 02 45 5646 MHz 942 617 NEW ORLEANS W 090 24 11 N 30 01 18 5645 MHz 2 BOSTON W 070 56 01 N 42 09 30 5610 MHz BRANDYWINE W 076 50 42 N 38 41 43 5635 MHz BENFIELD CLINTON DETROIT W 076 37 48 N 39 05 23 5645 MHz W 076 57 43 N 38 45 32 5615 MHz W 083 30 54 N 42 06 40 5615 MHz 151 233 184 249 656 MINNEAPOLIS W 092 55 58 N 44 52 17 5610 MHz 1040 KANSAS CITY SAINT LOUIS W 094 44 31 N 39 29 55 5605 MHz 1040 W 090 29 21 N 38 48 20 5610 MHz DESOTO COUNTY W 089 59 33 N 34 53 45 5610 MHz CHARLOTTE W 080 53 06 N 35 20 14 5608 MHz RALEIGH DURHAM W 078 41 50 N 36 00 07 5647 MHz WOODBRIDGE PENNSAUKEN W 074 16 13 N 40 35 37 5620 MHz W 075 04 12 N 39 56 57 5610 MHz 551 371 757 400 19 39 64 64 113 113 97 80 113 113 97 113 97 80 97 113 97 113 113 113 97 113 80 64 97 113 113 113 113 113 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-11 TDWR Table Appendix F Table F-1: Latitude and longitude locations of TDWRs (Continued) STATE CITY LONGITUDE LATITUDE FREQUENCY TERRAIN ELEVATION
(MSL) [ft]
ANTENNA HEIGHT ABOVE TERRAIN
[ft]
NV NY OH OH OH OK OK OK OK PA PR TN TX TX TX TX UT VA WI LAS VEGAS W 115 00 26 N 36 08 37 5645 MHz 1995 FLOYD BENNETT FIELD W 073 52 49 N 40 35 20 5647 MHz 8 DAYTON CLEVELAND COLUMBUS W 084 07 23 N 40 01 19 5640 MHz W 082 00 28 N 41 17 23 5645 MHz 922 817 W 082 42 55 N 40 00 20 5605 MHz 1037 AERO. CTR TDWR #1 W 097 37 31 N 35 24 19 5610 MHz 1285 AERO. CTR TDWR #2 W 097 37 43 N 35 23 34 5620 MHz 1293 TULSA W 095 49 34 N 36 04 14 5605 MHz 712 OKLAHOMA CITY W 097 30 36 N 35 16 34 5603 MHz 1195 HANOVER SAN JUAN NASHVILLE W 080 29 10 N 40 30 05 5615 MHz 1266 W 066 10 46 N 18 28 26 5610 MHz W 086 39 42 N 35 58 47 5605 MHz HOUSTON INTERCONTL W 095 34 01 N 30 03 54 5605 MHz PEARLAND W 095 14 30 N 29 30 59 5645 MHz DALLAS LOVE FIELD W 096 58 06 N 32 55 33 5608 MHz LEWISVILLE DFW W 096 55 05 N 33 03 53 5640 MHz SALT LAKE CITY W 111 55 47 N 40 58 02 5610 MHz 4219 LEESBURG MILWAUKEE W 077 31 46 N 39 05 02 5605 MHz W 088 02 47 N 42 49 10 5603 MHz 361 820 59 722 154 36 541 554 64 97 97 113 113 80 97 113 64 113 113 97 97 80 80 31 80 113 113 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p F-12 Appendix G MIB Reference Introduction About the MIB The RADWIN MIB is a set of APIs that enables external applications to con-
trol RADWIN equipment. The MIB is divided into public and a private API groups:
Public: RFC-1213 (MIB II) variables, RFC-1214 (MIB II) System and Interfaces sections Private: Controlled by RADWIN and supplements the public group. This appendix describes the public and private MIB used by RADWIN. Terminology The following terms are used in this appendix. Term Meaning MIB API Management Information Base Application Programming Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol In addition, the MIB uses internally, the older notions of Local site and Remote site where this manual would use site A and site B. To avoid burdening the reader, this appendix will follow the MIB usage. Interface API Control Method The RADWIN Manager application provides all the means to configure and monitor a RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link, communicating with the SNMP agent in each ODU. Each SNMP agent contains data on each of the IDUs RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-1 Community String Appendix G and ODUs in the link. Both agents communicate with each other over the air using a proprietary protocol. Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single IP address. Note To control and configure the device using the MIB, you should adhere to the following rules:
The connection for control and configuration is to the local site, over any SNMP/UDP/IP network. All Parameters should be consistent between both of the ODUs. Note that inconsistency of air parameters can break the air connection. To correct air parameters inconsistency you must reconfigure each of the ODUs. Common practice is to configure the remote site first and then to configure the local site. For some of the configuration parameters additional action must be taken before the new value is loaded. Please refer to the operation in the parameters description. Some of the MIB parameters values are product dependent. It is strongly recommend using the RADWIN Manager Application for changing these values. Setting wrong values may cause indetermi-
nate results. Community String To control a link, all SNMP requests should go to the local site IP address. The RADWIN Manager uses the Read Community strings public for the local ODU and public-remote for the remote ODU. It uses Write Commu-
nity strings netman for the local ODU and netman-remote for the remote ODU. These are the factory defaults. Private MIB Structure The sections in the private RADWIN MIB and its location in the MIB tree are shown in figure G-1 below:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-2 Private MIB Structure Appendix G Figure G-1: Top Level Sections of the private MIB The products MIB section contains the definition of the Object IDs for the two form factors of the ODU, Integrated Antenna and Connectorized
(referred in the MIB as external antenna):
The ODU MIB contains the sections: Admin, Service, Ethernet, Bridge, Air, PerfMon and Agent. The IDU MIB contains the sections: Admin, Service, Ethernet, Bridge and TDM. The general MIB include a single generic parameter that is used by all traps as a trap description parameter. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-3 MIB Parameters MIB Parameters Appendix G The following section describes all of the MIB parameters. The MIB parame-
ters follow the following naming convention:
<winlink1000><Section 1>...<Section n><Parameter Name>
For each of the configuration and control parameters (parameters with read-write access), the Description column describes when the new value is effective. It is recommended that you perform the appropriate action to make the values affective immediately after any change. Where a change is required on both sides of the link, it is recommended that you change both sides of the link first and then perform the action. Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Table G-1: Supported RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 1 of 2) Name OID Type ifIndex ifDescr ifType ifSpeed
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.xa Integer
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 DisplayString
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5 Integer Gauge ifPhysAddress
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6 Phys-Address ifAdminStatus
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 ifOperStatus
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInNUcastPkts
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.x
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.x
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.x Integer Integer Counter Counter Counter Description A c c e s s RO A unique value for each interface.Its value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber.The value for each interface must remain constant at least from one re-initialization of the entity's network management system to the next re-initialization. RO A textual string containing information about the interface.This string should include the name of the manufacturer, the product name and the version of the hardware interface. RO The type of interface, distinguished according to the physical/link protocol(s) immediately `below'
the network layer in the protocol stack. RO An estimate of the interface's current bandwidth in bits per second.For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for those where no accurate estimation can be made, this object should ontain the nominal bandwidth. RO The interface's address at the protocol layer immediately `below' the network layer in the protocol stack. For interfaces which do not have such an address (e.g., a serial line), this object should contain an octet string of zero length. RW The desired state of the interface. The testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. RO The current operational state of the interface. The testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. RO The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. RO The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol. RO The number of non-unicast (i.e., subnetwork-
broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-4 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-1: Supported RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 2 of 2) Name OID Type ifInErrors
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.x Counter ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.x
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.x Counter Counter ifOutNUcastPkts
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.x Counter a. x is the interface ID MIB Parameters Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 1 of 14) Name OID winlink1000OduAdmProductType winlink1000OduAdmHwRev winlink1000OduAdmSwRev winlink1000OduAdmLinkName winlink1000OduAdmResetCmd 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.4 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.5 Type DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString Integer winlink1000OduAdmAddres 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.6 IpAddress winlink1000OduAdmMask 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.7 IpAddress winlink1000OduAdmGateway 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.8 IpAddress winlink1000OduAdmBroadcast 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.10 Integer winlink1000OduAdmHostsTable winlink1000OduAdmHostsEntry winlink1000OduAdmHostsIndex winlink1000OduAdmHostsIp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.2 IpAddress Description A c c e s s RO The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. RO The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. RO The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent. RO The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a non-
unicast (i.e., a subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address, including those that were discarded or not sent. Description A c c e s s RO ODU configuration description. RO ODU Hardware Version. RO ODU Software Version. RW Link Name. A change is effective immediately. RW Reset Command. A set command with a value of 3 will cause a device reset. The read value is always 0. RW ODU IP address. A change is effective after reset. The parameter is kept for backward compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is recommended. RW ODU Subnet Mask. A change is effective after reset. The parameter is kept for backward compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is recommended. RW ODU default gateway. A change is effective after reset. The parameter is kept for backward compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is recommended. RW This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. N/A Trap destinations table. Each trap destination is defined by an IP address and a UDP port. Up to 10 addresses can be configured. N/A Trap destinations table entry. RO Trap destinations table index. RW Trap destination IP address. A change is effective immediately. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-5 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 2 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAdmHostsPort 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.3 Integer winlink1000OduBuzzerAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.13 Integer winlink1000OduProductId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.14 DisplayString winlink1000OduReadCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.15 DisplayString winlink1000OduReadWriteCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.16 DisplayString winlink1000OduTrapCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.17 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentVersion winlink1000OduAdmRemoteSiteName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.18 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.19 Integer DisplayString Description A c c e s s RW UDP port of the trap destination. A change is effective immediately. RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer while the unit is in install mode. A change is effective immediately. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabled (1). RO This parameter is reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. RW Read Community String. This parameter always returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Read Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RW Read/Write Community String. This parameter always returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Read/Write Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RW Trap Community String. This parameter is used by the Manager application to change the Trap Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RO Major version of the SNMP agent. RO Remote site name. Returns the same value as sysLocation parameter of the remote site. 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.20 Integer RO Minor version of the SNMP agent. winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentMinorVe rsion winlink1000OduAdmLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.21 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmSiteLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.22 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmDefaultPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.23 Integer winlink1000OduAdmConnectionType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.24 Integer winlink1000OduAdmBackToFactorySetti ngsCmd winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.25 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.26 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmVlanID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.27 Integer winlink1000OduAdmVlanPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.28 Integer winlink1000OduAdmSN winlink1000OduSrvMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.29 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.1 DisplayString Integer RW Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Link Password. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RW Site Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager application to change the Link Password of the site. The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values. RO This parameter indicates if the current Link Password is the default password. RO This parameter indicates if the Manager application is connected to the local ODU or to the remote ODU over the air. A value of 'unknown'
indicates community string mismatch. RW Back to factory settings Command. A change is effective after reset. The read value is always 0. RW ODU IP address Configuration. The format is:
<IP_Address>|<Subnet_Mask>|<Default_Gatewa y>|
RW VLAN ID. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN unaware. RW VLAN Priority. 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest priority. RO IDU Serial Number RW System mode. The only value that can be set is installMode; normalMode reserved to the Manager application provided with the product. A change is effective after link re-synchronization. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-6 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 3 of 14) Name OID winlink1000OduSrvBridging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.1 Type Integer Integer winlink1000OduEthernetRemainingRate winlink1000OduEthernetIfTable winlink1000OduEthernetIfEntry winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex winlink1000OduEthernetIfAddress winlink1000OduEthernetIfAdminStatus winlink1000OduEthernetIfOperStatus winlink1000OduEthernetIfFailAction winlink1000OduEthernetNumOfPorts winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortTable winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortEntry winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortIndex winlink1000OduBridgeBaseIfIndex winlink1000OduBridgeTpMode winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortTable winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortEntry winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortIndex winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInFrames winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutFrames winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInBytes winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutBytes winlink1000OduAirFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.6 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.7 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.8 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.3 Integer DisplayString Integer Integer Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.101 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.3 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.4 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.10 Counter 1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.10 2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.1 Counter Integer winlink1000OduAirDesiredRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer winlink1000OduAirSSID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.3 DisplayString winlink1000OduAirTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer winlink1000OduAirSesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 winlink1000OduAirMstrSlv 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirResync 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.8 Integer winlink1000OduAirRxPower winlink1000OduAirTotalFrames winlink1000OduAirBadFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.3 Integer Counter Counter winlink1000OduAirCurrentRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.4 Integer Description A c c e s s RO Bridging Mode. Valid values are: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps. N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table. N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry. RO ODU Ethernet Interface Index. RO ODU MAC address. RW Required state of the interface. RO Current operational state of the interface. RW Failure action of the interface. RO Number of ODU network interfaces. N/A ODU Bridge Ports table. N/A ODU Bridge Ports table entry. RO ODU Bridge Port Number. RO IfIndex corresponding to ODU Bridge port. RW ODU bridge mode. A change is effective after reset. Valid values: hubMode (0) bridgeMode (1). N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table. N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table entry. RO ODU Transparent Bridge Port Number. RO Number of frames received by this port. RO Number of frames transmitted by this port. RO Number of bytes received by this port. RO Number of bytes transmitted by this port. RW Installation Center Frequency. Valid values are product dependent. A change is effective after link re-synchronization. RW Deprecated parameter actual behavior is read-
only. Required Air Rate. For Channel Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively. RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product. RW Required Transmit power in dBm . This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. The min and max values are product specific. A change is effective immediately. RO Current Link State. The value is active (3) during normal operation. RO This parameter indicates if the device was automatically selected into the radio link master or slave. The value is undefined if there is no link. RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to restart the synchronization process. RO Received Signal Strength in dBm. RO Total Number of received radio frames. RO Total number of received radio frames with CRC error. RO Deprecated parameter. Actual rate of the air interface in Mbps. For Channel Bandwidth of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-7 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 4 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAirCurrentRateIdx winlink1000OduAirTxPower36 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.10 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirTxPower48 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.11 Integer winlink1000OduAirCurrentTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.12 Integer winlink1000OduAirMinFrequency winlink1000OduAirMaxFrequency winlink1000OduAirFreqResolution 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.13 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.14 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.15 Integer Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirCurrentFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.16 Integer winlink1000OduAirNumberOfChannels winlink1000OduAirChannelsTable winlink1000OduAirChannelsEntry winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex winlink1000OduAirChannelsFrequency winlink1000OduAirChannelsOperState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.17 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.3 Integer Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirChannelsAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.4 Integer winlink1000OduAirDfsState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.19 Integer winlink1000OduAirAutoChannelSelection State 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.20 Integer winlink1000OduAirEnableTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.21 Integer winlink1000OduAirMinTxPower winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerTable winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerEntry winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerIndex winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPower winlink1000OduAirChannelBandwidth winlink1000OduAirChannelBWTable winlink1000OduAirChannelBWEntry winlink1000OduAirChannelBWIndex winlink1000OduAirChannelBWAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.22 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.24 Integer Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.2 Integer Integer Description A c c e s s RO Index of current air rate. RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only. RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only. RO Current Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal value while the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. RO Minimum center frequency in MHz. RO Maximum center frequency in MHz. RO Center Frequency resolution. Measured in MHz if value < 100 otherwise in KHz. RO Current Center Frequency. Measured in MHz if center frequency resolution value < 100 otherwise in KHz. RO Number of channels that can be used. N/A Table of channels used by automatic channels selection (ACS). N/A ACS channels table entry. RO Channel Index. RO Channel frequency in MHz. RW Channel state. Can be set by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. A change is effective after link re-synchronization. Valid values: disabled
(0) enabled (1). RO Channel state. Product specific and cannot be changed by the user. Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that are AirChannelsOperState enabled and AirChannelsAvail enabled. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Radar detection state. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Deprecated parameter. Indicating Automatic Channel Selection availability at current channel bandwidth. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Indicating Transmit power configuration enabled or disabled. RO Minimum Transmit power in dBm. N/A Table of Maximum transmit power per air rate in dBm. N/A Maximum Transmit power table entry. RO Air interface rate index. RO Maximum Transmit power in dBm. RW Channel bandwidth in KHz. A change is effective after reset. N/A Channel Bandwidths table. N/A Channel Bandwidth table entry. RO Channel Bandwidth index. RO Channel Bandwidth availability product specific. Options are: Not supported supported with manual channel selection supported with Automatic Channel Selection. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-8 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 5 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAirRFD winlink1000OduAirRatesTable winlink1000OduAirRatesEntry winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex winlink1000OduAirRatesAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.26 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.27.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.27.1.2 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirDesiredRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.28 Integer winlink1000OduAirLinkDistance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.29 Integer winlink1000OduAirLinkWorkingMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.30 Integer winlink1000OduAirMajorLinkIfVersion winlink1000OduAirMinorLinkIfVersion winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredOpState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.31 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.32 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.1 winlink1000OduAirHssCurrentOpState winlink1000OduAirHssSyncStatus winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.4 winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseType winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredExtPulseT ype 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.6 Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTable winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEntry winlink1000OduAirHssRfpIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelB W5MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.2 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelB W5MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.3 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelB W10MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.4 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelB W10MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.5 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelB W20MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.6 Integer winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelB W20MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.7 Integer Description A c c e s s RO Current radio frame duration in microseconds. N/A Air Rate indexes table for current channel bandwidth. N/A Air Rate indexes table entry. RO Air Rate index. RO Air Rate availability depending on air interface conditions. RW Required Air Rate index. 0 reserved for Adaptive Rate. A change is effective immediately after Set operation to the master side while the link is up. RO Link distance in meters. A value of -1 indicates an illegal value and is also used when a link is not established. RO Link working mode as a result of comparing versions of both sides of the link. Possible modes are: Unknown - no link Normal - versions on both sides are identical with full compatibility with restricted compatibility or versions on both sides are different with software upgrade or versions incompatibility. RO Major link interface version RO Minor link interface version RW Required Hub Site Synchronization operating state. RO Current Hub Site Synchronization operating state. RO Hub Site Synchronization sync status. RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse detection status. RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse type. RW Hub Site Synchronization required external pulse type. Valid values for read write: {typeA(2) typeB(3) typeC(4) typeD(5)}. Valid value for read only: {notApplicable(1)}. N/A ODU Radio Frame Patterns (RFP) Table. N/A ODU RFP Table entry. RO ODU RFP Table index. The index represent the Radio Frame Pattern: typeA(2) typeB(3) typeC(4) typeD(5). RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio Frame Pattern. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-9 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 6 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAirLockRemote 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.41 Integer winlink1000OduAirAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.42 Integer winlink1000OduAirFeederLoss 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.43 Integer winlink1000OduAirMaxAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.44 Integer winlink1000OduAirMinAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.45 Integer winlink1000OduAirMaxEIRP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.46 Integer winlink1000OduAirAntennaGainConfigSu pport winlink1000OduAirAntennaType winlink1000OduAirRssBalance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.47 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.48 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.49 Integer Integer winlink1000OduAirTotalTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.50 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrUAS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.1 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.2 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrSES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.3 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrBBE 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.4 Gauge 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.5 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrIntegrity winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalTable winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalUAS winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalES winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalSES winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalBBE winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIntegrity Description A c c e s s RW This parameter enables locking the link with a specific ODU. The following values can be set:
Unlock (default) - The ODU is not locked on a specific remote ODU. Unlock can only be performed when the link is not connected. Lock -
The ODU is locked on a specific remote ODU. Lock can only be performed when the link is active. RW Current Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. User defined value in case of external antenna. Legal range:
MinAntennaGain<AntennaGain<MaxAntennaGain
. RW Current Feeder Loss in 0.1 dBm resolution. User defined value in case of external antenna. RO Maximum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. RO Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. RO Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in 0.1 dBm resolution. RO Antenna Gain Configurability options are product specific: supported not supported. RW External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar. RO RSS balance. Relation between RSS in radio 1 and RSS in radio 2. RO Total Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal value While the actual transmit power includes additional attenuation. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current number of Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current number of Background Block Errors starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Indicates the integrity of the entry. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval. RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval. RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval. RO Current number of Background Block Errors per interval. RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-10 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 7 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduPerfMonDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonDayUAS winlink1000OduPerfMonDayES winlink1000OduPerfMonDaySES winlink1000OduPerfMonDayBBE winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIntegrity winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.2 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThre sh1Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.3 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThre sh2Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.4 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.5 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.6 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTSLThre sh1Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.7 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrBBERThr esh1Exceed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.8 Gauge winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTable winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinRS L winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxR SL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLT hresh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLT hresh2Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinTS L Description A c c e s s N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 24 hours and the oldest is 30. RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per interval of 24 hours. RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours. RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per interval of 24 hours. RO Current number of Background Block Errors per interval of 24 hours. RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24 hours. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RO Current Min Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current Max Received Level Reference starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold in the last 15 minutes. RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes. RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold in the last 15 minutes. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current Min Received Level Reference per interval. RO Current Max Received Level Reference per interval. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold per interval. Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold ACCESS read-only per interval. RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-11 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 8 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxT SL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTSLTh resh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalBBER Thresh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinRSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxRSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThres h1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThres h2Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxTSL winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTSLThres h1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayBBERThr esh1Exceed winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrRxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTable winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalRxMB ytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTxMB ytes winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayRxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTxMByte s winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrTable winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.1 Gauge 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.2 Gauge Description A c c e s s RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval. RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval. RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current Min Received Level Reference per Day. RO Current Max Received Level Reference per Day. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day. RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded the RSL2 threshold per Day. RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per Day. RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per Day. RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level exceeded the TSL1 threshold per Day. RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio exceeded the BBER1 threshold per Day. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RO Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period. RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the present 15 minutes period. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current RX Mega Bytes per interval. RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day. RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-12 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 9 of 14) Name OID Type Description A c c e s s winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrActiveS econds winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalTabl e winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalEntr y winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalActiv eSeconds winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayTable winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayEntry winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayIdx winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayActiveS econds winlink1000OduPerfMonTxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.20 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.21 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.22 Integer winlink1000OduPerfMonBBERThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.23 Integer winlink1000OduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeServerI P winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeOffsetFr omUTC 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.1 IpAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.2 Integer RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active. Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active. Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active. N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current 15 min interval. N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96. RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was active. Under TDM backup link the parameter indicates whether the backup link was active. RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring TSL1 counter is incremented. RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL1 counter is incremented. RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring RSL2 counter is incremented. RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a performance monitoring BBER counter is incremented. The units are 1/10 of a percent. RW If 'yes' is chosen the ifIndex Unit Severity Time_T and Alarm Id from the winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind to the end of each private trap. RW IP address of the server from which the current time is loaded. RW Offset from Coordinated Universal Time (minutes). Possible values: -1440..1440. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-13 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 10 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAgnRealTimeAndDate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.3 OctetString winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmLastChang e 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.1 Integer winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmEntry winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmSeverity winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmId winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmIfIndex winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmUnit winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTrapID winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTimeT winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmText winlink1000IduAdmProductType winlink1000IduAdmHwRev winlink1000IduAdmSwRev winlink1000OduAdmNumOfExternalAlar mIn winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInTable winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.4 DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString Integer Description A c c e s s RW This parameter specifies the real time and date Format 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'
(Hexadecimal). A date-time specification:
field octets contents range
1 1-2 year 0..65536 2 3 month 1..12 3 4 day 1.. 31 4 5 hour 0..23 5 6 minutes 0..59 6 7 seconds 0..60
(use 60 for leap-second) 7 8 deci-seconds 0..9 For example Tuesday May 26 1992 at 1:30:15 PM EDT would be displayed as:
07 c8 05 1a 0d 1e 0f 00
( 1992 -5 -26 13:30:15 ) RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each change in the winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable (either an addition or removal of an entry). N/A This table includes the currently active alarms. When a RAISED trap is sent an alarm entry is added to the table. When a CLEAR trap is sent the entry is removed. N/A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED trap. RO A running counter of active alarms. The counter is incremented for every new RAISED trap. It is cleared after a device reset. RO Current Alarm severity. RO Unique Alarm Identifier (combines alarm type and interface). The same AlarmId is used for RAISED and CLEARED alarms. RO Interface Index where the alarm occurred. Alarms that are not associated with a specific interface will have the following value: 65535. RO Unit associated with the alarm. RO ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm was raised. RO Timestamp of this alarm. This number is in seconds from Midnight January 1st 1970. RO Alarm display text (same as the text in the sent trap). RO IDU configuration description. RO IDU Hardware Revision. RO IDU Software Revision. RO Indicates the number of currently available External Alarm Inputs. N/A This is the External Alarm Inputs table. N/A Entry containing the elements of a single External Alarm Input. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-14 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 11 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.1 Integer winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.2 DisplayString winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInAdmin State winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.4 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.3 Integer Integer winlink1000IduAdmSN winlink1000IduSrvDesiredTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.6 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.2 DisplayString Integer winlink1000IduSrvServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.4 ObjectID winlink1000IduSrvActiveTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.6 winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.8 Integer Integer winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesTable winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesEntry winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.2 winlink1000IduSrvPossibleTdmServices Integer Integer winlink1000IduSrvPossibleEthServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.3 Integer winlink1000IduSrvRemainingRate winlink1000IduSrvTrunkCost winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesTable winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesEntry winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesState winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMinRateI dx winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMaxRateI dx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.4 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.5 Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.1 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.3 Integer Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.4 Integer Description A c c e s s RO This value indicates the index of the External Alarm Input entry. RW This field describes the External Alarm Input. It is an optional string of no more than 64 characters which will be used in the event being sent as a result of a change in the status of the External Alarm Input. DEFVAL {Alarm Description}
RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input is enabled or disabled. RO This value indicates the current status of the External Alarm Input. RO Idu Serial Number RW Required trunks bitmap. Note that the number of possible trunks that can be configured may vary based on the IDU hardware configuration the selected air interface rate and the range of the installation. The provided Manager application enables the user to select only available configurations. A change is effective immediately if applied to a master unit and the link is in service mode. RO This parameter is reserved to the Manager application provided with the product. RO A bitmap describing the currently open TDM trunks. RO A bitmap describing the number of TDM trunks that can be opened in the current configuration. The values take into account the IDU hardware configuration the air rate and the installation range. N/A IDU Possible Services table. N/A IDU Services table entry. RO Table index Rate index of the air interface. RO Deprecated parameter. A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate. RO Deprecated parameter. This parameter describes if the Ethernet Service can be opened in the corresponding Air Rate. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabled (1). RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps per air rate. RO Cost of the TDM Service in bps. N/A ODU Possible TDM Services table. N/A ODU TDM Services table entry. RO Table index. The index is the bit mask of the TDM service. RO Represents the TDM service availability. RO Minimum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible. RO Maximum rate index of the air interface which make the service possible. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-15 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 12 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesReason 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.5 Integer winlink1000IduSrvEthActive winlink1000IduSrvEthAvailable winlink1000IduSrvEthThroughput 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.12 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.13 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.14 Integer Integer Gauge winlink1000IduSrvEthMaxInfoRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.15 Integer winlink1000IduEthernetIfTable winlink1000IduEthernetIfEntry winlink1000IduEthernetIfIndex winlink1000IduEthernetIfAddress winlink1000IduEthernetNumOfLanPorts winlink1000IduBridgeTpAging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.1.1.5 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.4.4.2 DisplayString Integer Integer winlink1000IduTdmTxClockAvailStates 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.1 Integer winlink1000IduTdmTxClockDesiredState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.2 Integer winlink1000IduTdmTxClockActualState winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAvailOpti ons 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.3 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.1 Integer Integer winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockDesired 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.2 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.3 Integer winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockActual winlink1000IduTdmConfigTable winlink1000IduTdmConfigEntry winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex winlink1000IduTdmIfIndex Description A c c e s s RO Information about the TDM Service availability. -
Not Applicable if the service is available. The reasons for TDM Service unavailability: - The available throughput isn't sufficient for Service demands; - The IDU HW doesn't support the service; - A Link Password mismatch was detected; - The external pulse type detected is improper for TDM services; - A Software versions mismatch was detected. RO Represents the Ethernet service activation state. RO Represents the Ethernet service availability state. RO Current available Ethernet service throughput in bps. RW Holds the maximum bandwidth (kbps) to be allocated for Ethernet service. Value of zero means that Ethernet service works as best effort. The maximum value is product specific. Refer to the user manual. N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table. N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table entry. RO If Index corresponding to this Interface. RO IDU MAC address. RO Number of LAN interfaces in the IDU. RW Timeout in seconds for aging. Note that for this parameter to be effective the ODU must be configured to HUB mode. A change is effective immediately. RO Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the state is available the bit value is 1. When the state is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available states are: bit 2 = Transparent. bit 3 =
Local Loop Timed. bit 4 = Remote Loop Timed. bit 5 = Local Internal. bit 6 = Remote Internal. RW Required state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control. A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM service. RO Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control. RO Available options of the TDM Master Clock Control each input status is represented by a bit. When the option is available the bit value is 1. When the option is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available options are: bit 2 = Automatic. bit 3 =
Trunk #1. bit 4 = Trunk #2. bit 5 = Trunk #3. bit 6 =
Trunk #4. When no options are available the returned value is: 1 RW Required TDM Master Clock. A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM service. RO Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock. N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table. N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table entry. RO Table index. RO Link index in the interface table. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-16 MIB Parameters Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 13 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000IduTdmLineCoding 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.6 Integer winlink1000IduTdmLoopbackConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.9 Integer winlink1000IduTdmLineStatus winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTable winlink1000IduTdmCurrentEntry winlink1000IduTdmCurrentIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.10 Integer winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocks winlink1000IduTdmCurrentDrops winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTxClock 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.101 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.102 Counter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.103 Integer winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocksHigh winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQual 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.104 Counter Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.8 winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQualEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.9 Integer winlink1000IduTdmSrvEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.10 Integer winlink1000IduTdmBackupAvailableLinks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.11 winlink1000IduTdmBackupTable winlink1000IduTdmBackupEntry winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex winlink1000IduTdmBackupMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.2 Integer Integer Integer winlink1000IduTdmBackupCurrentActive Link winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.3 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.13 Integer winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferDefaultSiz e winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMinSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.14 Integer 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.15 Integer winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMaxSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.16 Integer winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSizeEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.17 Integer winlink1000IduTdmType winlink1000IduTdmTypeEval winlink1000IduTdmLineStatusStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.18 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.19 Integer Integer Description A c c e s s RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only. The parameter controls the line coding. Setting the value to each of the indices applies to all. A change is effective after the next open of the TDM service. RW Loop back configuration table. Each of the trunks can be set Normal Line loop back or Reverse line loop back. A change is effective immediately. RO Line status. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. RO Table index (Same as winlink1000IduTdmLineIndex). RO Number of correct blocks transmitted to the line. RO Number of error blocks transmitted to the line. RW TDM Transmit Clock. A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM service. RO High part of the 64 bits counter Current Blocks RO Estimated average interval between error second events. The valid values are 1-2^31 where a value of -1 is used to indicate an undefined state. RO Estimated average interval between error second events during evaluation process. The valid values are 1-2^31 where a value of -1 is used to indicate an undefined state. RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask. Setting this parameter to value that is bigger than the activated TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation process for 30 seconds. Setting this parameter to 0 will stop the evaluation process immediately. RO Number of TDM backup trunks. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table. N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. RO Table index. RW TDM backup mode: Enable or Disable where the main link is the air link or the external link. Changes will be effective immediatly. RO TDM backup current active link: N/A air link is active or external link is active. RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RO TDM Jitter Buffer Default Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RO TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RO TDM Jitter Buffer Maximum Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation. The value must be between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond. RW TDM Type (The value undefined is read-only). RW TDM Type for evaluation. RO Line status. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-17 MIB Traps Appendix G Table G-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 14 of 14) Name OID Type winlink1000GeneralTrapDescription winlink1000GeneralTrapSeverity winlink1000GeneralCookie 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.3 DisplayString Integer DisplayString winlink1000GeneralEcChangesCounter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.4 Integer Description A c c e s s RO Trap's Description. Used for Trap parameters. RO Trap's Severity. Used for Trap parameters. RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with the product used for saving user preferences affecting ODU operation. RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset and is incremented upon each element constant write operation via SNMP or Telnet. MIB Traps General Each ODU can be configured with up to 10 different trap destinations. When the link is operational, each ODU sends traps originating from both Site A and Site B. The source IP address of the trap is the sending ODU. The trap originator can be identified by the trap Community string or by the trap description text. The public Community string is used for Site Al ODU traps and public-
remote (as set by the user) is used for Site B ODU traps. Each trap contains a trap description and additional relevant information such as alarm severity, interface index, time stamp and additional parame-
ters. See table G-3 for additional information. Trap parameters Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 1 of 4) Name trunkStateChanged ID 1 Severity normal linkUp linkDown detectIDU disconnectIDU mismatchIDU 2 3 4 5 6 normal critical normal major major Description Indicates a change in the state of one of the TDM trunks. Raised by both sides of the link. Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: TDM Interface
%n - %x. 2 - %n: Is the trunk number. 3 - %x: Is the alarm type and can be one of the following: Normal, AIS, LOS, Loopback. Indicates that the radio link is up. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Sync on channel %n GHz. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that the radio link is down. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Out of Sync. The reason is:
%s. %s Is the reason. Indicates that the IDU was detected. Raised by both sides of the link. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: IDU of Type %s was Detected. %s Is the type of the IDU. Indicates that the IDU was disconnected. Raised by both sides of the link. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: IDU Disconnected. Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs. Raised by the master only. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description:
IDUs Mismatch: One Side is %s and the Other is %s. %s Is the type of the IDU. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-18 Trap parameters Appendix G Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 2 of 4) Name openedServices ID 7 Severity normal closedServices incompatibleODUs incompatibleIDUs incompatibleOduIdu probingChannel radarDetected transmittingOnChannel scanningChannels incompatiblePartner timeClockSet configurationChanged vlanModeActive tdmServiceAlarm ethServiceClosed ethServiceNotPermitted 8 9 10 11 normal critical major major 12 normal 13 normal 14 normal 15 normal 16 critical 17 normal 18 normal 22 normal 100 major 101 major 102 major encryptionAlarm 103 major changeLinkPasswordAlarm 104 major Description Indicates that services were opened. Raised by the master only. Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: %n2 out of %n1 Requested TDM Trunks have been Opened. 2 - %n1: Is the requested number of TDM truncks. 3
- %n2: Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were opened. Indicates that services were closed. Raised by the master only. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service has been closed. The reason is: %s. %s Is the reason. Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible ODUs. Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible IDUs. Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: The IDU could not be loaded. The reason is: %s. %s Is the incompatibility type. Indicates that the ODU is monitoring radar activity. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Monitoring for radar activity on channel %n GHz. %n is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that radar activity was detected. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Radar activity was detected in
%s, on channel %n GHz. %s Is the site name. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that the ODU is transmitting on channel. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Transmitting on channel %n GHz. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz. Indicates that the ODU is scanning channels. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Channel scanning in progress. Indicates that configuration problem was detected and that link installation is required to fix it. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Configuration problem detected. Link installation required. Indicates that the ODU time clock was set. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: The time was set to: %p. %p Is the date and time. Indicates that the ODU was recovered from an error, but there are configuration changes. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description:
Configuration changed. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number. Indicates to non-VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support only VLAN tag on management interface. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: VLAN Mode is active. Non-VLAN traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes. Indicates that TDM Service is in alarm state. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Alarm. Indicates that Ethernet Service is closed. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service is closed. Indicates that Ethernet Service is not permitted. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: A valid Idu could not be detected at %s. Please check your configuration. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link. Indicates an encryption key mismatch. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Failed. No Services are available. Indicates that a failure has occurred while attempting to change the Link Password. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Failed to change the Link Password at/on: %s. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-19 Trap parameters Appendix G Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 3 of 4) Name externalAlarmInPort1Alarm Severity ID 105 major externalAlarmInPort2Alarm 106 major bitFailedAlarm 107 critical wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm 108 major lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm 109 major lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm 110 major mngPortDisconnectedAlarm 111 major externalAlarmInPort3Alarm 112 major externalAlarmInPort4Alarm 113 major swVersionsMismatchFullCompatibilityAlarm 114 warning swVersionsMismatchRestrictedCompatibilityAlarm 115 minor swVersionsMismatchSoftwareUpgradeRequired 116 major swVersionsIncompatible 117 critical tdmBackupAlarm 121 major linkLockUnautorizedRemoteODU 122 major linkLockUnautorizedODU 123 major tdmServiceClear ethServiceOpened encryptionClear 200 normal 201 normal 203 normal Description The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #1. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #2. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 2 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent in case there is no way to recover from the situation. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: ODU power up built in test failed. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number. The trap is sent in case there is a way to recover from the situation. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: Wrong configuration loaded. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number. Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected. Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected. Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Management port status changed to disconnected. The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #3. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 3 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of port #4. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 4 - <User Text> - Alarm. The trap is sent in case SW versions mismatch with full link functionality. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Software versions mismatch - full link functionality The trap is sent in case SW versions mismatch with restricted link functionality. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software versions mismatch - restricted link functionality The trap is sent in case SW versions mismatch and SW upgrade is required. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software versions mismatch - Software upgrade required 1 - Description: Unauthorized remote The trap is sent in case SW versions are incompatible. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: SW Versions incompatible Indicates that the TDM backup link was activated. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM backup alarm -
backup link was activated. Indicates that the remote ODU is unautorized. Contains a single parameter which is its description:
ODU connection rejected. Indicates that the ODU is unautorized. Contains a single parameter which is its description:
connection rejected. Indicates that TDM Service fault is cleared. Contains a single parameter, which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Normal. Indicates that Ethernet Service has been opened. Contains a single parameter,3 which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service has been opened. Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Normal. 1 - Description: Unauthorized ODU RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-20 RADWIN Manager Traps Appendix G Table G-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 4 of 4) Name changeLinkPasswordClear ID 204 Severity normal externalAlarmInPort1Clear 204 normal externalAlarmInPort2Clear 206 normal lanPort1Clear lanPort2Clear mngPort2Clear 209 normal 210 normal 211 normal externalAlarmInPort3Clear 211 normal externalAlarmInPort4Clear 213 normal swVersionsMatchFullCompatibilityClear 214 normal swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear 215 normal swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear 216 normal swVersionsCompatibleClear 217 normal tdmBackupClear linkLockAutorizedODU linkAuthenticationDisabled 221 223 normal normal 224 normal Description Indicates that the Link Password was changed successfully. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Link Password has been changed at/on: %s. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link. This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 1 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 2 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 2 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to connected. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 1 status changed to connected -
%s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex). Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to connected. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 2 status changed to connected -
%s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex). Indicates the management port status changed to connected. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description: Management port status changed to connected - %s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex). This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 3 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 3 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 4 is cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 4 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared. The trap is sent in case SW versions match. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible The trap is sent in case SW versions match and link functionality is not restricted. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software Versions compatible The trap is sent in case SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software Versions compatible The trap is sent in case SW versions compatible Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible Indicates that the ODU is autorized. is its description:
Indicates that the Link Lock is disabled. which is its description:
disabled Contains a single parameter which 1 - Description: Authorized ODU connection permitted. Contains a single parameter 1 - Description: Link Authentication has been RADWIN Manager Traps The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events. These traps are shown in the RADWIN Managerr Events Log. A list of Trap Messages as displayed by the RADWIN Manager is shown in table 7-5. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p G-21 Appendix H External Alarms Specification External Alarms Specification The IDU-C supports external input and output alarms through a standard DB25 pin female connector. Input alarms The input alarms are raised by events from external equipment, such as a fire warning, door open or air conditioner failure. Output alarms Output alarms are generated through dry contact relays to indicate vari-
ous system events according to the following table. An alarm is raised if at least one of the conditions is met. Table H-1: Output Alarms Pinout Description Alarm On Conditions Alarm Off Condition Alarm Output 1 Air interface Alarm Output 2 Equipment Alarm Output 3 Output 4 Service Alarm at Site B N/A Power Failure at Site B Link Loss due to Power Failure at Site B Link is down Link in installation mode Link authentication prob-
lem Built in Test (BIT) error No connection to the ODU Incompatible software Link is up Both ODU and IDU are in operational state Permanently off Link is up or down with-
out power failure indica-
tion within the last two seconds RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p H-1 Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I What is the Combo Configuration Tool?
The RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 is supplied preconfigured to a default fre-
quency band and regulation. The user may however, reconfigure it to use any one of the supported frequency bands shown in the following example:
Product Default Band 2050 FCC/IC 5.8 GHz FCC/IC 5.3 GHz FCC/IC 5.4 GHz FCC/IC 4.9 GHz FCC/IC 2.4 GHz The Combo Configuration Tool is a software utility supplied by RADWIN to change the link frequency band. It runs as familiar Windows Wizard. This appendix will walk you through the Wizard. It also provides help for common problems encountered during the configuration. Who may use the Combo Configuration Tool The Combo Configuration Tool is a password protected utility intended for the use of RADWIN accredited personnel at the users site, RADWIN Cus-
tomer Support Engineers or Professional Installers conversant with FCC requirements. Caveat to the use of the Combo Configuration Tool It is the users responsibility to operate the system according to local regula-
tions and to acquire the relevant permits or licenses for the frequency band selected, if applicable. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-1 Prerequisites to using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I Prerequisites to using the Combo Configuration Tool To use the Tool, you need a PC running Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pro to be connected to the RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 link. Operating the Combo Configuration Tool The tool is supplied as an executable called ComboConfigurationTool.exe. It should be copied to a convenient directory on a hard disk from where it can be run from a command line, or placed on the desktop and opened with a double click. The Combo Configuration Tool is a Wizard, which guides you through the process of changing the frequency band. Before using the Combo Configuration Tool Before starting:
Obtain the IP address of both the local ODU and remote ODUs of the link Make a note of the correct required frequency band If the link uses external antennas, ensure that they support your required frequency band Also, note that 1. The procedure below must be carried out for both ODUs in the link. 2. Changing the frequency band may affect the available Link Budget and system performance. Using the Combo Configuration Tool To change the link frequency band:
1. Open the Tool from a command line or double clicking it on the desktop. The following Welcome screen appears:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-2 Using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I 2. Click Next. The window below is displayed:
3. Enter the ODU IP address and password. 4. Click Next. The following progress panel is displayed:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-3 Using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I Upon completion the following screen is displayed:
The checked item is the currently configured frequency band. 5. Check the box with the required frequency band. If you do not see the required frequency band in the above window, click Cancel and consult RADWIN Customer Support. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-4 Using the Combo Configuration Tool Appendix I
. 6. Otherwise, click Next. The following window is displayed:
7. If the legal notice is acceptable, click the I accept radio button, and then click Next. Two successive progress panels are displayed. The con-
figuration may take several minutes. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-5 If you receive an error message Appendix I Upon successful completion of the configuration process, the following termination window is displayed:
8. Click Finish to exit the Wizard as shown. 9. Repeat the whole process for the second ODU in the link. If you receive an error message The last stage above may terminate unsuccessfully due to an error. Error messages are posted to a window like this:
RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-6 If you receive an error message Appendix I The following table sets out possible errors:
Error Number
(nn) Common mes-
sage preamble:
120 940 1040 1020 Error Text Message The Configure procedure has failed with the following error: ERROR nn occurred:
Failed to communicate with the ODU. Please verify the existence of a sta-
ble IP connection and try again. Product is not identified. The ODU is not a Combo product. A configuration problem detected. Aborting. The only items requiring explanation are errors 940 and 1020. Error 940 may arise as a result of an ODU firmware problem. Error 1020 will appear for any reason not caught by the other entries in the table. In all such cases, you should consult with RADWIN Customer Support. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p I-7 Appendix J Regional Notice: French Canadian Procdures de scurit Gnralits Avant de manipuler du matriel connect des lignes lectriques ou de tlcommunications, il est conseill de se dfaire de bijoux ou de tout autre objet mtallique qui pourrait entrer en contact avec les lments sous ten-
sion. Mise la terre Tous les produits RADWIN doivent tre mis la terre pendant l'usage cou-
rant. La mise la terre est assure en reliant la fiche d'alimentation une prise de courant avec une protection de terre. En outre:
La cosse de masse sur l'IDU-C doit tre constamment connecte la protection de terre, par un cble de diamtre de 18 AWG ou plus. Le matriel mont sur rack doit tre install seulement sur des racks ou armoires relis la terre Une ODU doit mise la terre par un cble de diamtre de 12 AWG ou plus Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection la terre De plus:
Il faut toujours connecter la terre en premier et la dconnecter en dernier Il ne faut jamais connecter les cbles de tlcommunication du matriel non la terre Il faut s'assurer que tous les autres cbles sont dconnects avant de dconnecter la terre RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-1 Protection contre la foudre Appendix J Protection contre la foudre L'utilisation de dispositifs de protection contre la foudre dpend des exi-
gences rglementaires et de l'utilisateur final. Toutes les units extrieures RADWIN sont conues avec des circuits de limitation de surtension afin de minimiser les risques de dommages dus la foudre. RADWIN conseille l'util-
isation d'un dispositif de parafoudre supplmentaire afin de protger le matriel de coups de foudre proches. Matriel supplmentaire requis L'quipement requis pour l'installation du matriel est le suivant:
Pince sertir RJ-45 (si un cble pr-assembl ODU/IDU n'est pas utilis) Perceuse (pour le montage sur mur seulement) Cbles de terre IDU et ODU Clef 13 mm () Cble ODU - IDU si non command (type extrieur, CAT-5e, 4 paires torsades, 24 AWG) Colliers de serrage Ordinateur portable avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP. Prcautions de scurit pendant le montage de ODU Avant de connecter un cble l'ODU, la borne protectrice de masse (visse) de l'ODU doit tre connecte un conducteur externe protecteur ou un pylne reli la terre. Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection la terre. Seulement un personnel qualifi utilisant l'quipement de scurit appropri doit pouvoir monter sur le pylne d'antenne. De mme, l'installation ou le dmontage de ODU ou de pylnes doit tre effectue seulement par des professionnels ayant suivi une formation. Pour monter l'ODU:
1. Vrifier que les supports de fixation de l'ODU sont correctement mis la terre. 2. Monter l'unit ODU sur le pylne ou sur le mur; se rfrer la Installa-
tion sur pylne et mur au dessous. 3. Connecter la cble de terre au point de chssis sur l'ODU. 4. Relier le cble ODU-IDU au connecteur ODU RJ-45. 5. Visser les presses-toupe de cbles pour assurer le scellement herm-
tique des units ODU. 6. Attacher le cble au pylne ou aux supports en utilisant des colliers clas-
ss UV. 7. Rpter la procdure sur le site distant. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-2 Connecter la terre IDU-C Appendix J Prudence Prudence Ne pas se placer en face d'une ODU sous tension. Connecter la terre IDU-C Connecter un cble de terre de 18 AWG la borne de masse de l'appareil. L'appareil doit tre constamment connect la terre. Les appareils sont prvus pour tre installs par un personnel de ser-
vice. Les appareils doivent tre connects une prise de courant avec une protection de terre. Le courant CC du IDU-C doit tre fourni par l'intermdiaire d'un dis-
joncteur bipolaire et le diamtre du cble doit tre de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-3 Installation sur pylne et mur Appendix J Installation sur pylne et mur L' ODU ou l'O-PoE peuvent tre monts sur un pylne ou un mur. Contenu du kit de montage ODU Le kit de montage ODU comprend les pices suivantes:
une grande clame (voir figure J-1) une petite clame (voir figure J-2) un bras (voir figure J-3) quatre visses hex tte M8x40 deux visses hex tte M8x70 quatre rondelles plates M8 trois rondelles lastiques M8 deux crous M8. Figure J-1: grande clame Figure J-2: petite clame Figure J-3: bras RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-4 Montage sur un pylne Appendix J Montage sur un pylne Figure J-4: Montage sur un pylne RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-5 Montage sur un mur Appendix J Montage sur un mur Figure J-5: Montage sur un mur RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-6 Montage d'une antenne externe Appendix J Montage d'une antenne externe L'antenne externe optionnelle peut tre monte sur un pylne. Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe Le kit de montage d'une antenne externe comprend les pices suivantes Douze rondelles plates Huit rondelles lastiques Huit crous hex Quatre boulons Un support en U Un support pivotement Deux courroies de fixation en mtal Pour installer une antenne externe sur un pylne:
1. Attacher le support en U l'arrire de l'antenne en utilisant quatre ron-
delles plates, quatre rondelles lastiques et quatre crous hex. 2. Attacher le support pivotement au support en U en utilisant huit ron-
delles plates, quatre rondelles lastiques, quatre crous hex et quatre boulons. 3. Passer les deux courroies de fixation par les fentes verticales dans le sup-
port pivotement. 4. Attacher l'antenne au pylne en utilisant les deux courroies de fixation . Ajuster l'inclinaison ncessaire en utilisant l'chelle angulaire et serrer tous les boulons et crous la position requise. RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p J-7 Index Bridge mode,Telnet commands Buzzer, see Beeper 6-21 C Changing link password Channel, selecting Community Strings Changing Editing Factory Default Forgotten passwords MIB passwords Read-Only Read-Write Trap Configuration Parameters Configuring 4-16 4-17, 5-12 6-16 6-15 6-14, G-2 6-16 G-2 4-4 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-3 Advanced Air Interface Air interface Bridge mode Community values. contact person Date and Time Ethernet mode Frequency channel Security Service parameters System System parameters Transmit power View Inventory 6-2, 6-9, 6-11, 6-12, 6-18 6-2 5-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-1 5-1 6-2 5-1 6-2 5-1 6-1 6-2 4-17, 5-12 7-17 Connecting user equipment Customer Support D Date and time, setting Default log on password DFS Configuration Link Activation 6-2, 6-7 4-4 F-1 F-5 F-2 Index A AAR ACS aging time, ODU Bridge Mode Air Interface Technical Specifications, general 1-4 4-17, 6-20, G-8, G-8 6-10 1-12, 1-12 A-1 Alarms Active summary Connector External , specification Antennas Align with beeper Aligning bipolar Buzzer signals monopolar Cable, grounding Connecting Described External Mounting Package Contents External, Mounting Flat panel Parabolic Dish Settings types Broadband Access IP Backhaul Private Networks WiMAX Applications Automatic Adaptive Rate, see AAR Automatic Channel Selection, see ACS Automatic Repeat Request B backup Beeper configuration file ODU replacement mute muting and restoring restore 7-9 7-14 B-3 H-1 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 E-1 3-13 1-10 3-7 3-5 C-3 1-11 1-12 4-19, 5-18 1-8 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-2 1-4 1-4 6-2 7-16 6-17 6-3 6-17 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion 2.6.50p Index 1 Events color codes log priority E F Factory Defaults Reset to Factory Setup Restoring 7-12 7-2, 7-4 7-13 6-14, G-2 6-19 LBC Transmission (Tx) power L Browser warnings Calculations Climactic C Factors described Fresnel Zone, described Internal data Running User input FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure FEC Forward Error Correction, see FEC 7-17 F-1 4-21, 4-22, A-4, A-4 1-4 7-4 D-6 D-2 D-10 D-1 D-13 D-1 D-3 D-1 E-1 5-20 5-21 4-18 4-9 7-1 7-9 7-9 7-9 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-14 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-13 7-13 7-12 7-12 7-13 7-4, 7-4 7-4 7-17 7-8 7-4 7-5 7-15 7-15 7-16 4-7 Lightning and Grounding Guidelines Link Budget Calculator, see LBC Configuration 5-1 Overview 5-10 Step 1 - Start Wizard 5-11 Step 2- System Parameters 5-11 Step 3 - Channel Settings 5-12 Step 4 - Tx Power and Antenna Settings 5-18 Step 5 - Services Step 6 - Summary and exit default frequency default Settings Information Air Interface Thresholds BBER Threshold RSL Threshold Air Interface Thresholds, setting Alarms Active summary Error detection and output saved Compatibility Trap messages Events Log Events log Events references trap background color default colors foreground color Preferences saving Monitor log saving Online Help Performance data, explained Performance monitoring Performance Reports Remote Power Fail Indication Dying-Gasp circuit Troubleshooting Installation 6-2 6-20 6-10 6-10 3-12 1-8 B-3 B-4 1-9 3-10 3-10, 3-11, 4-2 3-8 3-11, 3-12 3-4 1-8 6-3, 6-3, 6-12 6-16 6-12 6-2 6-20 Gateway Telnet display G I IDU Aging time aging time, ODU Bridge Mode Connecting to ODU described IDU-C Alarm Connector Connectors Front panel Described LEDs Mounting Power connections Package Contents Products Indoor Unit, see IDU Installation Menu and Toolbar Functionality Post Configuration main window Post Installation main window see Link, Installation 4-10 5-22 4-27 Installation Mode Inventory Displaying IP address Telnet display K Key Features of Radio Link Advanced Air Interface Capacity Combo Frequency Products Installation and management Range performance Security Spectral Efficiency 1-4 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-3 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion2.6.50p Index 2 ODU Mast and Wall C-1 Overview 4-13 Step 1 - Start Wizard 4-14 Step 2 - System Parameters 4-14 Step 3 - Channel Settings 4-17 Step 4 - Tx Power and Antenna Settings 4-19 Background Step 5 - Services Step 6 - Summary and Exit 4-20 4-25 4-26 4-9, 4-15, 6-20, 7-16, 7-16, 7-17 4-3 Link ID Login Login Errors Incorrect IP Address Incorrect password Unsupported Device Login showing Community Options Manager Software Name Password changing Post Configuration main window Post Installation main window Reinstalling/Realigning Site names 4-6 4-6 4-5 4-5 4-2 4-15 1-5, 7-17 4-16 5-22 4-27 7-3 4-15 7-4 4-9, 4-15, 6-20, 7-16, 7-16, 7-17 Link Budget Calculator, see LBC Link ID Link Site Planning Survey 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 Additional Indoor Site Requirements Stage 1 - Preliminary Survey Stage 2 - Physical Survey 2-4 Additional Outdoor Site Requirements 2-4 2-4 Stage 3 - RF Survey Login Errors Incorrect IP Address Incorrect password Unsupported Device M Management Addresses and trap addresses Configuring the Site Screen, Telnet Manager Software Change log on password Events Log Installing Main window Details pane Main menu Toolbar 4-6 4-6 4-5 6-4 6-1 6-2 6-22 4-7 5-8 4-1 5-1 5-6 5-3 5-2 4-5 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 4-6 5-9 1-14 1-16 1-14 1-7 6-10 1-6, 1-7 1-6 1-7 C-1 1-6, 1-7 C-1 3-2 1-8 7-16 1-10 3-2 4-4, 4-4 4-4 4-4 1-5, 7-17 4-1 main window Monitor pane Ethernet Service Radio Interface, Radio signal strength Off-line functionality Status Bar Manual MIB Chapters by Audience Conventions Terminology About G-1 Community String G-2 Interface API G-1 Parameters G-4 Private G-2 Private Parameters G-5 Reference G-1 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 G-4 Terminology G-1 Traps G-18 G-18 Parameters O ODU Bridge Mode aging time Connectorized described form factors Installation, Mast and Wall Integrated Antenna Mounting Kit Package Contents Products Replacing With integrated antenna P Package, contents of Password Community Default default log on Link PC, Minimum Requirements Performance Monitor Performance Monitoring, set time interval PoE Described PoE device, see PoE Power over Ethernet, see PoE Protection External Lightning Surge Suppressors 7-2 7-4 1-9 E-3 RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion2.6.50p Index 3 Radio Link Grounding Antenna cable IDUs ODUs Internal ESD Protection circuits E-1 E-2 E-2 E-7 R Accessories 1-13 Additional Tools and Materials Required 3-5 Connecting user equipment 3-12 Described 1-5 Documentation set 1-13 Hardware Installation External Antennas Indoor Lightning protection Mounting U ODU Outdoor Outdoor connections Sequence Package Contents IDU ODU Package contents External Antennas Transmission rates Radio Outdoor Unit, see ODU Replacing an ODU restore configuration file S Configuration Files backup to Configuration files restore from Configuration with Telnet Dialog Change Tx Power Ethernet Properties Configuring Bridge 6-9 Maximum information rate 6-12 Ports Mode 6-11 Ethernet PropertiesIDU Aging time 6-
10 Functions Inventory Menu bar Setting the date and time 3-7 3-8 3-7 3-8 3-6 3-6 3-8 3-5 3-2 3-4 3-2 3-5 4-22 7-16 6-2 6-18 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-4 6-9 6-2 6-12 6-2 6-7 View Air Iinterface details VLAN Settings 6-3 6-5 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID 6-7 Priority number 6-6 VLAN ID 6-6 External Alarm Inputs 6-17 Reset site 6-19 Reset site to factory defaults 6-19 Reset site, preserve current configuration 6-19 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-15 6-5 6-5, 6-5 6-5 Editing Forgotten paswwords Initial log on defaults Community Strings Security Features Default Gateway IP address Trap Destination T Technical Specifications Air Interface Air Interface, general Configuration EMC Environmental Ethernet Interface Management Mechanical Power Safety Trap messages typical installation Alarm Connector IDU-C Connectors IDU-C User Port LAN Ports ODU-IDU Cable Ports LAN User Port Connectors A-6 A-1 A-1 A-6 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-6 7-3 3-5 B-1 B-3 B-4 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 Safety Practices 3-1 Grounding 3-1 Preventing overexposure to RF energy 3-1 4-17, 5-12 Selecting channel Site Configuration U User equipment, connecting 4-17, 5-12 W Wiring Specifications RADWIN 1000/2000/5000 User ManualVersion2.6.50p Index 4
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2012-05-16 | 3661 ~ 3689 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2012-05-16
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Radwin Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0008787137
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
27 Habarzel street
|
||||
| 1 |
Tel Aviv, N/A 6971039
|
|||||
| 1 |
Israel
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
Q3K
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
RW2030
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
S******** W******
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Standardization Officer
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+9723********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+9723********
|
||||
| 1 |
s******@radwin.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Hermon Laboratories Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M****** N****
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Harakevet Industrial zone
|
||||
| 1 |
23
|
|||||
| 1 |
Binyamina, 30500
|
|||||
| 1 |
Israel
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+972 ********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+972 ********
|
||||
| 1 |
n******@hermonlabs.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
RADWIN Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
I******** R********
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
27 Habarzel street
|
||||
| 1 |
Tel Aviv, 69710
|
|||||
| 1 |
Israel
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+972 ********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+972 ********
|
||||
| 1 |
I******@radwin.com
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Outdoor radio unit operating in 3.65 GHz band | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Output power is EIRP. Professional installation required. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s), including antenna co-location requirements of 1.1307(b) (3). | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Hermon Laboratories Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
A**** U****
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
972-4********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@hermonlabs.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 9 | UR | 3652.5 | 3672.5 | 3.87 | 24735 Hz | 5M00W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 9 | UR | 3655 | 3670 | 7.28 | 24735 Hz | 10M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 3 | 9 | UR | 3656 | 3669 | 7.1 | 24735 Hz | 10M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 4 | 9 | UR | 3660 | 3665 | 14.62 | 24735 Hz | 20M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 5 | 9 | UR | 3661 | 3664 | 8.97 | 24735 Hz | 20M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 6 | 9 | UR | 3652.5 | 3697.5 | 3.67 | 24735 Hz | 5M00W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 7 | 9 | UR | 3655 | 3695 | 7.396 | 24735 Hz | 10M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 8 | 9 | UR | 3656 | 3694 | 7.31 | 24735 Hz | 10M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 9 | 9 | UR | 3660 | 3690 | 13.677 | 24735 Hz | 20M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 9 | UR | 3661 | 3689 | 8.24 | 24735 Hz | 20M0W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC